1 15-jul-11



SAP BASIS Consider the following example [EMAIL or RAILWAY] For Email - It requires a PC and an Application installed in it.



1. Client requests 2. The request is processed by an interface 3. The request reaches server 4. The server process the request 5. Response back to the user either {Ticket/ Email} This environment is called as a Client/ Server Architecture.


R/2 Client-Server 1. Client provides an interface to communicate with the server. Eg: IE, GUI 2. Client uses DB Client software to communicate with server 3. Each request is processed by communicating with server only I.e. there is no intermediate layer in R/2 4. Servers are heavily loaded/ traffic, long queues there by reducing the performance of the servers. 5. There is no queuing mechanism and only server queues are maintained. 6. Server needs to process the request (Understanding the user language). Interpretation takes time. These are the disadvantages of R/2 Systems.

Client Server Environment: Client requests and server responds. The major disadvantage of Client Server architecture is 1. DB Client is installed on the client 2. Processing takes place at client side 3. No intermediate buffers for the frequently accessed content 4. There is no queue mechanism to handle the requests there by servers are heavily loaded. 5. The server side processing consumes resources to process (Interpret the user requests) The need of middle layer/ tier rose to come out of the steps. The result is the Application layer/ Server Application server is deployed and it provides the following functionality 1. DB Client is installed to free up the clients (i.e. there will be only one DB Client for Application server earlier each client needs DB Client software) 2. There is a queue mechanism to handle the request there by reducing the load on the client and server. 3. User requests are served based on the FIFO using dispatcher. 4. Work process task handlers are used to interpret and process the request.

4 5. Intermediate buffers are available for the frequently accessed content to reduce the load on the Database server. 6. The server side processing is only takes place for new requests there by server resources are optimally used. Need for the Middle Layer: R/3 Architecture

The advantages of deploying Application Layer: It is the Intermediate layer in between the Client and the Server. It is installed with a database client to communicate with the database server i.e. all the clients are freed with DB Clients.

Application server/ layer handle the request and process them based on FIFO (First in and First out). It has its own queue mechanism to process the user request. It also contains the task interpreters to interpret the user request and route it to the server.

5 It is intelligent to store the frequently accessed data thereby reducing the load on the server.

R/3 Architecture: SAP uses the industry specific 3-Layer Architecture and named it as R/3 Architecture. It consists of three 3 Layers 1. Presentation Server/ Layer/ Tier 2. Application Server 3. Database Layer

1. Presentation Server: It is a client for all the SAP Solutions. It is also referred as SAPGUI. There are three 3 types of SAP GUI 1. SAP GUI for windows (On Windows OS) 2. SAP GUI for JAVA 3. SAPGUI for HTML (On all OS where JAVA is supported) (for web based)

SAP provides various versions of GUI (4.6c, 620, 640, 700, 710 and 720) 2. Application Server: It is used to handle the user request and process them to the database. It has dispatcher to process and monitor the user request, work process to process and interpret the requests, Buffer areas to store the frequently accessed data. It absorbs the load both from Client and the server. 3. Database server/ layer/ tier: It is the area where the complete data resides. It has its own queue, process, buffers, and request handling mechanism. Most of the databases are on Oracle. SAP is pushing MAXDB (without any license key), Microsoft SQL Server & IBM DB2 with discounted prizes. SAP is focusing SMB (Small Mid-sized Business) and promoting SAP for nearly 1 million/ Rs. 10 Lakhs/ per customer.

6 Supporting Platforms: SAP can be installed on Microsoft windows 2000, win2k3 (2008 is under evaluation). It can be installed on 32bit or 64bit operating systems. 64 bit means a single process can serve the user with 4GB RAM/ Memory whereas in 32 bit it is 1.9GB Memory. 264, 232 / 8 bytes. HP UNIX and ORACLE HP UNIX ORACLE AIX and ORACLE IBM Specific operating system with version 5.3 technical (TL) level 7 (TL7) AIX and DB/2 Proprietary of IBM gives more mileage. Both provided by IBM ISERIES/ AS400 with DB/2 This is also IBM specific which provides more consistency, reliability, mileage than any other operating system and database. Sun OS (SOLARIS with ORACLE) LINUX (SUSE, RHL (RED HAT LINUX) and ORACLE LINUX) Note: Linux with MaxDB is supported by SAP and provides more leverage (Finance) Microsoft windows and SQL Server This is the best combination for interactive usage 11.23 /

7 Installation of Presentation Server (SAPGUI) Use presentation server DVD and go to the respective OS win32 and run setupall.exe and follow the onscreen instructions.  Saplogon icon is installed on the desktop.  Double click and enter the entries of the application server Launch saplogon icon and click on New Item Enter the Description Application Server SID System No 16-jul-09

BASIS 1. It provides runtime to SAP Applications 2. Basis is a layer where all the applications reside 3. Basis provides the infrastructure to manage, monitor, and administer the SAP Applications Eg: Basis provides User Management Business process Monitoring Role based Security Performance Gauge etc.

Three 3 Tier/ Layer/ Server Architecture 1. Presentation Server 2. Application Server 3. Database Server

1. Presentation Server It is an SAP GUI. It is of 3 types SAPGUI for windows, HTML and JAVA. It is used to establish connection with SAP Application Server based on the name of the application server, Instance Number, SID etc.

e. SCM. Saplogon icon is installed on the desktop. startup transactions . XI. CRM. Same GUI is allowed to login with different languages 3. Double click and enter the entries of the application server Launch saplogon icon and click on New Item Enter the Description Application Server SID System No Click on logon Advantages of Presentation Server: 1.8 Installation of Presentation Server (SAPGUI) Use presentation server DVD and go to the respective OS win32 and run setupall. Single GUI to access all the SAP Applications (ERP. We can login with our logon language i. GUI is user friendly to create favorites. specify the language during logon.exe and follow the onscreen instructions. BI and SRM) 2.

640.To create Favorites Login .0 cannot support the component that are built on 7.To setup startup transactions From menu Extras . GUI is downward compatible to support all the SAP Applications which are below the gui version. 5. 45A etc.10 but 7. Eg: A user belonging to the sales organization. 620. 46D.From Menu Favorites > Add . User parameters are defined for the frequently keyed in content. Execute VA01 (Sales order creation) Select the value for sales organisation by pressing F4 Click on sales organisation field and press F1 and click on technical settings Note the parameter ID . To provide default values for a user while creating a Sales order.9 .Set startup transaction 4. Example: GUI 7. Steps: I. division.00. sales area should get all the values by default while creating sales order (VA01) etc.0 can handle 7..From Tools – Administration SU01 . plant.

Role based menu or with 2. 10.Copying provides all the parameters . (Low Speed/ High Speed) 9. It provides command window to navigate to the respective functionality and minimizes dialogue steps. Now whenever the user executes the transaction VA01 it will be filled with the default values with 0001 and 01 for Sales organization and Distribution channel respectively there by reducing the user tasks. we can configure one GUI and copy the files to the other systems easily.ini These files reside in windows directory i. 8. GUI entries are controlled by using saplogon.From Parameters Tab . It provides access across the low speed connections and displays the screens without graphics/ logo which consume more network traffic.ini/ sapmsg. 6. SAP Easy access Menu to reduce the load on the request processing (Roll Area) 7.e. SAP GUI is intelligent to determine the least loaded server when more than one instance is configured. Execute SU01 . 2.10 Repeat the same for Distribution Channel and Division.Provide PID and VKO Value 0001 Save the data.ini . It gets the information from the Message server. User can be specified with 1. Goto Windows directory Saplogon.ini/ saproute.Edit the user .

Instance number is a 2 digit number that varies between [00 to 97] 98 and 99 are reserved for routing purposes. . SAP Provides various shortcuts window /n to open window from existing window and /o to open a new window /ex to exit the screen. Database Instance 1. 2. 12. Dialogue Instance. In SAP naming convention we define them as an Instance and it is possible to install more than one instance on a single server provided they are differentiated by the instance number. . 2. 3. 14. Application Server It is a physical server which is used to handle and process the user request. Instances is of various types 1. There will be only one instance in the entire system. colors and visual design etc.11 11. The character set can be changed to suite various languages and printers. Database Instance This is the Instance where database is installed. Central Instance. Dialogue Instance These are the instances which are used to handle the load on the central instances. Help). 2. Central Instance This is the Instance where Application Server/ Tier/ Layer are installed. SAP Provides ergonomically designed to configure GUI font size. 3. We can install as many instances as possible assuming that each instance can serve up to 200 . GUI provides default menus (System. 13.500 users depending upon the type of the users.

tsk file specifies the table/ index etc that needs to be created on the DB.Specifies the installation success / failure . 32/64 bit dependent) \usr\sap\SID\sys\exe Start . DB and the OS. Usr\sap\<SID>\sys\exe\uc\NT1386 Installation Logs Sapinst.tsk Sapappl0.str .cmd file and during the process they writes into .log Sapappl0. DB.sqlplus "/as sysdba" Select username from dba_users. Each task is commanded by . Select BNAME from SAPSR3. .Run .12 Kernel Set of Executables (OS.xml -Helps to restart installation from the point where it is failed.USR02.log . Unicode.Structure of the DB Control.log Sapinst_dev. (database users) (Sap Users) SAP K E R DB OS Kernel Provides communication between SAP.log file Eg: Sasapappl0.bck Sapappl0.xml Keydb.also provides similar log in case of installation is aborted .tsk.cmd Sapappl0.

com/swdc 3. 2.13 WHAT HAPPENS DURING INSTALLATION? 1. Checks for user <SID>ADM (SAP System Administrator) Who owns SAP System and has all the privileges on SAP (Start/ Stop/ Environment) Domain Admin. create groups. Extracts the software. Windows App Server <SID>ADM UNIX App Server <SID>ADM Database ORA<SID> Database <SID>ADM . create services etc. ORA<SID> provide the runtime environment for Database. (This problems occurs in a Domain) If the user does not exist it creates now. On Windows OS <SID>ADM is also responsible for database but on UNIX ORA<SID> is the owner to work on the database. assign groups.Can create the userid Note: The user who initiates the installation should have the privileges as Local administrator to install the software. Sapinst tool is used to install the software if required we need to download it from service. AD Admin .sap. create users..

SAPCCMSR is an agent to collect JARM (Java Application response time Management) and pass it to ABAP CCMS (Computing Center Monitoring System) It is only used in JAVA and ABAP stack. It creates Services SAP<SID>_00.Domain Level Local groups . SAP<SID> is used to start the SAP System. SAP<SID>_01. SAPCCMSR are created and Run with user.Locally SAP_LocalAdmin SAP_SOL_GlobalAdmin SAP_SOL_LocalAdmin 6. if the service is not started SAP will not start. from Computer Management -> Local Users and Computers we can view this Users Groups Services Creating directories Executables . SAPSID-Instance Number 5. It creates local groups and global groups and assigns them to users Global groups . SAPOSCOL is started first to check whether the resources are available (Operating system collector) It is used to collect the OS Utilization information and pass into SAP system.DB Dependent .14 Note: SAPSERVICE<SID> is a service used to start and stop the services (Password never expires) <SID>ADM expires for every 30 days Eg: SAPOSCOL. SAPOSCOL.OS Dependent .

Upon running all the tasks the SAP Database is created and DBStatistics runs. 29769 ABAP related tables. DB) .str and data on the exports 10. 12.Extract Kernel Executables (OS. Query: Select count(*) from dba_tables where owner = 'SAPSR3'.TPL Tablespaces are just like almirah in a house.15 Note: . --. Creates the tablespaces and datafiles on DDLORA. Now command files are created pointing to .Create MMC for Windows to start/ stop sap system From cmd prompt Startsap name=SID Sets the user as nr=00 SAPDIAHOST=willsys28 SAPSR3 for ABAP SAPSR3DB for Java Engine Where the systems are installed with these schema owners i.Installation Successful -- . Select count(*). The task files are created to create the tables and load the entries The task files are displayed as process on the installation screen "2 complete 3 running 4 waiting" 11. DB Users are set with default password and SAP Application open RFC Connection. Creates the Database and runs the scripts 8. 9.e. owner from dba_tables group by owner. these users owns the respective databases.. 7.Master password is set accordingly to the company policy .

Set the virtual memory to 20 GB on windows 9. Verify the software using LABLE. Installation Proceeds.2_12 7. 10 networks) 16.sap.com/instguides) 2. Download the software from (www. Select 2004s 19. Ensure the installation ports 21212 and 21213 are kept open 12.service.com/swdc) 4. JAVA Components and JCE Policy 21. Central instance and Typical Installation 20. 3300. SLD (Local SLD) Provide Object server name: Host name 28. Check the compatibility of OS and DB (www. Installation Directories D:\usr\sap \USR directory is created with a shared folder SAP with shared SAPMNT & SAPLOC Eg: SAPMNT: SAPLOC: \\<hostname>\sapmnt ~ d:\usr\sap Both in Win and UNIX Only in Windows not in UNIX . Solman Key 30. Install the OS related patches/ fix packs etc 6. Provide DB SID and DB Host 24. Provide Master Password 23.com/notes) 5. Provide SID and Inst Directory 22. Set the Java environment JAVA_HOME path 8.service. Oracle Client 27.service. Get the Static IP address (192.sap. Parameter Summary 29.sap. 4700 are kept open (DVEBMGS uses these ports) 13. Execute sapinst. Install JRE 1. Exports path 25. Dump the software into system without any spaces in the directories 14. Set the hostname not more than 13 characters 10. Ensure the ports 3200. 3600. 172.ASC 15.16 SAP Installation Steps 1. Download the Installation Guide (www. Search for the known problems from (www. Ensure the internet connection is available with a valid S-USERID 17. Make an entry of the hostname in Hosts file 11.4.sap.service. Kernel Path 26.exe 18.com/platforms) 3.

e. profiles. support packages. ECC6.the complete SAP Application Server.Used for alert logs that is populated by the service SAPCCMSR (Java Stack Only) PRFCLOG .is used to host the Developments PUT SID Hosts Trans SAPMnt: Is a shared SAP Mount which is used to host the directories related to SAP.is used during upgrade .0.17 These are shared between systems and accessed locally and globally CCMS PRFCLOG PUT SID HOSTS Trans CCMS . Netweaver & CRM2007) .These are also populated from JAVA Engine (Generic Request Message Generator GRMG) . [Dev] ----------> [Qlty] ----------> [Prod] SAPmnt TASKS Installing SAP Component on SOLMAN On Windows/ SQL Server On Windows/ Oracle Windows/ DB2 Linux/ Oracle HPUnix/ Oracle AIX Solution Manager connects all the three systems (ERP i. executables etc between systems in the landscape. (It may be required to create SAPMnt in earlier versions but in the current versions based on Netweaver it is created automatically) SAPLoc in Windows This SAPmnt is shared because it needs to share the transports.. .

sapinst_dev.str. Linux.cmd. . Groups. log. CreateDB. UNIX) Sapinst.For UNIX SAP SERVICE <SID> (OS Level Access Related to SAP) Sys system Master Database . III.toc. Services. . Installation Inputs SAPInst SID Instance Number (Default 00.tsk. Kernel (Extraction). Updated Stats. II. LoadDB. Installation Logs Significance Sapinst_dir (Win. 01) Mater Password JCE Policy Path for the CDs. Installation Steps Users. .SAP start ORA<SID> -. . .tpl. RFC's DEFAULT USERS <SID>ADM -. Directories. SharedMnt.18 I.

DB] Installation Directories D:\usr\sap \USR directory is created with a shared folder SAP with shared SAPMNT & SAPLOC Eg: SAPMNT: SAPLOC: \\willsys\sapmnt ~ d:\usr\sap Java Web SAP R/3 Both in Win and UNIX Only in Windows not in UNIX These are shared between systems and accessed locally and globally CCMS PRFCLOG .Multilanguage Support This requires additional 40% of resources.19 J2ee_ADMIN SAP* DDIC SAPSR3 SAPSR3DB Unicode . Earlier case Individual passwords need to be set but now day's only one Master password for all the userids. Multiple Components on a Single DB repository A host is either a client or a server. It requires its own address. A server has its own address and sometimes multiple addresses. A host has its own address on the network. Interface / Screen Exports/ System Copies Kernel [Dependent] Install Mstr [Dependent] Java Comp [Independent] JRE [Dependent] Exports [Independent of OS. and is its own machine. A client accesses the servers. It provides access to services and information.

. (SAPMnt)..Which is mandatory to start SAP 3.Cmd . SAP<SID>_00 . App) predefined shared SAP Directory with SharedMnt.Oracle Listener service should be started on the specified Port (1521-1529) 4.."\\Willsys\Usr" 9.These are also populated from JAVA Engine (Generic Request Message Generator GRMG) PUT . Checks the DB Status . Trans Directory .Used for alert logs that is populated by the service SAPCCMSR (Java Stack Only) PRFCLOG .msc Check the USR Directory (SAP Instance files.Used to collect the OS Resources 2..Used for transporting the Objects Note: SID Specifies the Application Server and is possible to have multiple <SIDS> differed by the instance number Queries: SQL> Select status from V$Instance.is used to host the Developments Check the groups SAPLOCAL_ADMIN SAPGLOBAL_ADMIN ORA_SID_DBA ORA_DBA ORA_SID_OPERATOR Check the services and ensure that they are running 1.the complete SAP Application Server. and SAPLoc on windows Run .20 PUT SID HOSTS Trans CCMS . Trans . SAPOSCOL .is used during upgrade SID Hosts . Oracle Service<SID> which is required for the Database On UNIX ps .ef | grep ora* On Windows services. Listener .

.ABAP Instance .JAVA Instance 98-99 for routing Note: Each SID uses different Ports Note: In the console tree of SOLMAN if all the three entries (SERVICES.properties . USERS and GROUPS) are available then only we can confirm there are 3 Instances in one single system...used to specify the usage types that are installed on the system. \usr\sap\<SID>\config on a particular <SID> ERP <SID1> EP BI JAVA ABAP ERP<SID2> EP BI JAVA ABAP Note: Now-a-days it’s possible to install different engines as add-ons.21 SQL> Startup followed by enter key SQL> shutdown immediate Note: Only one SAPOSCOL per system Max of 97 Systems on a single box SAPOSCOL_00 SAPOSCOL_01 ..... <SID> Directory \usr\sap\<SID>. 11... DVEBMGS <Instance Number> DVEBMGS00 .is a ABAP Engine JC00 ...Standalone JAVA Engine SCS01 . 10. Usagetypes.SAP Central Instance DVEBMGS00 contains J2ee/ SDM/ JSPM directories then it is Integrated Engine (ABAP + JAVA) Note: Portal is only an application that is not based on ABAP Engine . Config...

Instance provides runtime services.22 Eg: Consider Hero Honda Landscape BI .PI Dealers Enterprise Portal 12. i386/ ia64 In 4.hosts all the executables from netweaver exe dir contains UC/ NUC and 32/64.which is an Application server. Work Directory This stores the startup and error logs 17-jul-09 Instance: Logical entity which is installed on a physical entity . 99 for routing purposes) .ERP (ECC5.99 (98. SYS Directory Contains executables and profile parameters to start and stop the system EXE Directory .CRM .7 we can see only exe directory 13. Instance Name Instance No: 00 .SRM Suppliers .0) .

(3201.23 Structure of INSTANCE Instance contains Dispatcher. Once the request is sent to dispatcher the dispatcher keeps the request in queue. Dispatcher It is used to handle the user requests that are coming from SAP GUI using DIAG (Dynamic Information Action Gateway) protocol on port 3200 + Instance Number. SCREEN and SQL. Task Handler with ABAP. Public Buffer . Task Handler contains 3 Interpreters ABAP.Once we logoff everything is rolled off.Until the instance is restarted Work Process Work process handles the user request using Task Handler. 3202 etc) Dispatcher manages all the work process and maintains a queue. DB Client and Roll area. and SQL Interpreters. Queue Mechanism. and Work process. SCREEN. . It also contains buffer areas. Based on the availability of work process it will assign the process to the user request based on FIFO (First In First Out) User Buffer .

Process Flow (LOGON) 1. client. . The response rolls out into the user context before it is sent to the user. 6. password.Hits the database Open SQL This is SAP Proprietary language to ensure that the SAP Components are Database independent. screens and earlier accessed content. Keeps in queue and assign WP based on FIFO 4. (The information is copied into Roll Area which is subsequently available for all the requests made by the user) .from the buffer area. Select statement Modify/ Insert .24 ABAP interpreter used to interpret the ABAP code in the user request SCREEN interpreter use to interpret the screen SQL interpreter interprets the SQL statements that are sent by the user. parameters. User Context It is a user specific roll area which is used to keep user authorizations. The DB process checks the credentials of the user and provides the necessary authorizations to the process. DBWP (Database work process) process and responds back to the R/3 work process. User requests 2. R/3 work process checks for frequently accessed content and keeps the copy in R/3 Buffer areas. Each instance is installed with DB Client software to communicate with Database in Native Language. The work process gets the username. logon language and the task handler interprets and hand over the task to the database process. Dispatcher handles the request 3. The entire information is copied into the user context which is referred as ROLL OUT. 5. The user request is processed and it handovers (handshake) the task to Database process. (Frequently accessed data). The SAP Kernel which is O/S and DB Specific helps in the interpretation.

1.Spool DVEBMGS is only available in the Central instance. It is initiated by Dialogue process. 3.. Further processing continues Types of Work Processes Even though the processes are unique at OS level SAP differentiated between the work processes based on the nature of work.Update E .Gateway S . Dialogue work process initiates Update. The process are determined by the instance name DVEBMGS<Instance_No> For Dialogue instances the work process will be denoted as D01..Purchase Order (or) VA01 .Message G . 2. D01 to DN-1 for Dialogue instances. D02. Background and Spool. It is also recommended to have an update process for every 5 Dialogue.Dialogue V .Sales order 2. UPDATE 'V' It is used to update the transactions in the database. There should be atleast 2 Dialogue work process per instance. If the user accesses other than the transactions in SU56 it is missing authorizations and displayed from the Tcode SU53 (Missing Authorizations) Process Flow (TRANSACTION) 1. copy user context into the Task Handler.25 Note: The user context remains until the user is logged out. Work process requires information that is not available in the work process. It is also referred as ROLL IN 4.2112111 It hosts all the process and their will be only one central instance in the entire system..Back ground M . . DIALOGUE 'D' It is only the process which communicates interactively with the users. User executes a transaction Eg: ME22N . The work process copies the user related information into the task handler i. D . The request is handled by dispatcher and hand over to the work process. The user context is displayed in the transaction SU56.e.Enqueue B . There should be atleast 1 Update in the entire system. Central Instance DVEBMGS .

It is also possible to configure more spool process depending on the print/ spool volume.1 per system . It is possible to have more than one enqueue provided they are installed or configured on the central instance. spool and btc (background) . It ensures consistency for updates. There will be only 1 gateway for each instance. There should be atleast 1 Spool process in the entire system. It is used to load balance the requests to identify the least loaded dispatcher.2 per instance .Initiate update. .1 per system and can be increased Depending upon the update requests but needs to increase only on the Central instance for optimal performance. There should be atleast 2 background work process in the system 5.Initiated by dialogue .Provides consistency for updates .Non-Interactive . 7. It is also used to provide locks to the request that are coming from Dialogue instances. GATEWAY 'G' It is used to provide a means of communication with SAP and NON-SAP systems. It is used to manage all the dispatchers. SPOOL 'S' It is used to print the documents to a printer or output to a fax machine etc. BACKGROUND 'B' The tasks which are expensive or time consuming are scheduled to run in the background mode non-interactively. 18-jul-09 DVEBMGS00 Dialogue Update Enqueue . ENQUEUE 'E' It is used to provide locks for the records that are going to be updated.26 3. 4. There will be only 1 Enqueue configured in the system during the installation. MESSAGE 'M' There should be only 1 message server in the entire R/3 system. 6.Interactive .

service.com/platforms Windows 2003 2000 Adv. Download the software from www. Download the installation guide from the Market place www.It is only the process that outputs the documents to printers.service.2. It also procures lock from enqueue server To serve the requests that is coming from dialogue instances. fax etc.2 . Check the compatibility of OS and DB www. 1 Gateway per instance.com/notes 5. . Install JRE 1.sap.MaxDB Linux 3. Install the OS with relevant support packs/ Fix packs etc.Non-Interactive . Time consuming And long running jobs are scheduled to run in the background mode. Search for the known problems in www.service.It provides an interface to communicate between SAP and NON-SAP Systems.sap.sap. Gateway Spool INSTALLATION 1.Used during load balancing.Oracle .Initiated by dialogue.service.4.DB/2 8 . . It is initialized by Dialogue and BTC.2_12 (Java Run time environment) to run the sap inst screens . Server Or 2008 .Oracle 10.com/instguides 2. 6.MaxDB . Only 1 Per system. Atleast 1 spool per system.27 Background .sap. Message .com/swdc 4.2 per system .0.MS SQL Server .

service.sap. Set the virtual memory to 20GB on windows 20GB swap memory on HP Unix machines.ASC 15. Ensure that internet connection is available with a valid S-Userid.sap. Ensure that the installation ports 21212.sap. underscores are allowed 14. The folders should not contain spaces. Set the JAVA environment variable JAVA_HOME or path Check java -version 8.0 Select the Database From Downloads Tab . Make an entry in the host file etc/hosts. 3300. Set the host name which should not be more than 13 characters 10.Select the components Exports.ECC5 PRACTICAL SESSIONS www.ERP 6.SR2 .com/swdc . Kernels.ECC6 ...28 7.SR3 -EHP1 .sercvice. Ensure that 3200. 10.com/instguides www. ERP 2005 ERP 2004 . Dump the software into the system. 4700. 11. JAVA SR1 . 21213 are not blocked (Need to inform Network Admin or Proxy Admin not to block the ports) 12.EHP2 . Get the private static IP address from the Network team (192.service. 4800 series ports are not blocked.My companies Application component . Verify the software using LABEL. networks) 16. 3600. Special characters etc (Eg NWDump or Newfolder . (DVEBMGS utilises these ports) 13.com/platforms www.all one word). 172. If RAM is more than 20GB then 20GB * 3 = 60GB 9.

LABEL.To check whether these ports are open or blocked.exe From Netweaver 1.29 Click on download to basket Market place > Help and Support > Search for Notes JRE is must as the SAP Screens are developed on JAVA Platform Virtual Memory: [Extended memory towards HDD] Need to set the virtual memory RAM size * 3 + 500MB/ 1GB [32 Bit] Select the drive where SAP is going to be installed. 066) In IDES additional clients . Dialogue Instance From the dump bring up sapinst. Database Instance 3. SRM etc 20-jul-09 INSTALLATION 1. 001.ASC . Central Instance 2. Set the host name Cmd > drivers > etc\hosts IP Address Hostname T1 Shopper Port scan . 811. SCM. Central system Instance (Which contain both Central + Database instance) Goto Installation Master DVD .800. IDES (International Demo Education System) will have more clients 11-12 Predefined clients and in the Non-IDES system only 3 Clients (000. 812 clients are available.IDES system And 6 Exports for IDES system. Note: Only exports will change for each application like CRM.contains the content and the DVD number from which we can find whether it is an Export 1 Or Export 2 etc. There will be only 2 exports for Non .

JCE Policy JAVA Cryptography which is used to provide the secured encryption & decryption over the web . SRM.Continue the installation .0 are (SALES. Kernel DVD 3.Installation depends upon the export content (IDES version may consume 8-12 Hrs) Production version ma take 4-6 Hrs. XI. FINANCE. Exports Exports depend upon the business component which is going to be installed like ERP. It also depends upon the memory. kernel. around 35 modules) . Inst Master DVD 2.exe and on Linux/ UNIX use . SCM.select (0) Typical Installation (to install the system with predefined settings i. .Select the components that needs to be installed (ERP. .Specify the SID and the installation drive.because the content transmission over the web is not secure.. and PURCHASE. BI. password are automatically taken). exports path and JCE policy Required software 1.Specify the JAVA component path. CRM. JAVA Components 4. installation file paths.. It is an executable.e.exe . Components lies in ECC6. .exe). . ./sapinst.Specify the Master password .30 . . CRM. MI) and click on next. and SCM etc.On windows sapinst. EP. The port numbers.Select the respective inst (sapinst. If it is a custom installation more inputs are required.The input lists screen is displayed to review before starting the installation.

. Management of the file system. Menu based consumes more dialogue steps than transaction based that is why SAP BASIS consultants are more familiar with transactions. It is up to the customer to choose the Netweaver components and It is mandatory to choose ABAP components. processes securing the sensitive data. Administration. USER Management. ABAP is the platform for all the SAP Components. fine tuning the performance.e. ABAP is a part of the Netweaver. ABAP provides the runtime environment for all the above components i.31 To display all these over the web then EP (Enterprise portal) is required. Note: All the SAP components will be installed on the Netweaver Platform. POST INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES SAP is a transaction based. database administration irrespective of the SAP component and also managing printers.

service. 4. Hostname and the Hardware key. DDIC and Master password (specified during installation) 1. Alternatively select the system and click on display license script and save it to PC in the . OS. JDI). . DB. Execute [Slicense] Tcode Click on > New Licenses Click on > Install license key and it prompts for the path of the license key. If there is any inconsistency it will recommends us to fix before proceeding further.sap. MI. Based on the displayed message we may need to upgrade OS patch levels. System Type. 3. TEST etc) -Click on continue to display the hardware key input. provide the downloaded file path and click on OK to apply the license. SRM.32 Login to the system with SAP*. It checks the compatibility between OS. Execute transaction SM28/ SICK (Installation consistency check).Hardware key is unique (use command saplicense -key ) . PI. DB and the R/3 kernels. SLICENSE . System Number. purpose(DEV. SCM. BI. QAS.Specify the Hardware key and email-id to generate and send license key to the mail-id specified.Market place www. DB support packs and R/3 Kernels. -Goto . XI. CRM & Solution Manager). Installation number. PRD. The license key is specific to Customer.txt format. SM28/ SICK 2. -Specify the system ID(SID).It is a transaction that is used to apply the license to get the runtime support for the system even though it is valid for 30 days (4 Weeks i.com/licensekey -Click on obtain permanent license key -Select the Installation number based on the component (ERP. NETWEAVER(EP. . It is recommended to apply license because they are not considered for support.e. 28 days). System Settings SE03 Depending upon the type of system we need to set the system to modifiable and not modifiable.

It locks SPAM so that no upgrades are allowed without a valid Maintenance certificate.System Settings . 21-jul-09 1. SE03 . 2. Toggling between the changes are recorded and it is advised to obtain permission from the respective authority to make necessary changes in the Production System PRD Except DEV and SANDBOX remaining all the systems like QAS. PRE-PRD are set to notmodifiable i. This is one of the most important security setting which is liable for auditing. one is the permanent key valid upto [31129999] The other one is Maintenance Certificate which is valid upto 3 Months. OS levels and Database patch levels.33 Goto SE03/ SE06 system change options to set to modifiable or not modifiable. The changes are only transported to the not modifiable systems. This Maintenance certificate is introduced from JAN/ 2009 onwards. no object can be modified in these systems. SICK/ SM28 .e. 3. Kernel Levels. SLICENSE SAP Issues two licenses.SAP Initial Consistency Check Checks for the Incompatibility between R/3 Patch Levels. PRD.

A message will populate to configure TMS in the client 000. DB copy or DB Migration: It is used when a system is setup as a copy of production or preproduction system. Standard Installation : It is used when a fresh system is installed. 1. SE06 . Standard Installation 2. It initializes the Transport Management system. Database copy or Database Migration 1. SE06 transaction is used to set the CTS (Change Transport System). 2.34 Db click on Set system change Option 4.Perform Post Installation Action Select either one of the option. .

In most of the environments [DEV] is treated as DC because.A pop up window prompts to configure Domain Controller.Defining a logical System Creating Virtual Systems . Domain Controller: There will be only one Domain Controller in the system landscape. change password. Domain controller. Including the system in the Domain Specify the Domain Controller Target host System Number User: TMSADM (Default User) TMSADM is a communication user created during TMS configuration (Do not delete the user. lock the user. landscape and their routes. this is the first system in the Landscape Login to the system/ Client 000 with the user other than SAP*/ DDIC Execute T-Code STMS Eg: {from se06 > perform post installation action} > STMS .35 TMS: Transport Management System. It should be executed in STMS and also the RFC connections. Approving the inclusion of Systems Login to the DC Execute STMS From Menu Overview > Systems The system is waiting to be included Select the system and click on approve from Menu SAP System.Specify the description Transport Domain Name: Domain_<SID> Save the configuration NOTE: If the Domain already exists then we can execute a TCode [DICO] to delete the existing TMS configuration. set to expiry will hault the system transports. It is used to setup the systems. SALE . . support packages and applicatoins etc) A message SAP system "waiting to be included in the transport domain" is displayed in the external system. backup domain controller. their roles. 1.

36 It is a standard practice in the industry to create virtual systems as the real systems could not be available during the initial configuration (DEV server is procured during implementation, QAS will be procured after 3 to 4 months from kickoff date and the PRD is procured before 2 months of GoLive) Virtual Machines/ Systems can be replaced by real systems and the configuration now points to the real system. Goto STMS (Domain Controller) > Menu Overview > Systems > SAP System > Create Virtual System For Eg: System : JOQ Description : Quality System TRANSPORT GROUP It is a naming convention group_<SID> we can configure all the systems to a single transport group i.e. all the developments which are performed in Development system will be automatically available to other systems in the landscape. The group of systems which shares the transport directory in common are said to be in one group but due to sensitivity of PRD it is moved into a separate group. 1.
Shared Data


Defining the Landscape

37 Execute STMS > Click on transport routes From over view menu > click on change > from Menu Configuration > Standard Configuration > Three systems in group Eg: Specify DEV: JOD QAS: JOQ PRD: JOP SAVE Provide Three System Configuration under the Description. 22-jul-09 Practicals CONFIGURING STMS

Perform DICO to delete the STMS configured earlier if necessary and the RFC connection from the external system.


38 From 000/ SAP* RZ10 - Initially we have to import profiles from OS Level to SAP level. From menu SYSTEM > Import Profiles of Active Servers SCC4 - Roles are client Specific Logical system <SID> client Cross clients - all the clients SALE - for assigning the logical system. Click on new entries and provide <SID>Clnt900 Default clients : 000, 001, 066 We can create upto 1000 Clients 000 to 999 For the newly created client say in this case 900 a user will be created SAP* with pass as the password. For the first time we cannot login [SAP* / pass] So being from another client perform RZ10 - change the parameter to Login/no_automatic_user_sapstar to 0 instead 1 After creating a client need to perform client copy [SAP_CUST] Always need to copy 000 client because it will have all the customized data.066 is for early watch. Create an new user as SAPUSER copied from SAP*/ DDIC logging in as SAP* user from the newly created client. Login to the new client with our userid and password and lock the DDIC and SAP* ----- TASKS ----SETTING UP A LOGO Execute SMW0 Select (0) Binary data for WebRFC Click on Find button

Click on execute

39 Create new Obj name : ZTEST Desc : IMAGE Browse for the Picture

From settings menu > Click on MIME type Add .jpg format Save. GOTO - SM30 Click on maintain Click on new entries START_IMAGE : ZTEST

Prompts for the Change request - proceed and test the logo SETTING UP TEXT Execute - SE61


Document class : General text From document tab NAME - ZLOGIN_SCREEN_INFO create Type the text - Welcome SAVE. 23-jul-09 Roles granted for me in the SAND BOX for Capgemini


5. RZ10 Used to import the profiles from OS level to DB. The profiles are available in \usr\sap\<sid>\sys\profile. These profile requires management for fine tuning, configuring buffers etc From 000 > Goto RZ10 > Utilities > Import profiles of Active servers >SAVE 6. SMLT

41 Perform language transports if any. The system is an unicoded system to support the all available languages but we need to import the additional languages as per the requirements. Download the languages in \usr\sap\trans\eps\in Directory

Goto SMLT > and create a language > specify supplementary language i.e. if the script is not available in main language it will display in secondary language. English > Primary German > Secondary Goto I18N (Globalization / Internationalization of Languages) Click on > Current NLS settings Get the parameter zcsa/installed_languages = DE If we specify any new language it needs to be updated in the above parameter using RZ10 Clink on ADD from NLS settings to include additional languages that are going to be imported using SMLT.


42 1. Execute I18N 2. Add language that needs to be imported in I18N 3. SMLT create language 4. Click on > Import package > specify the path \usr\sap\trans\eps\in

5. Download language from Market place 6. Import 7. Set the parameter zcsa/installed_languages = AEDZ

6. SPAM Apply the patches that are relevant for SAP application component

7. SR13

Install SAP Library

Html documentation installed on Web Server 3.. DB13 .HTML docu installed on File server 4.Define Backup schedule . HTML Help File ..e...Define standard background (House keeping jobs) .ini) paste the path.43 SAP Provides screen context help i. Plain Html Help . 1. It is in compressed format. (sapdocdc. opened by html help viewer. SM36 . SR13 > New Entries VARIENT SAPHELP PLATFORM WINNT AREA IWBHelp PATH Copy and Paste from Market place..click on date and select backup . For documentation > Market Place > SAP Solutions > SAP ERP >English Note: Need to create a folder in D:\SAPHELP. when a user struck at one screen he can use Menu Help > Application help.It occupies less space. Dynamic Help 2.type (offline/ online) and save 9. 8. Plain HTML .

The maximum number of work process an instance can support is W0 to W99 (100 Work processes). The memory should be calculated after reserving memory for OS and the Database..SM50/ SM66 . If a reporting user requires 3GB of memory then there will be a memory bottleneck.DPMON .44 Note: Create users in SU01 and assign SAP_ALL to the functional and technical team as the security is not implemented.SU56 . 24-jul-09 STRUCTURE OF APPLICATION SERVER Dispatcher Workprocess User Context Task Handler Buffers . but depends upon how heavy the processing goes. The requests are processed by using a dialogue process. If the system supports more than 100 processes then it is better to configure one more instance on the same server differed by the instance number. Dialogue process is the only process that interacts with/ communicates interactively with the user.from Work Directory . There are cases where more than 100 are configured but it is not recommended. Eg: 4GB RAM: 1 GB reserve for OS and DB 3 GB 3000/ 150 = 20 Processes Min and Max upto 40 Processes. Each process requires 75MB to 150MB of memory on any average.ST02 Dispatcher receives the request and processes them according to the queue. * The work process are configured by the parameter rdisp/wp_no_dia = XX . There should be atleast 2 Dialogue process per instance.

. LUW (Outward/ inward) Booking accommodation (LUW for number of days) 2. (No dialogue process remains ideal) Each process can serve 5 . Transportation (LUW for a local tour) BIND 1 & 2 & 3 4. Each LUW is a commit or rollback (no intermediate stage .10 users and Each SAP transaction consists of multiple (LUW Logical unit of work) Each LUW contains task which should be completed/ rollback as a group.45 For an Ideal Instance the sum of the Dialogue processes should more or less equal to non-dialogue process (unless a reporting server.e. BIND 1 & 2 Tickets to and fro + Accommodation) 3. Upon task completion reset the value in RZ11 (No system restart is required) WORK PROCESS MULTIPLEXING (Consider Restaurant Activities). 1. during the month end the parameter can be changed to 1800 10000 from RZ11 for specific period of time.. Appointment (Dates are not available Eg: Darshinam) BIND 1 2 3 4 Each of the LUW is performed by a single different work process and is restricted to 600 Seconds and task has to complete within 600 milliseconds . which needs only dialogue) The dialogue response time should be around 600 to 1000 Milliseconds (1 Second) Each dialogue process is restricted by using a parameter rdisp/max_wprun_time = 600 s (10 Minutes) after which the process will be timed out. Each user transaction may be served by one or more processes with out restricting to the user similarly each work process serve multiple users with out restricting the user. which makes the system inconsistency) CONSIDER A TRAVEL AGENCY In a travel agency buying the ticket is LUW (Outward/inwards). In order to run the activities that consume more time then the above we need to run in the background mode or increase the parameter value from RZ11 (Dynamic parameter) i.

04.270 -50000 .46 LICENSING Standard License Maintenance License .--14. 000 -----. 000 20.8000 USD 10.40000 USD .5000 .till 9999(YYYY) .3% Service Tax + Customs 22% Maintenance cost across the globe except INDIA 5 22% Eg: 1 24% Telco Bajaj ARAMCO 2 26% . 00.000 ------------------------14.3 Months Each user license cost .000 2.04.4000 USD In India tag is 2000 USD for min number of users Eg: 10 + 1 is minimum Developers are charged differently 10 Users + 1 Developer 48000 * 50 = 12.000 4% VAT 17% Maintenance /Year 48. 000 2. 68. 000 . 04.

SOLMAN. EP. SID 2. During an update dialogue updates temporary table and update-process updates them later.47 One License .D:\USR\SAP\SOL\SYS\EXE\UC\NTI386 Note: In Linux SAPDB/ MAXDB will be the cheapest SAPDB/ MAXDB is a DB that comes along with the SAP USMM .Its an executable) Note: All the executables resides in . SRM. BI.System Measurement for the users SUSER . Hardware Key (Installed by SAP . If the reports are long running. . MI License is user based Once the license key is received then goto SLICENSE Tcode -> INSTALL And click Install new licenses button From cmd prompt Soladm> saplicense .get It checks for 1. time consuming.Password never expires (Service Userid) 25-jul-09 Dialogue handles the requests and process only reports with out any assistance. expensive then they can be scheduled to run in the BTC mode. ECC. PI. Hostname 3.

Process PID : The identifier at OS level.Type of Process : (DVEBS) Message and Gateway are not displayed .PID PROCESS MANAGEMENT SM50/ SM66 Work process list is displayed in SM50/ SM66.exe is a dispatcher monitor which can be executed when the user could not login to the system (Experience Hour glass). Dialogue communicates with the message server to obtain locks for a record that is coming from Dialogue instance.dispatcher work process in UNIX 0 to 11 [12] And 1 is for dispatcher 13 Total . Its not a TCode.48 For print requests Dialogue handles the request and update in Temse. DW . Killing the process From Command Prompt > DPMON (Process the list at OS Level) >K > Provide . It is used to kill the process at OS Level. The spool process Prints from Temse (Temporary Sequential file it can be at file/ DB Table) Dialogue communicates with enqueue while updating a transaction and obtains lock so that no user can update there by assuring data consistency. Dialogue is monitored by using SM50. SM66. and DPMON DPMON. Dialogue communicates with the gateway while establishing connection with other SAP systems.Serial Number : Starts with 0 (DEV_W0) in work directory . They are displayed as [DISP+WORK] on windows in the Task Manager. Each process has the following .Serial Number > Provide .

Update. It will be completed only after the task completion/ timeout.Click on SELECT PROCESS . not restart(NO) . Running Waiting : The process is waiting "Available" to serve the user request. CPIC) Shutdown : The process is killed/ shutdown but restart mode set to NO Waiting for PRIV Mode: The process goes into Heap mode. From SM66 .e.Table : Name of the table. Stopped : The process is stopped due to an error.CPU : The amount of time WP spends utilising CPU resources . 26-jul-09 SM66 GLOBAL WORK PROCESS OVERVIEW It displays the processes based on status. . Stopper.User name : Name of the user .Error : No of times the process is restarted .Restart YES/ NO : if the process is terminated and it will restart automatically (Yes).Semaphore : The block that hold at OS Level (DISK) . insert i. Running : The process is executing the task (SM50 running with our Userid should not be considered) On Hold : The user request is on hold by process for waiting certain Resources on the other systems (RFC.Report : The name of the program/ report the WP is executing .Runtime : The amount of time the process spends on the user request. .49 -status : Waiting.Action : Select. SLEEP MODE: The work process goes into sleep mode waiting for resources (RFC problem) . It displays the processes belongs to all the instances.Client : The client number logged in . action on the database.

pmon. BWP are defined by using rdisp/wp_no_btc=2 (Min 2 per system) We can increase as many as possible depending upon the resources. ** Note: We can pause jobs by setting the value to 0 zero ** BWP jobs are defined in SM36 .Checks for every 60 sec into the TBTC* table. BWP runs the job in the Active mode till completion/ Cancelled. a job is scheduled to run at a specific time or periodically. Tables TBC* are used to store the BTC Jobs 4.50 The major advantage of this is it displays the memory consumed by work process.BTCTRNS1 from SE38 We can also use BTCTRNS2 to resume the background jobs (Execute the program) 5. ckpt. Process Flow 1. Double click on the WP to display (Extended. From User > Logoff User > Local or End the session BACKGROUND PROCESS SM36 It is used to run the expensive programs. Example: Daily report. The Dialogue work process handles the request and updates the tables 3. A program SAPMSSYS starts in the dialogue mode at frequency that is defined in the parameter rdisp\btctime=60Sec SAPMSSYS . Weekly sales report or expensive to run in the peak hours so they are scheduled to run in the background mode during off peak hours. reports that consumes more time in the background mode. User submits the request via dispatcher to a WP. arch) SM04 : is used to display the logged in users along with the sessions. 6. Example : 100000 seconds 27Hrs RZ11 (rdisp/btctime) Refer . 2. Roll and the Heap Memory) On Oracle execute PS -ef |grep ora* (lgwr. * To delay the BTC processing increase the time as much as possible. BWP looks into the table and identify the jobs which are in the Ready State. i. We can terminate the session or the user completely using End session or logoff user. dbwr. smon.e.

Released: The time to execute is specified 3. External Commands: The job can be executed by external commands which are defined in SM49/ SM69. These commands are OS commands that will be executed at command level. B.. . Completed: The job is completed or finished Execution server . External Program 1.. 2. 2. ABAP Program .Is a predefined value that is populated during the runtime.51 Specify Jobname: Daily report JobClass: C A. Eg: consider RSPO1041 from SA38 Goto SA38 and define variant for 7 & 15 days Prog: RSPO1041 Variant: willsys SAVE Click on start condition .Name of the instance that provides BWP to run the job Exec Target . Variant . Class B has medium priority over class C jobs Class C jobs runs with Normal Priority JOB STATUS 1.. C (High. BRRESTORE.IMMEDIATE or DATE. Cancelled: The job is cancelled 6. Low Priority) Class A requires a dedicated BTC of class A which are defined in operation modes. External Command 3. BRARCHIEVE. BRCONNECT Use DB13 to schedule the jobs. ABAP Program 2. Medium.Is a predefined program that will be run in the background with user inputs as variants. Active: BWP processing the task 5. The jobs in DB13 uses OS Commands. Eg: BRBACKUP.Willsys_<SID>_00 Click on step JOB STEPS We need to specify the following for the JOB Execution 1. Ready: The Time to run the job is reached 4. Scheduled: The job is defined but time to execute is not specified.

External Programs: NAME: Name of the program Parameter: Target Host: Name : Specify the name of the program and the parameters. RZ04 > Define 1. Event (SM62)/ Operation. Event: When an event triggered in SAP it also triggers the job as well. Specify the processes for modes Goto SM63 to define timing for the modes RZ04 > click on Create [Instance Operation Mode] Peak_mode Peak_mode operations Default SAVE Off peak Off peak Mode Create new Instance willsys28 Start profile Save. 27-jul-09 BACKGROUND JOB MONITORING SM37 .52 3. Instance 2. Operation Modes (Peak and Off Peak) 3. Specify the start condition Immediate/ Periodic/ Jobstart. Job Started: When dependent job started this gets triggered. Specify the name of the target host. OPERATION MODES RZ04 SM63 It is the process of switching DIA to BTC and vice versa during the peak hours as we need more dialogue process and during off peak we need more BWP to run the BTC jobs. Modes.

Execute F8 1. The existing jobs are running for a long time i. 3.might come late No sufficient CABS Long time in ready status indicates 1. 2. job name. Increase BTC work processes based on the available resources by using the parameter rdisp/wp_no_btc = 2 2.e. 3.53 rdisp/wp_no_btc = 2 rdisp/btctime = 10 Operation modes . status ----. The jobs with status RELEASED indicate the jobs are released with scheduled time and waiting for their turn/ time. Schedule the jobs appropriately during off peak hours. Also due to passing the jobs by extending scheduler time/ making BTC to 0 by running the program BTCTRNS1.to make use of the resources optimally SM37 is used for BTC monitoring Execute SM37 Specify username. The configured BTC processes are not sufficient to handle the requests in Ready status. ACTIVE BTC in active status (long time recorded) . date & time. The jobs with status READY indicates the jobs are ready to pickup by the scheduler Eg: Consider a CAB . May be due to heavy load on the system 4. Action: 1. 2. expensive programming or sql statements/ fetching huge amount of data.

2. Jobs that fetch information from BW systems.and click on Job Logs Execute SM37 Highlight the job Click on Job log Sap takes at most care to avoid dead locks. Report to SAP in case of dead locks. 1.Db click . Jobs are waiting to be processed by the target system (RFC. Jobs are waiting for the locks to update the records. annual reports. pay roll run. FINISHED .54 The job is running an expensive activity like client copy. 2. CPIC) 3. 4. Some jobs are bound to run for hours and based on history leave them to run. Active indicates the following 1. Jobs are expensive and running to fetch the content. Reasons and Resolutions ACTION. Wait until the locks are released/ jobs are completed. dunning reports may take hours together or even days to complete successfully. Check the bottle neck on the target system (ERP-BI-EP-SRM-SCM-SRM) 3. Select the status .

File not opened. file sharing issues. ORA-1654) 7.55 The jobs are completed successfully but check the log for further information/ completion. The memory is not sufficient and errors (No Roll Area. Dependent jobs/ events failure 12. 2. Target systems are not available to process the jobs. file not found as well. Archive struck (ORA-255. Reasons for cancellation of Job 1. 5. CANCELLED Job status cancelled/ finished but failed in the log. 4. or corrupted. User and password Issues (Authentication/ Authorization) user lock. As a part of the post installation we need to schedule house keeping jobs in SM36 Execute SM36 Click on "Standard Background Jobs" . ORA-272) 9. Table space over flow (ORA-1653. userid expiry. Variants are not properly defined. password change. Standard Background House keeping Jobs 1. Dead locks issue (Lock mechanism congested) 5. file came with different characters. lack of roles etc. ORA-1632) 8. Problem in the program and inputs (Indefinite loops like 1/0) 11. Page Errors) 10. PXA (Buffer). Update mechanism failed 6. Table space max extent reached (ORA-1631. File system problems: BTC reads from the file system to update the database. 3.

1. .Delete old update requests/ logs 5. RSSNAPDEL 3.56 Click on "Default Scheduling" And schedule the BTC jobs with default time. RSCOLL00 ..Delete the old ABAP Dumps .Collects performance info in transaction ST03.Spool Reorganization Click on Execute And Specify the Days . 6.Used to delete the background jobs Reporting structure "BTC" "DEL" 2.Delete the old spool logs and files . RSMO13002 . RSBTCDEL . RSPO1043 Eg: from SA38 .. RSPO1041 4.

date and status 2. username. It displays the job logs By highlighting a job and click on Job Log . Used to display the jobs based on job.57 From GOTO Menu > Variants > SAVE as Variant SM37 .MONITORING BACKGROUND JOBS. 1.

000 Jobs/ day HP Runs 20.58 3. Client Copy) 6. TIDEL Scheduler 4. We can move the jobs from one instance to another instance. The tool defines when to trigger. MAESTRO Scheduler / IBM These Third party schedulers are not specific to SAP but we can customise these to SAP These job schedulers are intelligent to work based on the status of Predecessors. (Consider the above screen) Active jobs can be moved. fax or email or even updating a database (Eg. Background job out put is a report to a spool (Printer). RED WOOD Scheduler 3. Eg.000 Jobs/day . SAP Job Scheduler 5. We can repeat the scheduling of the job if required 5. how to handle various statuses and alert users accordingly. From Menu Job > Move to different server. CONTROL-M Scheduler 2. 28-jul-09 There are Third Party BTC Job Schedulers 1. KODAK Runs 14. Do not kill the active job unless it is permitted by the owner 4.

e. SAP also sends soft documents as well. Monthly and Annual Reports 8. Dunning report for Finance team 7. Communication with NON SAP Systems to fetch the data 6. Runs payroll for the employees 3. Run long running reports for an End User 2.Business Case Sony an electronics company communicates with suppliers for the TV Cabinets/ Circuit boards. BTC Jobs performs the following: 1. Client copy for the technical consultants 4. Picture tubes. Weekly. the communication is performed electronically. R/3 BIW Replication 5. i. Vendors instead of communicating in hand documents they are advised to communicate in soft documents. assembling & packing. Runs standard jobs for House Keeping .59 BTC .

we can get a list of all existing Tcodes and which programs are called by those transactions.Provide the table name TSTC and execute providing the T-Code to find the Program No bother of "Schedule/ Released" Will not in our scope We need to take care about the Status .60 9. To run Database jobs using external commands DB13 (SM49 provides commands) NOTE: In table TSTC. From SE11 .

Handles High Priority Updates V2 . There are three 3 Types of updates V1 .Handles low priority updates V3 . 4. 3. User submits the request for an update (Let us say a Purchase Order) Eg: Bearers won’t go to the Pantry Similarly All dialogue won’t go to the. DB 2.Update Error Table . Dialogue process updates the temporary tables called as VB* asynchronously VBHDR ..To store data that needs to be updated VBMOD .61 Ready for longer time Active for the longer time.To store update header information VBDATA .Reserved by SAP (Currently no use) Updates are defined by the parameter Rdisp/wp_no_vb=1 Rdisp/wp_no_vb2=2 from RZ11 Technically for every 5 dialogue work process there should be one update of type V1/ V2 Update Flow: 1. BTC logs are deleted by scheduling RSBTCDEL which deletes the log files from TBTC* based on the time interval in the Variant SA38..The modules through which the data is updated VBERR . UPDATE PROCESS It is used to update the database from Temporary tables. Dispatcher handles the request and provides a dialogue process to it.. Dialogue process interprets the request and communicates with enqueue process to provide a lock to update the record consistently.

62 And gets a transaction ID from Number Range Buffer (Transaction SNRO and Table NRIV Number Range Interval Table) SNRO NRIV Eg: .

Update updates the record based on transaction-ID using VBMOD Table (Every update is module based in SAP) 6. If the records stays for longer time in INIT status that indicates the updates are busy or there are no sufficient update processes or update mechanism is deactivate from SM14.Update Releases the lock. Longer Update 2. Archive Struck (ORA-255. Update deactivated in SM14 2. Dead Lock (Needs to inform SAP for Program correction) Updates which could not be updated will be thrown into ERR Status. When the Dialogue updates the temp tables the record is displayed in SM13 which will be processed by update. Update handles the record and change the status to "RUN" If the update stays long time in status RUN 1. Max Extents reached (ORA-1631. Programming problems in LUW 3. ORA-1632) 5. Update inherits the locks and releases them upon updating permanent tables. ORA-272) 29-jul-09 BATCH/ BTC/ BACKGROUND . ORA-1654) 4. 5. 1. UPDATE MONITORING SM13 The record that needs to be updated by update process is displayed in SM13 with status INIT.63 Dialogue Updates . Table Space overflow (ORA-1653. Update gets initialized and reads from Temp Tables and updates the permanent tables synchronously.

That is the reason why dialogue updates Temp Table. 2. UPDATE Statuses. Update releases the lock from the record. 1. User submits the request. Max Extents reached 3. Updates the request in Temp tables (VBHDR. The update are terminated or cancelled due to the following reasons 1. VBMOD. Gets the transaction ID from NRIV (Number Range Interval Table) 6. Update gets initiated to update the VB* content permanently into the database. If any one of the LUW is failed the entire transaction is rolled back. Table space overflow 2. Programmatical Error 5. 7.Repeat Update Used to repeat the ERR updates. Update Deactivation (SM14) Running updates during deactivation DEACTIVATE -----------> THROWS TO ERROR -------------> GOES TO AUTO At this point of time we need to select the update (put a check mark of the update from SM13) and click on [Repeat Update] Refer modules from SM13 . INIT The record is waiting to update by an update process. VBDATA. 4. Dialogue handles the request.64 Each SAP transaction is considered as Single LUW (Logical unit of work) which in turn contains multiple LUW's needs to be committed to commit the SAP Transaction. Obtains lock from Enqueue so the data consistency is achieved and the records are only for display. ERR The record runs in to an Error (Update Error) RUN The update is executing the record into DB AUTO The error records are reprocessed after a system restart/ update activation Automatically. Update inherits the locks. Updates the database based on transaction ID. The following are the statuses displayed in SM13 Transaction. 8. 3. VBERROR) 5. SM13 . 9. Archive struck 4.

Deletes the executed update requests. It is used to manage all the dispatchers and identify the least loaded dispatcher and forward the user request to the dispatcher provided logon load balancing is configured in transaction SMLG . There will be only one message server through out the System. Reorganize the update tables. Update mechanism can be deactivated by setting the parameter rdisp/vb_stop_active=0 to deactivate the update mechanism in case of DB errors. It can be activated from SM14. rdisp/vbdelete=30 to delete the update records older than 30 days irrespective of the status. We can see either V1 or V2 in the standard SAP Program SAPMV45A by executing SE38 MESSAGE SERVER/ PROCESS 1. 2.65 The updates can be repeated with status ERR Rdisp/vbmail = 1 to send email to the users if an update is failed. (Its a background job) V1 and V2 updates needs to be defined in the system. V1 handles critical updates and V2 handles the non-critical updates which are defined by the programmers. Report in SA38 RSM13002 To delete the old update requests. Rdisp/vbreorg =1 to delete the incomplete update request during a system restart.

4. For Eg: MARKETING dewall36_R3I_00 We can find the Active servers from SM51 and on db click on the Host name to view all the Processes. Add an entry in etc/ services As sampsDEV (Message Server Name) Entry should be made on all GUI systems. Open GUI > Select groups and create entry by choosing group. CONFIGURING SMLG 1. Define a logon group from TCode SMLG 2. Note: The load is calculated based on in ST07 5.66 Logon Groups SMLG SMLG > Create Provide GROUP: INSTANCE: Now from SAP Logon Screen Click on Groups > and Provide SID and Message Server. Assign the instance.ini if not exists from (x:\windows) Sapmsg. 3.ini > open [MESSAGE SERVER] DEV = <hostname> 3200/tcp . create a file sapmsg.

It provides locks from a lock table before a record gets updated and ensure that the record is available for display during an update.Dialogue Message server obtains the lock for dialogue process if the request is coming from the Dialogue instances. User communicates using GUI. Enqueue. Message. Update. BTC. 2.ini gets evaluated and checks the port in etc\services to communicate with the message server. . Gateway and Spool DVEBMGS) It is also possible to install and configure all the above servers on different instances or hosts.Queue . SMMS: MESSAGE SERVER MONITORING ENQUEUE PROCESS / SERVER SM12 Monitoring Note: Server Naming convention is used because each of the process serving the user requests (Dialogue. 3. ENQUEUE: It is used to provide data consistency while updating the system. Dispatcher handles the request .67 Mechanism 1. Message server maintains the details of favorite server and routes the request to that dispatcher 4. sapmsg.

Technically the Message and the Enqueue should reside on the same instance (It is not mandatory). RFC .MULTIPLE LUWS MM Dept X + Y (LUW1) Z + M (LUW2) Q + R (LUW3) Sales Dept A + B (LUW1) X + Y (LUW2) R + Q (LUW3) Dead Lock Enqueue process the locks and unlock the record during an update. Enqueue server maintains the lock table on the shared memory of the Central Instance (or on the instance where it is installed) It is recommended to increase the Enqueue processes only on the Central Instance. If both are installed on the same machine then it will be more comfortable for message server to communicate with Enqueue process to obtain locks for Dialogue process that are coming from other instances. It is also possible to increase Enqueue processes to more than one depending upon the updates but most of the customer environments there will be only 1 One enqueue process.68 There will be 1 One Enqueue process installed during installation. It is configured by the parameter rdisp/ wp_no_enq = 1 30-jul-09 DEAD LOCK SAP TRANS -----.

1.LOCK . then we must enlarge the lock table. Enque time is too high . We can resolve the problem by restarting the updates. Check whether the update server is still performing the updates. Locks are monitored in transaction SM12. If updating has not been interpreted. then the lock table can quickly become over filled with the locks held by update requests. If the updating has stopped.SM12 (Lock Management) Enqueue table size is defined by the parameter Enqueue/table_size=4MB (Earlier 1 MB to 4 MB) in Netweaver systems this can be increased to 100MB LOCK MONITORING/ ENQUEUE MONITORING Shared Mode Exclusive Mode.69 DIA .ENQ . If the lock table is filled (Enque/ Table_size) an overflow occurs in the lock table.MSSG .DIA TCODE . In principle the lock which are older than one hour should be reported to the escalation manager. Note: Enque table overflow is recorded in SM21 and ST22 Eg: Execute SU01 from Shawn user/ 800 and edit shramana user Execute SU01 from Shawn user/800 and edit shramana user Following message is displayed SM12 And now execute SM12 which displays the Exclusive Mode lock 2.MSSG .

DIA .DIA-. (Only Terminate or End that session) All the transaction activities are recorded in CDHDR Note: Initially 20Kb Mem is given from ztta_roll_first. but however BTC is allowed.SPOOL -----.(TST01. Update is deactivate (SM14) due to any of the issues in DB. Users complaint that he could not update a record and message pop up stating that the record is locked by user XYZ. 3. Dead locks (Usually never occurs. Then we can consider the following 1. there could be RFC issue or Enque wait time is increasing then consider increasing Enqueue work processes. We need to ensure that dialogue process should not held for longer time. TST03) --. Check the period of lock (if it is older than 1 hour inform to the escalation manager) 3. so highlight this issue to SAP) In some instances we may need to release the locks but we need to follow certain process. If the update gets deactivated then the locks are not released.5ms for Central instance and 100Ms in case of the request that is coming form Dialogue instance.PRINT User request . Do not release the lock in SM12 (Even though there is an option) Lock deletion is recorded in SM21. but there is a collision between PP. 1. Lock table is overflow and the locks are held in SM12 2. 4. Manufacturing and Material Module. 2. TST03)--SPOOL -.PRINT .e. We may need to allow some locks for more than one hour or days (Eg. Payroll update processing) consumes lot of time.(TST01.(Tables TBT*) BTC---.70 As a part of the response time enqueue time should be 1ms . If the Enqueue time increases i. 31-jul-09 SPOOL PROCESSING User request . Get the written B&W approval from the user and terminate the session of that user using SM04.

Temse is a temporary sequential objects that are stored at OS (File system) or Database level which is defined by the parameter rspo/store_location=G or DB (G Means Global Directory \usr\sap\SID\sys\global) (DB Means . TEMSE size is 99000 Refer: SU22 . These print request are processed by the respective Dialogue/ BTC and stores the content in TEMSE .Database tables TST01 and TST03) Note: DIALOGUE BTC .Single Process The Advantages of TEMSE.. It is recommended because the print request are printed faster than database.71 PROCESS/ FLOW: 1. i. LOANS etc) 2.e. Temse remains in the DB/OS unless they are deleted explicitly by SAP standard reports. User request to print a purchase order (or) user schedule to print dunning reports (LEGAL Notices.Multiplexing . TEMSE AT OS OR DB (WHICH ONE IS RECOMMENDED?) OS [G] 1.To identify the tcode/ Authorization objects SP01 SU24 The Temse can be stored in database or OS level.(s_spo_act) . Credits. 2. from Global directory requests can be converted to output request at faster rate than database. This is only recommended when the requests are small in nature. (Every day 50-100 Docs) if the size increases the search at file level consumes more time as (No indexes at file system) .

the name of the author (USER). No of copies are procured from TST01 and Printable data from TST03 . Name of the Printer.Spool Process DIALOGUE . That is Temse is not secured at file system. TST02] . monthly whereas database is hourly (Redo Logs) and daily DB Backup.[TST01. Consumes more time than Temse at OS when there are less no of records.BTC request . Backup is a regular activity on database so the Temse is secured. Temse is a part of Normal Database (TST01 and TST03) no separate memory is required. DB [DB] 1.Spool Process OUT PUT REQUEST FRONT END > Spool process comes at our Desktop Default setting is DB RZ11 : rspo_location : rdisp/ btctime 3. As it is stored in tables.72 3. DIALOGUE . but shows the performance by using Indexes when the user grows (Temse can handle 90000 Requests) 2. File system backup will be weekly. The Spool process reads from TST01 and TST03 i.e. File system is not backup frequently as Database. fortnight.

Printer specific format.Whether Changeable or not. If it is performed remotely then it is said to be RAM (Remote access Method) Spool processes are configured by rdisp/wp_no_spo (Rdisp indicates instance specific) There should be at least 1 one Spool process in the entire system. 01-Aug-09 SAP System Note: We should not touch the Repository data of name space 'A' to 'X'. SE11 > table name : /* (/ is a customer name space) .73 Spool Process formats or converts spool requests to output requests i. If the format is performed locally then it is said to be LAN (Local Access Method). We can configure as many as we can depending upon the available resources.e. It is also possible to have dedicated instances which will provide only spool processes PROGRAM[ RSPO1041] to maintain TEMSE. Refer: From SE12 TPFYPROPTY Flag for changes Obj_name = parameter Rdisp/time Type T denotes Dynamic X .

. Market place > keys & Reqs > Development Name space. This is used for load balancing the spools. This is not existing but pointed to a Real spool/ another logical spool server. Note: STMS > System > Transport Tool no_import_all = 0 (No Mass Transportation) SPOOL MECHANISM Dialogue .Line Print Demon Drivers are specific to O/S and not to SAP 1.Is the T-Codes with the program name. (Existing) Logical Spool Server.74 TADIR is the repository TSTC . It is also referred as Real spool server.TBTC* .BTC . It is used to define output devices/ Spool servers and access methods Defining a Spool Server: The instance with atleast one spool process is referred as spool server.TS* Tables Spool process reads from TEMSE and convert spool requests to the output requests (Printer specific requests).TS* Tables Dialogue --------------------.SPAD LPD . SPOOL ADMINISTRATION TCODE .

75 Note: We can set up a dedicated instance for spool process.. Click on create Server Name: LOGICAL SP1 Server Class : Mass Printing Logical Server: Mapping : willsys28_00 Alt server: .. .... Execute SPAD 2. Click on the Spool Server .......... 1...Display then Change 3...... CONFIGURING THE OUT PUT DEVICE.

Device type: HP Model & Manufacturer . Click on output device 3. Click on display 4. Execute SPAD 2. Specify the Output device name Specify the description : Local Printer 7. Click on create 6.76 DEFINING OUTPUT DEVICE/ PRINTER 1. Click on change 5.

Message : Only used by Pay Roll.TEMSE -.Author.77 Device type specifies that the output device is recognized by SAP. SAP sends programs in terms of Patches. Printer.) . Device Class: (Standard. SPAD > Utilities > For device types > Import If the character set is required.. If there is no device type available then select SAPWIN. Fax. Front End.. Print server... Number of copies When printer is defined Spool server (LS/ RS) is assigned In order to print we need the spool process from the assigned instance to convert the spool request in to the output request. Telex etc) Authorization Group : Specifies the access control methods Model: 2200 Location : 5th floor A wing. -------------------Note: Dialogue --. (either Local. Spool process uses Access Methods to format the request. If required write to SAP and try to get the device type.

Select L Select C for UNIX based system (Local Print Method) for Windows (which uses direct operating system call) Select F for FRONT END printing Spool work process goes to the user desktop and format the request based on the printer that is connected to desktop. Sensitive docs. time consuming than any other methods. If this parameter is not used spool congestion occurs. HSM.e. Specify I for Achieving device (Optical Devices. Disadvantages: No user can print in the background because the desktop initiation is not possible in the background during off peak hours. This is more expensive. LOCAL ACCESS METHOD The spool work process and the host spool resides in the same machine i. Jukebox (stores each copy (output doc)) Hierarchal storage machine .78 --------------------02-Aug-09 ACCESS METHODS It specifies the process of formatting the spool request to printer specific output request. Restrict the no of work process that can go into front end mode using the parameter. Advantages: Check printing. rdisp/wp_no_spo_fro_max = 2 i. the work process transfers the spool request to the spool system locally. two work processes can be used for front end printing.e. label printing.

Specify U for UNIX operating system where formatting is performed on the remote machine (Print server) using Berkeley protocol.e. Specify S for windows operating system. . It can be a print server. It will transfer the formatting to remote system using SAP specific protocol SAPLPD For LOCAL & REMOTE For FRONT END > Needs the printer models > SAPWIN When Remote access method is specified we need the following HOST Printer: Destination HOST: i. the printer should be configured on destination HOST. Note: Front end cannot be scheduled in the background.79 REMOTE ACCESS METHODS The formatting by spool work process is performed on remote system.

Waiting 4. In Process 5. Status '. Status '+' 3. In systems where the spool system does not receive any information about the host 6. Completed : . Spool Requests (Stores in Temse) Output Requests Note: Put a check mark [ ] Do not query host spooler for output requests. If this option is checked. 2. ----The Major advantage of TEMSE is the documents can be displayed even before it is printed.Minus' : Indicates not yet sent to the host system (No output requests exist) The spool process is busy/ congested. Printing : : : : Spool request is being generated (Stored in Spool system) Waiting for processing by spool The spool WP is formatting the output for printing The host spool is printing the output request. 1. Output Attributes: Depends upon the company requirements. If the SAP spool system does not receive any status information from the host spool. The system then sets the status to Complete (Competed or Error) The output request printed successfully.80 SPOOL MONITORING SP01. SP01 is used to monitor the spool requests based on statuses. if too many requests with this Status indicates need for increasing spool WP. It improves performance. users can monitor the requests using SP02. this status displayed for approximately one minute. If we need the exact status then uncheck the box. SP02 The spool requests are monitored in SP01. Tray info is also similar.

The requests have not printed and remain in the spool system until they are deleted or until they reach their expiration date and are deleted during a reorganization.10 (1 as High) 3.Use Menu "Spool Request and print directly" or select print with changed parameters.We can also use SPAD for reorganization of spool (but the logic is same) For this Execute . . RSPO1043. These are used to delete the old spool requests based on selection criteria.We need to reorganize the spool requests using the SAP standard reports. printer not available) paper out. TEMSE will be full when it reaches 99. From SP01 --.000 requests and log is generated in SM21 (System Log) . .SPAD > Full ADMIN > ADMIN > Delete old spool requests Or from SA38 execute the program . While changing the parameter we can set the priority between 1 .The TEMSE is full i. Printer issues like (Page setting issues. cartridge issues.81 spool .RSPO0041 ----------Refer SM01 . 1. In general the spool requests which are older than 14 days will be deleted if standard jobs are scheduled in SM36 they also checks the consistency of TEMSE periodically. RSPO0043). (RSPO1041. 7.Select the request -. User complain that they could not print documents to a specific printer. if required we can change the printer and reprint the document.Check the availability of the printer. RSPO0041. the system changes to complete as soon as the output request is sent to the host spool. 2.e. print server not available) these printer specific issues will be resolved by Network Team/ Print Team. Spool request cannot be generated .Transaction Codes [Lock/ Unlock] . Error : It indicates a server error such as network error.

SP01 : Spool request > Forward > (Client to client) Recipient : DDIC Use SBWP (SAP business work place) to display the request in inbox. Similarly we should have enough output devices to avoid the print queues.[ ] print sequentially in SPAD from OP devices attributes tab.SPOOL TEMSE ADMINISTRATION It is used to monitor the memory allocated for TEMSE Note: If we need to forward a spool request select the request in SP01 and forward it to another user where user can print from alternative printer. SETTING DEFAULT PRINTER From SU01 we can specify default printer to the user but do not check the box "delete the request after output immediately" which improves the spool performance. If this is unchecked it prints faster but sequence is not maintained. PRINT QUEUES Note: Should have enough spool work process to format the requests to printer specific requests. Print sequentially consumes time to print in the order.82 ---------SP12 . 03-Aug-09 . The printer can be locked during maintenance in SPAD To process the requests sequentially based on serial numbers Select the option -.

SM37 Operation modes (RZ04. Released. long running. Gateway provides an interface so that the external system can communicate with SAP system on the specified port. cancelled) Job step Program (SA38). btctrans1) Atleast 2 for the entire system SM36.3302 where 01. BTC. GATEWAY WORK PROCESS SMGW SMGW is used to monitor the gateway process. OSCommands (SM49. Systems) TBTC* tables Standard background jobs Pause(rdisp/btctime. SM69). Gateway listens on port '3300'+instance number (3300. wp_no_btc=0.gathers performance into ST03 BTC communicates with enqueue for locking and spool for print. time consuming No time limit Off peak time Scheduled to run periodically using variants Statuses (Scheduled. spool. External Programs (on Tar.10 Users (Refer ST07) Handles request Interactively Multiplexing Rdisp/max_wp_runtime = 600 SM50/ SM66 wp_no_dia DPMON It initiates update. Gateway is used to communicate between SAP and NON-SAP systems. Message server and enqueue BTC Expensive.150 MB 5 . There will be only 1 gateway/ instance. finished. If required we can also install a standalone gateway on a JAVA engine. SM63) RSCOLL . . 3301. active. ready.83 Dialogue 2 Min / Instance 75 . 02 are the instances).

So these profiles are imported into database management for consistency check and version management. security parameters (Password. Message server host. timeout parameters etc. IDOC are transferring they use gateway) INSTANCE MANAGEMENT Instance is managed by using profiles. Startup 3. EDI. The profiles resides at OS level in the directory (usr\sap\<SID>\sys\profile). User restrictions). enqueue host) Instance Profile This is specific to instance configuration such as work process. But the consistency is not checked (say for eg.84 When RFC's are defined between the systems they use SAP gateway when (ALE. buffer parameters. if we modify the instance profile WP DIA=2000 and there is no error message and versions are not maintained under OS level) DEV_DVEBMGS00_willsysdel. Starting Sequence . Do not modify these parameter under any circumstances on OS level. Startup Profile Startup profile consists of startup parameters like Starting Database Starting Message Server Dispatcher + Work. Default 2. Profiles will resides in (usr/sap/<SID>/sys/profiles) There are three types of Profiles 1. They can be managed/ edited using a notepad. Instance Profile As part of post installation we import the profiles of Active servers from RZ10. Default Profile It is used to provide global parameters for all the instances.

RZ10 changes are permanent The field type 'T' Specifies the dynamic parameters. . 3. Eg. message server and dispatcher in Central Instance. Startup profile is read by the system to start the engine by starting (DISP+WORK) on dialogue instance. How many profiles are available on a system with 10 Dialogue instances. Instance specific profile . RZ10 There are three types of Administration.TPFYPROPTY RZ11 is also used to change some parameters dynamically without restarting the system but they will be reset once the system is restarted. 2. Startup profile is read by the system to start the engine by starting database.85 1. Total = 11 (including Central Instance) 11 X 2 per instance (Start + Instance) 22 22 + 1 (Default Instance) = 23 PROFILE MANAGEMENT Documentation for profiles are available in RZ10 Profiles resides in the table .This is used to set the instance specific parameters. There will be only one default profile in the entire system which provides global values. 4.

2. GUI based using mouse . Administration data No need to maintain using this option. It only specifies the path of the parameters. Basic Maintenance: It is used to maintain the profile parameters without any technical names.86 1.

The profile changes are updated at OS level and the existing profile is marked as . It will effect only after restarting the Server. 04-Aug-09 LOGON LOAD BALANCING SMLG ST07 .BAK and a new profile is created in the profile directory. Profiles are changed on SAP recommendation or based on experience. Do not change any of the profiles on trail and error method.Application Monitor: User Distribution SMLG .Logon groups sapmsg.ini .87 3. Extended Maintenance Used by administrator using parameter names Specify the input by including new parameters or modify the existing one. Copy > Save and Activate the profile. System will hang and may not restart.

Fail over (Logical) (As we are configuring logical system) Load balancing provides the following logon groups which are defined in SMLG. Identify the components along with users. Load balancing to avoid long queues 3. If the users are logging to different instances the buffers are scattered therefore they are not effectively used. . Buffers are optimally utilized. User uses SAP GUI -groups option to login 2. Factors to define LLB.88 Logon Load Balancing SMLG It is used to route the requests to the least loaded instance of that group. User select group and click on logon. Mechanism 1. SMLG > Define the groups and assign the instances. So for this * Note: DDLOG is the synchronization table User A A+B =50 User B A+B =75 Buffer Synchronization 1. Saplogon.ini is used to display the available entries 3. 2.

ini 5. account receivables and P&L (Profit and Loss). Message server communicates will all the dispatchers and identifies the least loaded server and mark it as a favorite server in SMLG. The request is routed to the favorite server. This information is required by the customer in SAP System. sapdoccd. 6. saprfc. They would like to work on the traditional systems.IP Address --.89 4. Billing. Example: A customer/ company is running business for the past 30 Years. using SAP. ETL . saproute.ini. account payables. After go live both systems SAP and legacy travel parallely.Load SAP Hero Honda XML Non SAP Dealers SM59 RFC: REMOTE FUNCTION CALL RFC is used to communicate between SAP systems and SAP to Non-SAP systems using TCP/IP protocol. suppliers.Transfer . RFC's are defined in [SM59]. But dealers and suppliers use non-SAP system so it is required to establish communication between SAP and NON SAP systems and perform the data transfer periodically. It looks for sapmsg.e. supplier details.ini (For library).Extract . The data entered in the legacy system i. Sapmsg. Example: Customer implemented SAP but the employees who are old cannot make use of SAP system. Invoices.ini. Shipping are to be transferred periodically(Hourly) bi-hourly(for every 4 hrs) or daily SO --.Hostname of the message server Central instance (but not always) DATA TRANSFER TECHNIQUES During the implementation of the legacy system needs to be preserved or used in the current system. The dispatcher process the request normally.PO BI ---.ini to identify the message server and etc/services for message server port. PO's. There are 4 types of RFC's . vendor details.INV Example: Reliance. When the user select group. Hero Honda [B2B Company to Dealers] not B2C [Distributers to customers] they communicate with dealers. employees and salaries. saplogon.ini ---. He is maintaining customer details. So there is need to transfer the legacy system data to SAP system.

. Synchronous RFC .(Like a post card). Example : Central user administration.It is not like ARFC. A user is created in the parent client and transferred to the child client when they are available? 4. Synchronous RFC 3.e.. Transaction SM58 is used for Transactional RFC. It is used to document all the transactional ID's and ensure that they are received by the recipient system.TRFC . Queue RFC 1.e. The sending system may or may not receive it.It is an advanced version of TRF and ensures that the transaction is committed based on FIFO/ Queue. Transactional RFC . Asynchronous RFC .It is an advanced version of ARFC and SRFC. The request goes to receiving system if it is not handled a Transaction ID is generated by the source system. Asynchronous RFC 2. Note: SAP uses CPIC protocol SAP specific (Common Programming Interface for Communication) to communicate between system. This is consistence and reliable. there is no acknowledgement from the receiving . 2. Queued RFC . Target system/ Receiving system may be busy i. (like a register post).90 1. i. This is reliable but time consuming and expensive (Client Copy) the job should get finished. The transmission is not reliable. If the receiving system is not available the process goes into RFC/ CPIC/ Sleep mode and waits until it is wakened by the target system. It gets an acknowledgement from the target system. It ensures transaction consistency of LUW and reliability of data transmission.Provides interface to monitor Inbound queues. A program RSARFCSE is scheduled in the background to run for every 60 seconds. SMQ2 .to monitor the outbound queues of a sending system refer SCOTT for FAX. Berkley UNIX PRINTER CPIC SRFC 3. all the resources are used up. Transactional RFC 4. SMQ1 . .

(Sap System linking and enabling). Remote logon Perform three times to add 3 systems. Test Connection. DEVCLNT900 To identify the systems easily by name 1. Preciously SAP is client based (A mandatory field while login) Each client is defined with a logical system name that is defined in SALE. Goto > SALE > Basic Settings > Logical System 2. Defining RFC Connection . Logical system number should be <SID>CLNT<CLNT_Number> Eg.model : willsys > Create (The logged in system is treated as Sending system) We need to define recipient/ receiving systems . Save the connection. UID.SM59 1. From 000/ Sapuser Execute SCUA / . Assign logical system to the client. Logon Language) 6. client by 3 digit number. So we need to identify which client is the business client.Provide the name of the logical system 2. Logon Security (Client. Description about the connection 4. There should be unique SID in the Landscape.91 05-Aug-09 DEFINING SYSTEMS . Define Logical System (<SID>CLNT009) 3. Central User Administration SCUA Goto > BD64 or SALE > To define the sending systems and receiving systems Or Use the SAP standard moral for that application. Technical settings (Host name and Instance No) 5. SM59 . Example: To configure central user administration SCUA Tcode is used. PWD.technically 1000 client can be created in one system. Select the connection type '3' 3.SALE SAP systems consists of more than one client . So. Each system is identified by SID.

It wont allows us to create because the receiving systems will become a Child system.Execute SM58 (Transactional RFC) Users are distributed to the child client using TRFC(SM58) and if the client system is not Available the record hangs in SM58 and ensure that is updated in the child client.Electronic Data Interchange It is used to communicate between SAP to NON-SAP systems.NON SAP.define systems and SAVE .. WE05 is the Tcode to monitor the IDOCS SCUL to check the logs WE05 > Status . SCUM is performed only in the Parent System Eg: Consider a Scenario .92 DEVCLNT001 DEVCLNT000 DELCLNT001 save to configure CUA Goto back end systems Try to execute SU01 and create an user .Being in parent create an user assigning profile SAP_ALL .SAP to SAP only. EDI .Stop the other systems . IDOCS (Intermediate Documents) are used to transfer the data. SAP . It will be in the Understandable format of both sending and receiving systems. To delete : Execute report : RSDELCUA or SCUA select the client and delete. ALE .

Instance is down) But on SAP front we need to monitor the process utilization. It is used to monitor the health of systems in terms of storage. system dumps. work load on the system (Users. Transactions. RFC failures.states that there is error in the port . Reports. pending updates. btc failures.States that the application document not posted fully. dead locks. SYSTEM MONITORING Gateway is a port that listens on 3300.93 0 to 49 50 52 53 02 07 . Tcode IDOC to check the consistency WE21 to identify the ports for IDOC processing.are the outbound IDOCS and above are the inbound IDOCS . Programs) PROCESS MONITORING SM50 (INSTANCE)/ SM66 (GLOBAL) . Failed spool requests. system logs. database logs. ..states there is a syntax error.states that the document is posted . memory and CPU technically. 06-Aug-09 Status (Killed. Ended. Free..

Display/ Maintain Operation Mode Set . PRIV.Deletes the batch job logs . Action. sleep.ABAP Dumps/ Runtime Error . We may need to kill the processes with status PRIV using DPMON. RFC/ CPIC. hold.Maintain Operation Modes .USR02 group by MANDT. Do not change the status of users in the USR02 Table. The process has to complete the job or Heap Memory should exhaust.Update program Administration (Deactivate) . If BTC is running for longer times check whether it is permissible as per the process document. Select MANDT. Task Manager or Kill -9 Command on UNIX. Monitor the processes with status(reasons) running.Spool Standard Jobs .Output controller .94 Monitor the instance specific processes in SM50 and Global Specific Process overview based on status in SM66. It will be created with Password pass. Dialogue process should not consume more than 1-2 seconds for normal tasks.To define the Back ground Job .Select Lock Entries . If more number goes into PRIV we may need to restart the instance. client. BNAME. Identify the user.Example --User pwd forgotten and all the users are locked if SAP* is deleted.JOB monitor .Update requests . so that process comes out. UGLAG from USR02 128 .System Log . Count(*) as Total from DEV. Refer : select MANDT. It will be automatically down (Killed) by system in 600 Seconds. stopped. time.RSBTCDEL . Note : Rdisp/gui_auto_logout = 900 sec ---.Self Locked 64 Administrator Lock never becomes 0 ------------------Refer SM12 SM13 SM14 SM36 SM37 SM21 ST22 RZ04 SM63 SP01 . If it is not killed the process might be occupied by dedicated resource and uses heap memory with status PRIV.

RSPO1043 .Delete Old ABAP Dumps .RSSNAPDL . Number Provide PID. DPMON .User List.Active SAP Servers SM66 .IDOC List SMQ1 .Delete Old spool logs and files .RSCOLL00 .Collects performance info in Transaction ST03 . Java Components > Add to download Basket Paste in <SID>\sys\exe\UC | Install the download manager SYSTEM MONITORING Each customer provides a standard check list to monitor their systems from time to time. SM59 .Delete old update request logs . .QRFC (outbound) queue SMQ2 .0 Installation Exports [1 of 4 ] Kernel.RFC Destination SM50 . Eg: BSI (British Standard Institute) requests the consultants to monitor the system on hourly basis.RSPO1041 .95 .Global Work Process overview WE05 . 07-Aug-09 Market Place > SAP Support Portal > Suserid> >Downloads > Installation Upgrades > My Company Components SAP Solution Manager 7.Process Overview SM51 .RSMO13002.QRFC (Inbound) queue SM04 .Spool Reorganization.When the user could not login to the system (Experience Hour glass) Process the list @ OS Level DPMON K Provide SR.

JOQ. we need to report with high priority.96 P&G requests their production systems to be monitored periodically for every 8 Hrs. SM50 identifies the process which are long running. ---08-Aug-09 TRANSPORT GROUPS Note: usr\sap\trans can be on JOD. exe. ---IMPORT ABAP : c:\prog files\sapinst_instdir\erp\system\ora\central\as Err. Transport Groups with individual transport directories. Security On JOD > . Ok. If any instance is down. Analyse the reason for failure (Check if the system is scheduled for downtime) If we are authorized start the instance and if it could not be started then look into work directory for logs. SM51 to list the servers and monitor the instances which are up and running.e. JOP or on separate disk. 2. Check lists contains the following 1. Identify the instances which are down i.

Select Icon > Other Configuration [][] Include System in Domain Pops up DC Host/ Target Host : JOMLERTDEV DC Sys No/ System No: 00 SAVE Upon saving the request from quality system is sent to DC to include in the domain. 4. Execute STMS > Will prompt to create a transport Domain. We need to include systems in the DC. From DC From Menu Overview > Systems JOD JOQ JOP Select the system JOP from SAP System Menu > Click on approve. Login to DC (Domain Controller) Development System/ 000 client with user like DDIC 2. Domain name will be Domain<SID> Save the Domain. Select the system JOQ and click on Approve from Menu SAP System > Approve . Similarly perform the to include production into DC 5. Login to Quality system Execute STMS > As DC is already created from the above step. 3. Login to the DC 6.Perform Post Installation DICO STMS From Menu Overview > Systems Extras > Delete TMS configuration or execute DICO 1.97 Perform SICK SE06 > Standard Installation .

Say YES Note: In principle there will be only one client in the production system.2 Clients [Test.UNIT TEST JOP ---. Double Click on the system JOD from Communication Tab From Transport Group Tab change mode Provide Name : Group_JOD Perform the same for JOQ.98 TRANSPORT GROUP If each system has their own transport group i. SAVE.2 Clients [DEV and Customizing. 3 .e. UNIT Testing] SYSTEM MONITORING SM51 SM50/ SM66 SM13 SM14 SM37 SP01 .e. they maintain transport groups themselves i. Training] .Transport directories are configured.Configuration > Standard configuration > Three systems in group.1 Client JOD---. JOQ --. > Continue > SAVE Three system configuration . Defining the Landscape From the DC/ 000/ DDIC > Goto STMS Click on the icon transport routes Click on change Menu . 7.

Identify the users who are consuming more memory and also identify the transactions and identify why it is consuming more time. . System log > Remote system It is used to display the logs for the following activities.99 SM04/ AL08 : Used to identify the number of users logged on to the instance. AL08 SM04 SM21: System logs specific to the instance. This TCODE is also used to logoff the user session if required. We can also identify the logs of other instances.

Update (Lags in Memory) 3. Infinite Loops. As a part of monitoring we need to identify the messages with color red. Session Termination due to network failures. . ST22 ABAP DUMPS When ever a SAP Program (ABAP program) could not be executed due to an error it will be thrown out from the GUI. 5. 8. It displays the logs based on date/time. ST22 recovers the following 1. Divide Error 1/0 2. t-code & problem class.100 1. Archive Stuck. 7. Time out errors Identify the error message from the log and search in the market place.Screen and a dump is recorded in ST22. 4. All the database related errors like Space issues. All ABAP dumps are documented 3. Segment Management. Illegal attempts and user locks 6. When we delete SM12 the locks are logged. user. System Startup/ Work process log 2.

Note TSTC . 09-Aug-09 PERFORMANCE TUNING ST02 . 8. Illegal time: (Day light savings) . Update Deactivation : SM14 7. max-extents reached. endless loops. SWAP. the above error occurs. 'Z') consumes more memory. TIME_OUT error: The rdisp/max_wprun_time program requires more time than the time defined in 2. OUT OF MEMORY. 5. Program Corrections: The problem is with SAP standard program for which SAP provides a correction through notes (The correction can be applied through SNOTE) 4.Holds the transaction and the Program name TSTCT . PAGE. Memory related issues with error message PXA. Stop the AS and change the date if not. improper select statements etc. Enqueue Table Overflow: SM12 6. Database issues like table space over flow.During day light savings the system date and time has to be changed.Holds the description/ text of a T-Code. This error requires memory corrections to the parameters. 3. The program need to be corrected by the developer. archive stuck.101 1. Customer defined programs ('Y'.

If it exceeds this consider the following. Login/disable_multi_gui_login. Rest of all the users are allowed to login to Dialogue instance) Note: GUI response time is not considered as a part of the Dialogue response time because the request is not received by the dispatcher. parameters) . If it is more than this consider the following. 2.102 This complete journey should be completed within 600 Milli seconds on an average or goes up to 600 Seconds Max. The time taken by the work process to copy the context (Roll In) is referred as Roll in time. (1:5) 2. Generally it should not be more than 50 M. The work process are not sufficient to handle the user requests. consider the following. network might be congested. 1. The user context is heavy to Roll in (User might having more authorizations.Sec or 10% of the response time. 3. Roll in Time: The work process copies the Roll in User context into WP task handler.Sec. 1. If this is same with all the users.Sec. The GUI time should not exceed more than 200 M. Wait Time: The amount of time the user request sits in the queue. User desktop is slow 2. 1. 3. If the time exceeds. Generally it should not be more than 50 M. 1. Front End Time/ GUI Time : Time taken by the user to reach the dispatcher is called as Front end time. There are sufficient processes but the existing process are held with expensive request. The user request is expensive (FI and basis will logon to the central instance.

(Refer LC10 : Live Cache). The processing time should not be more than 200 M. Minimize the authorizations. If CPU time is more consider tuning ABAP Programs Refer to ABAP development team (Also Refer SE30 ABAP Run time Analysis. upgrade. LG Time: Load and Generation Time: Time required to load the objects such as source code. 6.Target system. Roll wait time Sleep Note: Roll wait time is not considered as a part of response time. 7. Sec.Sec. 5. screen is expensive or SQL statements are expensive. GUI info.Sec. Enqueue Time: The time taken by the process to communicate with enqueue for obtaining the lock while updating a record is referred as Enqueue time. . As CPU time is included in processing time it is not calculated in the response time. If the processing time is more we can consider either ABAP program is expensive.Sec on a Dialogue instance. Roll Out Time: The time taken by the work process to copy the information from its local memory to Roll Area/ Roll File/ User context/ Roll buffer and it should not be more than 50 M. or WP waiting for a lock.103 2.Wait time). Enqueue time should be 5 M.RFC --. Processing Time: The time taken by the work process to process the user request using interpreters. If the roll wait time increases consider there is a bottle next on the RFC communication. There wont be any threshold value as it depends on External system. It should be as minimal as possible. new installation or when there is a mass change in the programs. RFC or CPIC Time: The time taken by the process to communicate with external interfaces is referred as RFC time. 4.Sec. ST05 Performance Analysis) 8. It should not be more than 200 M. 9. 10. Run SGEN tcode after patch application. CPU Time: When the request are processed using interpreters an amount of CPU is utilized to process the request using CPU resources is referred as CPU time. on a Central instance and 100 M. (Communication between any BW/ CRM/ SCM system). screen info from the database and generate these objects. If it exceeds more than this time we can consider that the enqueues are not sufficient or Enqueue table overflow. Roll Wait Time: During the processing when a dialogue process communicates with RFC's and waiting for the response at this time the user context is copied/ rolled back to BTC ---. CPU time should not be more than (40% of the Dialogue response time .

Total Time 10-Aug-09 WORK LOAD ANALYSIS ST03 ST03 It is used to calculate the work load analysis. MEMORY Physical Memory: The memory that is available or the memory that is configured on the instance using the parameter PHYS_MEMSIZE.. Virtual Memory: The physical memory and SWAP memory/ Pagging Memory on the disk The physical memory will not be sufficient to provide the users for temporary work area/ Calculations/ so a part of the disk which is configured for SWAP is used... Select Expert Mode to identify the expensive programs. Generally it should not be more than 40% of (Response time . If the response time is more and dialogue steps of fewer 1 or 2 then the average response time could not be worked out. transactions. 3.... The DB Buffers are not sufficient.104 11. While calculating the average consider the number of dialogue steps of the transaction user. 1. Missing indexes in DB02.. 12. The DB statistics job is not scheduled in DB13. Roll Out Time] [Wait time + RI + RO + PI +LG + RFC + DB +ENT] Note: Team Viewer is the Remote Desktop support Software BOMGAR.000 dialogue steps.. Resource bottle neck on DB. IF DB Time is more consider the following. 4.Average Time # Indicates .. It is similar to the CPU time...Wait time). reports and users. To . The DB resources are stake(CPU and Memory Utilization) i. * PHYS_MEMSIZE: This parameter restricts the usage of memory by that instance. Database Time: The time taken by the process to reach the database and process the request.. . Dialogue Response time: The time taken by the Dialogue process to process the request which includes [Wait time . Ф Indicates . 2.. The response time should be worked out only when there are atleast 10...e.

105 On UNIX during installation assign atleast 20GB of SWAP. On windows assign atleast 3*RAM size/ 20 GB which ever is higher. Shared Memory: The memory that is used by all the applications (OS, DB, R/3) Extended Memory: The memory that is used by SAP work processes is referred as Extended Memory. Local Memory: The memory that is assigned to work process is referred as Local Memory Roll Memory/ Roll Buffer: The memory that is used by work process to store the user context information is referred as Roll memory. Private/ Heap Memory: The memory that is used by work process exclusively by restricting itself. MEMORY ALLOCATION 1. User submits the request. 2. Dispatcher assigns the WP 3. WP requires memory to Roll -In the user context. 4. WP gets memory from local memory which is defined in the parameter ztta/roll_area. It gets only a part of it which is defined by parameter ztta/roll_first (20KB) 5. If the allocated memory is not sufficient then it gets allocated from Extended memory ztta/roll_extension. 6. If that is also not sufficient then it uses the remaining ROLL Area. 7. If that is also not sufficient then it uses HEAP/ PRIVATE Memory and the WP goes into PRIVATE Mode. 8. Heap memory is defined by the parameter Abap/heaplimit=4GB Abap/heap_area_dia Transaction ST02 provides the memory utilization 9. Each dialogue uses abap/heap_area_dia and non dia uses abap/heap_area_nondia both process should not exceed abap/heap_area_total. Memory : RAM is the first Memory. Out of this we don't want to allow SAP to utilize the whole memory. Virtual Memory: Pagefile.sys 11-Aug-09


User ---> Dispatcher ---> WP ---> Rolls Its Memory Requires Memory to Roll In to the Task Handler Ztta/roll_first - 20KB Extended Memory is used by all the Work Processes. 20 KB ztta/roll_first through ztta/roll_area Extended Memory ztta/roll_extension : 512 MB Come back to local Memory If all the memory is consumed it cant come back so goes to the Heap/ Private Memory. CASE STUDY We have configured 20 WP in the Instance and we know pretty well that each user request consumes a minimum of 25MB of Memory WP 1 2 . . 8 9 MEMORY Roll_first 20KB 20KB 4GB Roll_extn 512MB 512MB 8GB Heap 2GB 2GB STATUS PRIV PRIV

Roll_Area 19.980MB 19.980MB






107 Rdisp/max_priv_time When the process uses Heap Memory it is used in Heap/ Private mode. The processes which are in PRIV Mode cannot be timed out by Rdisp/max_wprun_time Rdisp/max_priv_time So configure so that the process is timed out after this time (600 Seconds/ 10 Minutes) when the work process goes into PRIV mode it will not listen to rdisp/max_wprun_time=600sec. It will be released only after the task completion or Memory is exhausted(Abap/heap_area_dia)/ timed out by rdisp/max_priv_time. This situation is referred as Hour Glass Mode or WP Congestion. At this situation we can use DPMON or SM04 to terminate the user session. If not kill the process at OS level based on PID.

Q. The user complains that he could not login to the system - Hour Glass Mode? A. 1. WP into PRIV Mode 2. ARCHIVE STUCK (The user could not update any record and results in hour glass mode) BUFFERS ST02

The frequently used content and less frequently modified is eligible for buffering. Company Name, GUI, screens, calendars, table definitions, programs etc are eligible for buffering. Data such as Exchange Rates, Transactional Data(PO, Sales Order, Invoice, Billing) are not eligible for buffering. Buffering is specific to instance. Each buffered element is stored in the memory of the instance in terms of Directories and Space. Eg. Programs can be stored up to 150000 KB, 150 MB in 37,500 directories. If the directories/ size is full then Buffer Swaps occurs in ST02. When SWAP occurs the content needs to be fetched again from Database which increases the response time.


108 RAISING A REQUEST TO SAP FOR A SAP ROUTER From the Market Place www.service.sap.com > click on SAP Support Portal. > From Help and Support Tab > click on Report a Product Error From Here Provide Customer : Installation : System ID :

Company Name JOD

Next > Search Term : SAP Router Or Go with Message Select the system & select the component Raise a request as follows: Dear SAP, We have installed solution manager and 3 ERP systems in the landscape. Before we start implementation we would like to establish connecting with SAP using SAP Router. Name of the Server : JOMLSOLMAN IP Address : (This is where our SAPRouter is going to be configured) We are using dedicated public IP Address SID INSTANCE NO : JOS : 00

Please send us certificate details. { Open the connectivity, How many hours it needs to be opened; Provide Userid and password/ Client } Provide your name Hit SEND Note: from Market Place > My Profile > Maintain Single Sign on Certificate > Specify Password. R. Shunmugam Phone No:

109 From Market place > Check the email. SAP : JOLSOLMAN ---------------Earlier from the Back End system say for eg: SOLMAN system 001/ DDIC > Login to the SOLMAN system Discontinued from 2006 TCODE > OSS1 (Online SAP Service) From Menu Parameter > Technical Settings Hit Change SAPRouter at SAP

Note: Instance 98 ( Is for SOLMAN Diagnostic Tool), 99(SAP Router) All kind of services can be acquired from OSS1

Over the web using DIAG protocol. (It is discontinued) ---------------4 systems in the landscape SAP Router is a software program which is used to restrict to access the customer systems using the table SAPROUTTAB. SAPROUTTAB is a text file with out any extension in the router directory with prefix P, D and S (Permit, Deny and Secure sometimes)

STEPS TO CONFIGURE SAP ROUTER 1. Create a directory with name saprouter in usr\ sap\directory. usr\sap\saprouter Ensure that the folder has full (Read + Write permissions)


Note SAPRouter is an executable in the kernel directory (usr\sap\SID\sys\exe\uc\NTi386). Nipping is an executable to ping to the router. This two executables needs to be copied to the router directory. However we can also download from market place. On Windows> Check whether the SAPRouter service is running or not to make sure whether the SAPRouter is already configured or not. 2. From Market Place > My Company App Components Look for SAPROUTER700 Windows server X64 Click on Add to download basket. 3. Login as <SID>ADM 4. Create a sub directory E:\usr\sap\saprouter 5. From Command Prompt Change directory to trans as it is holding the downloaded files E:\usr\sap\trans> sapcar -xvf saprouter_12_100004305.sar 6. copy the two uncared files in to the saprouter directory. 7. From market place click on Download Area > SAP Cryptographic Software .sar file.

It depends on OS We can download either CAR or SAR file


Paste the file in usr\sap\saprouter sapcar -xvf 90000114.car ----------Note: Download Manager > Configuration > SUSERID and PWD -----------

8. Create a service called SAPRouter service. From Command Prompt > Saprouter> ntscmgr install SAPRouter -b E:\usr\sap\saprouter\saprouter.exe - p "JOSADM" It will create a service. JOS is the SID 9. Define a file SAPROUTTAB Create a file SAPROUTTAB in the saprouter dir with out any extension

10. SNC (Secured Network Connection Needs to be added) For this Goto > www.service.sap.com/SAPROUTER-SNCADD Apply Copy [ Shows the Distinguished Name] > Hit Continue 11. Define the Environment Variable. My Comp > Properties > Advanced> Variable : SECUDIR Path: E:\usr\sap\saprouter Variable :SNC_LIB Path: E:\sur\sap\saprouter\nt-X86_64\sapcrypto.dll Sapcrypt.dll to encrypt and decrypt the messages. 12. Generating certificate from Customers End (SOLMAN System) Use the command Sapgenpse.exe will be in nt-X86_64 so goto

pse -o JOSADM Will create a file cred_v2 16.. TO check the Distinguished name Sapgenpse get_my_name -v -n issuer 18. Work file certreq in \nt-X86_64 Open with notepad And copy from BEGIN to END Paste in the STEP 10 in the text box and hit Continue Click on request certificate It generates a text with BEGIN to END...14 SAPSR2 .pse 15. 17..pse "Paste the distinguished name" Prompts for PIN : any password Twice Sapgenpse .112 Saprouter> CD nt-X86_64 Saprouter\nt-X86_64> sapgenpse get_pse -v -r certreq -p local. Now copy from BEGIN to END from SAP that site/ Screen Paste it in a notepad file(without extension) with file name srcert in the folder nt-X86_64 14.. SAPROUTTAB > open with notepad > copy the whole content (from already configured system) > provide> SAP IP > Our IP.SAP Generic Personal Security Encryption 13.9 .. being in nt-X86_64 > sapgenpse seclogin -p local. Router as Service Services. SAPSR3 .msc > saprouter From Logon Tab Select This Account : JOSADM Apply -------------------------------------------To Uninstall Ntscmgr install saprouter -b E:\. Importing the Certificate Nt-X86_64> sapgenpse import_own_cert -c srcert -p local...

194. SAP able to connect and we need to provide authentication 3.6 -----------------------------------------19.227.19 OS : NT/ INtel Version : Win2003 DB Release : Maintain our systems in the Market Place 2.0 Router String:> H/220.113 SAPSR1 . SAP Router provides the authorization and we need to provide the authentication. Execute SM59 SAPOSS > Change IP Address of SAPRouter at Customer Side And also change at SAP Side Router String --------------------------------------Goto Market Place Download service connection Maintain Data > System Data SOLMAN Production System Goto DB Server Hostname > SOLMAN IP Address : 124.0.202/s/3299 Create New Connection RFC Connection Logon Security E1 001 SCO4013677 AISUSER tcode ------------------------------------- 13-Aug-09 SAP ROUTER Theory 1. SAP router side will restrict the user. The password will be visible [ ].2. Market place > connect to SAP > R/3 Support > Open connection .

.Compressed Archive Kernel comes with . Cust Number : When we buy SAP we will be provided with the customer number.Deny. Copy and Paste certificate from Begin to End the market place url /Saprouter-SNCADD . SAP responds with Distinguished name.SAP Archive . but it is advised to install on SOLMAN system to ensure that it is monitored periodically. SE38.DB .exe 4.114 Take out the access from SCC4. It works like a firewall/ proxy to permit and deny the access to the SAP systems.CAR . Generate the certificate using distinguished "DN" name with executable SAPGENPSE. P Permit. SAP Router is an executable which is used to restrict the access to the customer systems over the network. SAPROUTETAB is a file (without any extension) used to have ACL (Access Control List) S .. D ..SAR only [Global Host] .Dialogue Instance Usr\sap 2. SAPROUTER. (www. Download the Cryptography files from Market place related to OS and bit version (Download *. executable used to generate the personal security environment.exe. -------------RMMAIN tcode only in SOLMAN Implementation Road Map > Technical Infrastructure Planning > Order for Remote Connection to SAP Project Preparation Phase. Create SAP Router directory and copy the executables from exe\uc\NTi386 or download from the market place.. K -SNC (Secure network connection) 7..SAR . IP Address and Customer Number (SAP Router need not to be installed on Solution Manager /DEV/ QAS/ PRD. .com/swdc) copy only SAPCAR.service. 3. It needs to be configure before implementation Part of SAP..sap.exe and NIPPING. Uncar the files into SAPRouter directory 6..Central Instance . Create message to SAP along with your SAP Router [Hostname]..SAR files) 5.. sapgenpse.Secure. SA38. 8. ------------SAP Router 1.. It can be installed on any desktop.

SAPSNOTE are created on communicating with the Market Place. No Sufficient space or directories 2. The configured buffers are small 5.Specify no of days and hours. It will update SAPOSS RFC Connection. 10. --------------------------------------------ST02 continuation. Goto SMP ---.Report Error --. Start the router using command saprouter -r -k "DN" 12. Inform SAP to connect to our systems.Maintain System Data -. . Import the certificate into router system using SAPGENPSE 11. Similarly maintain all the other systems in the landscape. During the restart and when support packages are applied and when upgrade is performed. 13. Analysis has to be carried out if there are atleast 10. Do no take any decisions based on the readings on a specific day. When more swaps occur they are displayed on ST02 in swaps column.Least Recently used.000 requests. Used to monitor the buffer swaps on the Application Server/ Instance LRU . SAPOSS. SAP-OSS. Buffer swaps occurs when there are no sufficient directories or space.Download service connector -.Open connection by selecting the service---. BUFFER HIT RATIO. BUFFER SWAPS indicate the following 1.115 9. On each backend system we need to maintain the RFC details in OSS1 Transaction. Request a certificate from the market place copy into srcert. The content is frequently modified 3.Maintain Router details ------. Analysis: Identify the buffer areas whose swaps/ Database access are more.Start service connector -. Mass transportation of objects 4.Connect to SAP Select the system .

Remaining parameters based on SAP recommendation from RZ11. In order to synchronize buffers set the parameter . 4. frequently used. TABLE Buffering SAP stores the content in tables (Every data except start and stop logs is stored in DATABASE. Generic Buffering: Tables which are relatively large.. 1. T001 Company info 3. Single Record Buffering: The tables which are large in size. VBAK (SALES). frequently used and rarely modified are buffered using a primary key. Single Record Buffering 4. Generic Buffering 3. EKKO (PURCHASE) BUFFER SYNCHRONIZATION When more than one application server is configured then buffers between different instances may not be synchronized. (Also which are small in size) Eg: T000 have all the clients and required to create a client copy. rarely modified using a set of keys (Fields) Eg: USR02. No Buffering This is maintained for each table SE13 refer USR02 Table. Full Buffering: The tables which are frequently used and rarely modified are eligible for buffering. Change the program buffer using ABAP/ buffer_size to a maximum of 600 MB on 32 bit Machines. no prog/ no data is available in the file system) There are four types of Buffering 1.116 SAP recommends this value to be around 98% {For every 100 request '2' request goes to database and the remaining should be from the buffers} Key areas that effect the performance are program buffers. (This is fully buffered) 2. and frequently modified are not eligible for buffering. No Buffering: The tables which are large frequently used. FULL Buffering 2. table buffers and Table and Field definitions.

117 Rdisp/ buffermode = Send on. User3 request APP1 for display @ 10:00:40 WP will ask DDLOG table to check for recent update within 60 Sec.550 @ 10:00:20 3.Database hit ratio comes down below 94% then consider the following.SQL server performance analysis. User2 request to APP2 for update the same sales order to Rs. 500 @ 10:00:01 2. IF there are no updates fetches the same from APP1 Buffer. It is used to display the database buffer hit ratio. for every hundred reads only 6 should goes to the database. . It is recommended that it should not be less than 94% i.Compiles the programs 14-Aug-09 ST04 DB PERFORMANCE MONITOR .e. If the content is requested after 60 Seconds. Rdisp/ buffertime = 60 Sec. Mechanism 1. SE01 All the programs is in Uncompiled mode in TADIR table. T001. DDLOG is a synchronization between instances and maintain TIMESTAMP Note: DB13. EO70. DB02. exec auto. SGEN . Refer . by that time it will be synchronized between APP1 and APP2. User1 request to APP1 for update Sales order to Rs. If there is any change then it will fetch from DB and swap out the buffer. DB buffer. TSTC.All the programs are stored in TADIR. (DDLOG is a buffer synchronization table). .

If the buffer hit ratio comes down it effects on the DB response time. 1.Physical Reads]/ Logical Reads * 100 Logical Reads is the sum of [Physical reads and Buffer Reads] (Buffer Gets/ Reads) FROM ST04 Physical Reads: The reads from the database. . Ensure that DB Buffers are configured as per the available memory. Probably the hardware is procured as per sizing but the number of users grown dynamically (300600). ST06 OSMONITOR It Fetches the data using service SAPOSCOL and it displays CPU Utilization. Memory available(Free) along with the SWAP space. It is calculated by using formulae [ Logical reads . DB Buffer size is not sufficient to hold the content fetched from the database.118 1. In this scenario we advice to deploy additional instances. 3. Frequent updates on the database 2. Ensure that physical memory free is available to handle the user requests. The CPU idle time should not be less than 30% [For Portal up to 80% to 85%] If it is below 30% we can consider the following. It is also used to start and stop SAPOSCOL (during Upgrades) Note: OSCOL brings the operating system information into ST06. It also displays the memory installed on the machine. Memory Utilization and disk response time. 2. If the programs are expensive then refer to development team. The CPU is not sufficient to handle the load because the hardware is not procured as per sizing. The ABAP programs are expensive with multiple conditions and endless loops. Some times complete memory will be dedicated to DB Buffers. If not memory bottleneck. If OSCOL is not started ST06 will be blank.

LAN CHECK BY PING is used to ping to all the systems in the Network/ Landscape.119 We can check TOP CPU utilization for the current in the last 24 Hrs. If a user complaints that he could not connect to the server (Ping to the desktop) .

120 Click on Presentation Server ST07 Used to identify whether the system is optimally designed or not. . Users are 9944 and the WP are 27 so each WP serves 5-10 Users so 27*10 = 270 Here users are including Active and Inactive Users. Say for Eg: from the below screen.

Buffer Trace 3.121 Ask the customer to provide the list of Active users. This is also used to identify Response time and Buffers Utilization. When the RFC/ CPIC time are going beyond threshold value then switch on RFC Trace. It displays the log files related to work process. Authorization Trace 6. It is also used to identify the memory utilized. SQL Trace 5. . 2. ST11: It is used to display the work directory. Enqueue Trace 4. RFC Trace 2. Switch on Buffer Trace. AL11 : List the SAP Directories on Application Server. Based on the number of servers we can also define logon load balancing. Each work process serves around 5-10 Users. When more buffer swaps occurs in the table buffering ST02. Kernel Trace Available in ST01 and ST05 Only in ST01 1. Calculate the number of Process Vs Users to determine no of Users/ Process. ST01 and ST05 Used to trace the following 1.

Select * from can be fine tuned by using select single * from with appropriate where conditions. 10. 8. As a practice switch on the trace and inform the user to run the transaction. (Identify those statements in ST04) Eg. 3. Authorization Check: Whenever user encounters missing authorizations and could not be traced in SU53 can be traced out by switching the trace on User. 5. Motivation of SAP for an ERP Software Landscape Deployment Plan Hardware Sizing Hardware and Software Order Installation of the Software Post Installation Steps User management Router -----. Enqueue Trace: When the enque or enque wait time is increasing by 5 M. Kernel Trace: Used to identify the consistency of Kernel. Switch Off the trace. 17-Aug-09 IMPLEMENTATION OF SAP Pre-Requisites 1. 7. 9. It records all the calls that are made to kernel when the trace is ON. 2. 4.122 3. 5. When there are too many expensive SQL Statements which are increasing the database response time in ST04 then switch on SQL Trace. ST04 > Detailed > Oracle Session > SQL Statements. 6.Sec on Dialogue instance (Consider switching enqueue trace) 4. 6.Sec on CI(Central Instance) 100 M. It will populate enormous log files and occupies the complete disk place and system stands still.Remote connection to SAP Landscape Configuration Transport Management Testing Strategy . 11. RC=0 (Return Code) Note: Tuning is not testing we need enormous analysis and data to justify the conclusion. Note: Do not switch on the traces when they are not required.

The software should be unicoded language to support all the languages. Issue --. partial. BASIS. Too many legacy systems.The software should support (Online. languages. Delloite. 1.Phase 1. Pager. They define the pain points of every business user owner and document them. sms. colors. Go Live Strategy Parallel Run Go-Live Support .C++ No ABAP. fax. password change. The software is out of maintenance with no updates.Description ---. KPBG. table level backup) . The existing software is not capable to communicate with other systems 5. . 7. Bearing Point. 2.The GUI should be compatible. 13. manual inputs. . Restore etc. ergonomically designed. 15.The software/ Hardware should support mirroring. It cannot communicate with print. PWC (Price Water Coupons) are the auditors to identify the requirements in the company.The software should be installed on all the operating systems and databases. clustering.123 12. The existing Hardware is old and the response times are high. or with no company (Company Bankrupt/ Merger etc. . Disaster Recovery. . Note: ATP Server . Offline.The software should support Mobile devices. too little integration. paging devices. 6. fonts. RAID. Fax. SMS. Customer wanted to deploy an application that suites to his requirements by replacing the existing software due to the following reasons. .Available to Promise -----> Ware House. monitoring are the various issues with the current software. The software is not user friendly to take the user inputs. hardware and the Implementer.1. Customer enquires in the market and calls for the Auditors to identify the software. incremental. Email.Possible/ Not Possible/ Customizable/ If customizable Amount of effort. PDA etc. MOTIVATION OF SAP FOR AN ERP 1. user friendly. NW 4. Example: . The customer could not be competitive in the market due to the legacy methods deployed B1 . 14.) 3.

Hyperion.124 These requirements list will be floated as RFQ feasibility of software. Weak in Retail } Tcode-SFW5(Switch Framework) SA38 . Seibel (CRM) implementing partners. .com Auditor gather info from .bck files while reinstalling the SAP Refer: sapfans.Support partners like IBM. WIPRO.Customer decides software with the help of feasibility reports and assistance from auditors. Note: Toughly Coupled/ Hardly .Customer calls for quotation to implement SAP This is the first official document released to implement SAP.com. .Preparatory costs has to be borne by vendors TDMS .These list will be submitted to Oracle Apps. sapconsultant. sapbasis.Test Data Migration Server QAS PRE PROD SAND DEV/ CUST/ GOLDEN UNIT TESTING INTEGRATION PAYROLL/ TDMS TRAINING PRE PROD PROD 8 .com. SAP is Strong in Manufacturing. Peoplesoft. They can also raise questions in the form of RFI (Request for Information) 18-Aug-09 -----------------C:\pf\sapinst_instdir\ERP\system\ORA\central\AS Ensure that there should not be any . NAVISION. MAHINDRA submits the proposal. .Business partner owners . TCS.GETSYSDEF .Software Vendors.

Process 3. Disaster. Business Scenarios. Implementation of solution manager (Provides Roadmap.Request for Quotation (Released by customers) RFI . Documentation (Upload. 3. Average man power experience going to be deployed 7. Company Strengths 4. Download) etc. Routing. risks and mitigations 11. Desktops.Request for information -----------------It can contain as follows 1.Capability Maturity Model. Based on 4th and 7th vendor will be finalized to implement SAP Note: External Security Routing Switching Proxy Firewall Internal Security . Certifications (CMMI . Past Projects and experience in that area 6. Access. Technical questions related to Hardware. WIPRO etc) . Assumptions Based on the above proposal customer and audit team shortlist the two or three software vendors (IBM. Sap Partnership) 10.125 RFQ .Implementation Partners and call them for Interview (technical discussions) to exhibit their capabilities. SIX SIGMA. Project Implementation Methodology 2. Case studies and customer references 8. Backup. Financial Background and Share Value 5. VPN. TCS. Module specific questions 2. Risk and mitigation --------------- 1. Recovery etc. Challenges in the project. 9.

. RFP (Customer and Vendor) 3. Payment will be released in Parts ---. 5. Fixed Bid 2.. accommodation. If SOW is not defined properly. (Basis Consultant) Landscape Deployment Plan: . Replacement. vacations..20% Realization .. Risks and mitigations has to be clearly stated in the SOW. LANDSCAPE DEPLOYMENT PLAN 1. SOW and Project Award (Customer and Vendor) 4.00.000 (i. Eg. Final Preparation . Blue print . Resource Based 4..126 Authenticating Authorized users is Internal Security. Critical Tasks are based on Man days/ Man Hours Example : Disaster Recovery 1. @ Million Dollars for completion all inclusive (Fares.. Holidays. Number of hours required/ No of Man days/ No of Man Months 2.e.Project Start 10%.. Let us say the Project Manager is SAP. They out sourced to Seal Infotech for training and implementation. sick etc)..30%. We need to provide manpower to SAP to implement @ customer site. 19-Aug-09 II.20%. RFQ and RFI (Customer and Vendor) 2. Project Costing: 1. Hardware requirements from customers are to be documented. it is vendor responsibility. staff. Activity Based (Try to include Wait time) The scope of work needs to be defined properly before sign-on.. 4. Landscape Deployment.. Cost of the Offshore Onsite Man hours/ Man Days/ Man Months 20-30$ 160-240$ 60-100$ 1000$ 20000$ 3. Go-Live . SAP Project bidder is SAP for 28 Crores in Singareni Collories .20%. Time and Material (T&M) 3. Delay in Software. Project can be a fixed bid let us say 2.

RAID. DB. Material. III. But exact number of systems will be known only after the Hardware sizing 1 CPU / 2 Parallel Process By default 3 Parallel Process.sap. Provide Customer details to SAP (Name of the contact. CLUSTERING Standby server or do you need any suggestions.127 It consists of the number of systems that are going to be deployed in the customer data center. Provide Project name and create a Project for sizing. SUN. Load On the System: Users work on the system on various modules MM . Storage (Hard disks) and Memory.Sales . It is used to determine the CPU's. It may serve the customer as an overview of the SAP systems. Example Customer Database size is 400GB but they want to migrate 250GB into SAP (Customer. DELL). SAP Provides quick sizing toll (http://service. HP. Note: Legacy database size (get the details from customer what amount of data they are planning to migrate into SAP. Mirroring.Logistics SD . Platform and communications 3. Email Id. 1. OS. Address. FAX) 2. FI Transactions) High Availability options (Time of Availability) These are the general details that are required for sizing.com/sizing) Goto> Sizing tool > Click on Quick sizer It will be opened on new window Provide customer number. HARDWARE SIZING It is an exercise carried out by Basis consultant with the help of the customer business process owners. Supplier. Vendor. Project Manager and Hardware vendors (IBM.

1. RAID5 . X Series (I Series V5R4) is the O/s Clustering (Mechanism : PING PONG) DD02L .128 FI . 1 Spare/ Parity) .Mirroring (1:1) on disk goes down other should take over.SAP Application Benchmark for Performance Standards) It is calculated in terms of Hardware vendors provide CPU in terms of the CPU's Eg. High Availability 2.USR02.Util -4. SAP's .MAXDB Oracle SQL Server .DB2 Database]. I Series V5R4 .Microsoft P Series.DB2 [AIX O/s .Database schema owner SAPSR3DB .611 SQL>Select bname. 2.ALL Sap tables will be stored 65. Modules used 1. Type of Users 3. Sizing is based on the following. IBM P Series generates 800 SAP's/ CPU.DB2] SAP .Financial 40% More to the sizing result. mandt from SAPSR3.(5 Disks---. High Availability 1.JAVA -----------------------------21-Aug-09 Sizing is performed by quick sizer which is proprietary by quick sizer which is proprietary tool of SAP. RAID1 . SAPSR3 . Note: ---------------------------IBM .

Backup .Sizing Module Selection: Select the modules that are going to be implemented like Logistics.due to power cable --.More than one cable CPU's -. IBM P-Series Unless unlocked by IBM we cannot make use of the additional Hard Disks Note: For Upgrade . SAN . If the complete system collapses due to hardware failure use clustering -.UPS -. If the connectivity fails . If it before three years consider HR in sizing if not. If the existing server collapses -. there is a plan to implement in future..Hosted on Multiple slots DISK . Financials. Product life cycle Management (Currently HR is not going to be implemented but... If disaster occurs -----.Multiple CPUS Memory .RAID and SAN 8..129 3. .SAN 5.Sizing Capacity .Storage Area Network 4. buy more leased lines from different vendors 7.multicables -.Setup DR Server in a different geographical location 6.Two Parallel systems (Used for failover or Load balancing) Eg.etc -.Generator Network Cable --..

40*60/480 = 5 Min = 300 Sec 2. Default Host . Component BC-MID-RFC Test Low Test -.htmlb RT Click > Activate Service Note: This should be done as Post Installation Steps SPRO > SAP Solution Manager > General Configuration Activating BC Sets (BC.SAP . User . 480 .SAP .bsp .40 Hrs .480 Dialogue Steps with the system .200 * 10 Dialogue Steps = 2000. SICF 3.14400 .Business Configuration) Tcode: scpr20 > From End user system If any one stuck @ point executing a command SM59 > Help > Create Mssg.Public .Need to activate some services 2. Purchase Order / Week .40 Hrs .4800 Dialogue Steps . 480 .130 1.30 Sec 3. Execute 4. 22-Aug-09 Service Desk > 1. High Availability .10 Secs Eg.40 HRS * 60 Mins 1Dialogue Step . The sizing is based on 1.TKT No: 008000000001 The Strategy is to migrate/ upgrade the hardware for every three years.

.) 4. past experience. . IV. consistency. Third party communication (Batch processing etc) So we can consider adding 30-50% to the sizing results. Modules and 3. If the sizing output requires 3200 SAPS then we need 4 CPU's. Customer calls the RFQ from various vendors to supply hardware. (The hardware vendor determines the CPU Size based on SAPS example an ISeries machine single CPU generates 800 SAPS. XXL) Sizing output determines the memory. OS 2. XS. XL. price and support (warranty).Based on companies stability.131 2.. Interfaces (Like Fax. CPU cannot be arrived directly because the process speed depends upon the hardware vendor.. SAP assumes that a sales order/ Purchase order consumes around 8-12 Dialogue steps. For every 2000 sales documents that are generated per hour requires 100 SAPS. Philippines and Malaysia IBM ships from US V. HARDWARE ORDER 1. No of users Along with legacy database and future growth of users User FI CO Low 50 50 Medium 250 250 High 250 250 The sizing is also called as T-Shirt sizing which determines your servers as (S. Pager etc. ORDERING SAP SOFTWARE . storage and CPU in terms of Saps'.Hardware vendors take 3 weeks to 4 weeks to deliver based on the availability of the hardware. Database 3. Printers 5. L. The Hardware resources are required for the following which needs to be considered while sizing 1. M. SAPS is ( SAP APPLICATION BENCHMARK FOR PERFORMANCE STANDARDS) SAPS are calculated based on Sales module. SMS. Email. reliability. HP ships from Singapore. case studies.

000 to 1.000 Users. Any Kernel upgrade has been done (DEV_DISP.132 ISUSER (INDIAN SAP USER FORUM) ASUSER(AMERICAN SAP USER FORUM) Communicate with SAP vendor (Channel Partners) and purchase the license.Sieble Each license cost 2000 USD Each Developer Cost 4000 USD After negotiation in Indian Market the Single user cost comes to 40. EP. * Every year we need to run USMM and send the report to SAP. PI. Etc Entry.log) --------------------------27-Aug-09 .000 we should have atleast 150-200 Users for 10+1 cost 18 Lakhs.Part of the Physical Memory (RAM Memory) .RAM . SRM.Points to the target system BIN contains default.e. License is a single user based.Peoplesoft MySAPCRM . i. If we buy MYSAP business suite then all comes under one license.) SCM.pfl SAP_BC_ADMIn S_Transports CTS_Admin Disp+exe ( PING. --------------------------Note: Heap Memory Physical Memory Virtual Memory . We can buy 100 Users and used for 10.Part of the Memory from the Hard disk Buffer Bin .Oracle Apps MySAPSCM . SRM CRM are charged Separately. Solution Manager. BI.00. * There is no lock for licensed users in the system. If we buy one license we can access . MI etc.000 depending upon number of users. For 40.. License Cost varies based on Geographical Location MySAPFI . ERP..

.0 EP .....It provides runtime environment for SAP Applications. Textile. Upto BASIS 4. .6C 4..0 2.. baking.710)....4. 3..5 SCM .2. APO are SCM Versions 2... C and D is kernel versions (Mining. 700..0..0.7E On 620 .... B.. .0 . .3...3... 3.4. Chemical.SAP<SID> . Insurance. 3.6.. Oil. ERP Version is 4...1I it is based on three tier and web services are provided by using ITS..0 BW ... 4.0.0 CRM .3.0..1C Owner of the Database ..SAPSR3 from WEBAS 700 It is a Netweaver (640...BW version is 3.6D is the Kernel Version.. ..0. 4. . from WEBAS 620 to 640 It provides built in ITS to make application server as WEB Application Server.. SRM are SRM Versions XI .. etc..) SAP determined to bring all the components on to a common platform and introduced SAP Web Application Server (WAS) The first version of WAS is 620 (A direct jump from 4.133 BASIS .ECC 5.5B ..4..6D) On 620 ..4.6 A.0. Real Estates. Next Level of WAS is 640 ERP .SAPSR3.0 is based on two tier which is built on Mainframes...0 onwards and upto 3. 3.5A. Utilities..0.1 are BW Versions 2.

Owner is SAPSR3 for ABAP engine and SAPSR3DB is for JAVA Engine.0 Install ABAP(CI. JAVA add on. OLD: The database table spaces are 27 which ends with D(Data) and I(Index).6C SAPINST introduced in WEB Application Server 620-640. IA64) with UC/ NUC is available in version 700. Run directory is used to host executables of kernel upto 640 where as OS version (NTI386. The database contains only 8 tablespaces in 700.0 .0 . AMD64.BI7.0 . SYSTEM .0 .5.EP7.134 Next level of WAS is 700 ERP BW EP XI SRM CRM . Install Central System Installation (Select Usage type during Installation) R/3 Setup is used to install SAP upto Versions Basis 4.For Roll Back SYSAUX .From Oracle Log for Administration . BASIS only Non-Unicode From SAPWEBAS 640 unicode is introduced.ECC6..5. Interactive SAPINST is to modify the inputs move front and back to review the inputs introduced in WAS700.Database Related PSAPUNDO .0 . DBI).PI7.[SAPR3] owner. From 620 The database contains only 6 tablespaces(Physical Location) in 640 owner is SAP<SID> PSAP<SID> PSAP<SID>USR PSAP<SID>REL SYSTEM PSAPROLL(PSAPUNDO) PSAPTEMP SQL> Select tablespace_name from dba_tablespaces.

The difference is because of -19. Eg.USER RELATED Info PSAPSR3DB . 65611 SQL> select count(*) . It is used to store the data in the hard disk.Version Specific PSAPSR3USR .JAVA Specific DB GUI Versions 46C 46D 620 640 700 710 Based on Windows and JAVA SQL> select username from DBA_USERS. [CDCLS] Cluster Table. owner from DBA_USERS group by owner. Database Users (DDIC and SAP* are SAP Users resides in USR02 Table) SQL> select count(*) from DBA_USERS where owner = 'SAPSR3'.xxx Components: BASIS 65xxx BASIS+ERP 31-Aug-09 DATABASE It is a storage.Temp Storage Memory PSAPSR3 .DD02L. 17476 SQL> select count(*) from SAPSR3.135 PSAPTEMP . .Component Specific PSAPSR3700 .

Columns are headers and rows are the data.rtf. The backup management and reorganization is not available.Database provides tools for backup management. C:\shawn\shawn\shawn. 3. test..Data search is faster by using indexes (based on Keys) Eg: As in windows we can create as many folders and subfolders with the same name and the search criteria depends on the search string. test..ppt.. . mssql/bin. The data does not follow the LUW concept and so it is not consistent and reliable.pps Disadvantage of the file system 1. Database: Used to store the data in the organized format and it has to follow RDBMS rules (Relational Database Management System) .doc. . 4. test. test. ... . 5. mssql/lib.LOGIC UNIT OF WORK. reliability and transaction LUW. test. test. . reorganization. The version management will be difficult and time consuming to get the required/ identify the file.xls.txt. The data is not in the organized format. It consists of one or more transactions that are bundled together which can be committed as a group or rollback without any data loss.Database has its own structure to manage the data using the database specific binaries and libraries. 2. LUW .. Oracle/bin. db2/lib. Oracle/lib.Databases follow RDBMS rules to achieve consistency.pdf. These are the reasons for the evolution of DB.Duplication of data is avoided and uniqueness is obtained by using primary and secondary keys. db2/bin. There are no indexes to search the data.136 We can also store the data in terms of file system like test.Data is stored in terms of tables (Tables contain rows and columns). restore and recovery .

. AR (Account Receivables) .Data is normalized and denormalised according to the requirements of the customer. Database work process checks whether the table exists. SRM.Purchase Order . 1. UPDATE. if the field and table exists. .Tenders (Contractors) (Eg: Purchase Order. the request is converted into Native SQL statements of the respective database. R/3 Work process keeps a copy in the R/3 Buffer and response is sent to user. 5. DELETE] Scenario User requests for weekly status report. Databases are normalized. DENORMALIZATION Process of grouping smaller tables into larger tables for having data comprehensively available for analysis and reporting BIW. GI (Goods Issued) AP (Account Payables).. 11. Keeps the request in Queue 4. If the request is not accessed earlier. R/3 Work process communicates with database process to get the response. 8. [SELECT. Sales Order. 2. then asks for the optimized path to go to the database table and identify the relevant rows based on keys/ Indexes (Five 5 Seconday Indexes) 10. 9. Modify. Invoice.FI Dept (Approval) . MODIFY. Delete.Sales Order Purchase Req . ERP(ECC6). program logic (Insert. GR(Goods Receipt). if table exists then checks for the fields. The data is fetched into Database buffers before the response is sent to R/3 work process. Based on the available processes requests are served based on FIFO. Update) 6. The response is fetched from buffers if they are accessed earlier 7. User submits the request. R/3 Work process handles the user request by interpreting the screen elements. INSERT. NORMALIZATION Process of splitting up the larger tables into smaller tables using primary keys and secondary keys.137 RFQ(Approved) . Request is handled by dispatcher 3.

In the process of updating it will communicate with enqueue and obtain the lock on the document so that no other user updates it. Seibel. ORACLE Oracle is a database that is used by 2/3rd of SAP Customers.Accounts book Log buffers are a small area around 1Mb . 7. User gets the response that the record is updated. R/3 Work process handles the request and update the document into temporary tables (cannot update the permanent tables because all the LUW's in the transaction has to be completed) 5. 14. All the update requests goes to the database and lock the record in the database so that no user update it. The update request goes to the database. As the database buffers need to be accessed by user modifications are not performed in DB Buffers instead in log buffers. In order to support SAP Customers it is mandatory to know the database management. table definitions and execution (Cost based optimizer) path are valid.138 01-Sep-09 UPDATE COMMAND 1. Gets the record to database buffer for modification (No record is modified in the database directly) 11. The committed data is updated into database 13.Cigarette Paper . and other small software's to compete with SAP. Dispatcher keeps the request in queue based on FIFO 4. 12. JDEdwards. Database process keeps a copy of the record in roll back segment PSAPROLL/ PSAPUNDO table space to roll back in case of CRASH/ System Failure. Database process handles the request and checks whether table. Note: Committed data can be updated or Redo.4 Mb. 9. Oracle is provided by Oracle Corporation which owns (PeopleSoft. 8. The locks are released and rollback gets invalidated. 10. The request is received by the dispatcher 3. . As the log buffer is small the content is moved in to Redo logs periodically. Redo logs are duplexed (Mirror logs and Orig Logs) and ensure that the data is updated in the database. Eg. Consider a pan shop Customer . 6. User request for updating a purchase order/ quotation / Invoice 2.

4.2. Microsoft SQL Server from Microsoft.0.SAPDB (MAXDB) is the cheapest combination.2.0 8.7 9.0. 10.0.2. consistent. SAP R/3 R/3 ECC6. Versions Oracle has versions of database SAP License is costlier on Oracle than any other combinations.2.4 Linux .0. robust database to handle any amount of data in Terra bytes. .6C 4.2.0. 9.2.6. reliable.2. well spoken among customers.2. 9.139 Oracle is a proven.0.1.7 and ECC5.0 4. DB2 from IBM and SAPDB(MAXDB) from SAP shares the remaining 1/3rd of SAP Customers. 10. strong.

DB_Connect to connect to database using client version 3. Users OPS$ User to connect to database and get the password of the SAPSR3 User.old) 1.140 DATABASE ARCHITECHTURE Connection Mechanism (refer dev_<SID>. 2. R/3 Work process loads all the DB Libraries. .

User uses SAP GUI to perform a transaction. R/3 Work process handovers the task to database shadow process (1:1 Ratio between R3WP: DBWP) 9.141 OPS$ Mechanism It is a mechanism which is used by operating system users to connect to the database without any password. DB Shadow process checks the task contains valid table and field definitions. OPS$<SID>ADM is the user who owns the table SAPUSER and contains the SCHEMA OWNER SAPSR3 user and password. USER Request Flow/ Display 1. 10. R/3 Work process checks if it is eligible for buffering then keeps a copy in R/3 buffers. Based on available resources a process is allocated to user requests based on FIFO. 13. SAP restricts the access by using internal security. DB Shadow checks if any SQL Execution plan exists. 7. DB Shadow checks if the requested content exist in DB Buffer if not fetch the content from database and updates DB Buffer. Dispatcher keeps the request in Queue 4. . 6. 3. All the work processes uses OPS$<SID>ADM to connect to the database without any password. User request is handled by the dispatcher. SAPSR3 is the Schema/ DB Owner for SAP Database. 11. If not it builds the plan based on cost based optimizer and update SQL Cache. Check the content is available in R/3 buffers. 5. 8. As the processes are able to access the complete database related to schema owner. SQL> Select table_name from dba_tables where owner = 'OPS$WILLSYS99\NWDADM'. 12. The response is handover to R/3 Work Process. WP ------> SAPUSER (Table) USERID | PWD OPS$-User | XXX Relogin with the above user and password Disconnect from the DB and reconnect using SAPSR3 userid and password to get complete access. Communicate with Oracle Client to communicate with DB in native language. WP task handler interpret the user request. IF the table/ Field definition does not exists gets a copy from the database and update the DB Cache/ LIB Cache. 2.

Every request that needs modification/ update / delete has to be performed only in this area. SQL> select name. ORACLE PROCESSES 1.e. From ST04 ..[Logical Reads .Physical Reads/ Logical Reads] * 100 i. Its size is defined by multiplying by 8kb because each block size is 8 kb. DB Buffer is used to store the data until its size is full (or) the content gets invalidated by a change or least recently used. SQL> show SGA LOG BUFFER: It is used to perform the data manipulations by database work process. SYSTEM/ SHARED GLOBAL AREA: It is a memory area which resides purely on memory and it is lost when the system is stopped. Table and Field definitions and packages. Refer init<SID>. Each query/ request should pass through this area. It is defined by the parameter log_buffer generally its size varies between 1MB to 4MB.ora file SYSTEM GLOBAL AREA is the sum of Shared pool. It should not be too big or too small. It is defined by a parameter db_block_buffers. Authorizations.142 14. DB buffers and log buffers SHARED POOL It is defined by shared_pool_size which is a part of SGA (System Global Area) It contains DBCACHE and LIBCACHE and they are nothing but parsed SQL Statements. SGA is lost the complete cache information is lost. In general for an optimized database the ratio should be not less than 94%. DB BUFFER : Used to store the content that is accessed from the database. Response is sent to the user... It is used to reduce the hits on the database there by reducing the load on the database. Its quality is measured by database buffer hit ratio. bytes/1024/1034 "MB" from V$sgastat where pool... It takes time to build SGA when system is started that is why the system is slow after a restart. Shadow Process . Out of 100 request 6 requests goes to the database.

B) from log buffer. b) Shadow process handles the update by locking in the database c) It takes a backup of PSAPROLL/ PSAPUNDO to roll back to the original state if the update is cancelled or abrupt. BACKGROUND/ SERVER PROCESS These are non-interactive to R/3 Processes. Log writer writes the commit into Redo log files but when the size of Redo log file is full size 50MB. Mirrorlog A. They called as shadow processes because they perform the task non-interactively. They perform the task assigned by an R/3 WP. These are also called as User processes (In Oracle Terms) The process are established at the rate of 1:1 during the startup of SAP system. d) The record is fetched into DB Buffer for allowing selection. LOG WRITER Mechanism a) R/3 work process submits the request for an update. When the data is committed System Change Number is generated to ensure the faster commit mechanism. e) A copy of the record is taken to log buffer for modification f) the data/ record is modified in log buffer. To ensure the disk consistency log writer writes into Origredolog and Mirrorredolog files (Both resides on two different physical disks). This cannot be kept for long in the log buffer as the log buffer size is small. These are initiated by system based on requirement. Origlog B. Background Process/ Server Process SHADOW PROCESS These are used to handle the user requests.143 2. LOGWRITE (LGWR) is used to write the committed data into Redo log files (Origlog A. when RedologA is full it is closed for writing and RedologB is opened for writing. .e. This is the first place where a record is written to the disk to ensure that committed changes are not lost. It will perform Log Switch. LOG SWITCH It is a process of switching between RedologA to RedologB and Mirror Logs A to B i.

Every 3 Seconds 3. The log writer process writes data from the redo log buffers to the redo log files on the disk. LOG WRITER . They perform the task assigned by an R/3 WP. These are called as User Processes (In Oracle Terms). The DB WP waits till the buffer total memory gets utilized and then updates the DB) SYSTEM/ SHARED GLOBAL AREA It is a memory area which resides purely on memory and it is lost when the system is stopped. They are called as Shadow Processes because they perform the task non-interactively. ORACLE PROCESSESS 1.144 There will be only one process. SGA is lost the complete cache information is lost. Background/ Server Process Shadow Processes These are used to handle the user requests. When the redo log buffer is 1/3rd full or 1MB of committed. Background or Server Processes These are non-interactive to R/3 Processes. 1. 02-Sep-09 (Note: If the buffer size is more no updates will happen. When a transaction is committed 2. When DBWR signals the writing of redo records to disk.e. The log writer must always be running for an instance. The writer is activated under the following conditions 1. These are initiated by system based on the requirement. i. It takes time to build SGA when system is started that is why the system is slow after a restart. 4. Shadow Processes 2.

This is the first place where a record is written to the disk to ensure that committed changes are not lost. Every 3 Seconds 3. 5. The record is fetched into DB Buffer for allowing selection. OriglogB. The Writer is activated under the following conditions 1. The Log writer process writes data from the redolog buffers to the redolog files on the disk. A copy of the record is taken to log buffer for modification 6. It takes a backup of PSAPROLL/ PSAPUNDO to roll back to the original if the update is cancelled or abrupt. 4. 4. When a transaction is committed 2. There will be only one process. R/3 Work process submits request for an update. It will perform log switch. LOG SWITCH It is a process of switching between Redolog A to Redolog B and Mirror Logs A and B i. When the data is committed SYS Change number is generated to ensure the faster commit mechanism log writer (LGWR) writes the commits in to Redolog files but when the Redolog file is full) size 50MB. * Log Writer is used to write the committed data into Redolog files (OriglogA.e. B) from log buffer. MirrorlogA. The data/ record is modified in Log Buffer This cannot be kept for long in the log buffer as the log buffer size is small. To ensure the disk consistency log writer writes into Origredolog and Mirrorredolog files (Both resides on two different physical disks).145 Mechanism 1. Shadow process handles the update by locking in the database 3. When the redolog buffer is 1/3 full or 1MB of committed. When Redolog A is full it is closed for writing and Redolog B is opened for writing. When DBWR signals the writing of redo records to disk The log writer must always be running for an instance. 2. 03-Sep-09 .

2. CKPT . DBWR is triggered in the following circumstances [ORACLE RAM] = SGA 1. When the request comes to access the dirty buffer content. When log buffer cannot write the content then log buffer gets filled and subsequently the update mechanism gets halted. If it is not moved. MirrorlogB . When Redologs are full ARCH Process During the log switch OriglogA gets filled for writing and OriglogB is opened for writing. All the updates will be done from Logbuffers. Redolog files gets filled and does not have space to write the content from log buffer. Similarly RedologB.146 The Content of OriglogA. 1. When ever a check point occurs (It writes based on system change number SCN) Note: Every select statement hits the database and brings the data to DB Buffers. The contents are written by ARCH from RedologA to ORAARCH and RedologA is ready to be written by LOGWR. (Redolog files) gets filled and need to move to other location. MirrorlogA. SQL> select sequence # from V$ARCHIVED_LOG. the redo log files needs to write to an alternative location immediately once they get filled.Check Point .. A copy is made to LOG Buffer for updation.. OriglogB. DBWR (Database Writer) The content that needs to be updated is fetched into DB Buffer for selection. Once the content is updated in Log Buffer it marks the content in Database Buffer as Dirty buffers and not eligible for selection. so. The contents of OriglogA will be written to ORAARCH directory (Provided archieve_log_mode is set to true).

. PMON PROCESS MONITOR Used to monitor the process recovery when a user process (Shadow process) fails.147 It is used to ensure that system is consistent.Release locks . It triggers DBWR/ LGWR SMON SYSTEM MONITOR Used to ensure the Oracle database is consistent and reliable. It triggers during the system startup and ensure that system is started.htm#21919 It updates the headers of all datafiles to record the details of the checkpoint. Initialization Files: init<sid>.ora is used to provide the startup parameters for Oracle. Do not modify the control file manually. Datafiles : These files are with extension (. It is the most important file (Cntrl<SID>. 3. PHYSICAL FILE SYSTEM 1. Control Files: These are used to display the structure of the database into Six different locations. The system monitor process (SMON) performs recovery.oracle.Freeing the resources that were used by user processes.DBF) The location is specified by a parameter control_file. if necessary at instance startup. PMON is responsible for cleaning up the database buffer cache and freeing resources that the user process is using and release the locks. In case of system crash/ abnormal termination SMON reads the online redologs and redo the changes to database and also reads the PSAPUNDO to roll back the changes.Used to monitor the process (PMON) . . the system modifies by itself when ever there are any changes. 2.Used to start the processes if they are stopped .dbf).com/docs/cd/310501_01/server.920/a96524/C09procs. PMON periodically checks the status of dispatcher and server processes and restarts any that have stopped. These are used to store the data in the Oracle specific RDBMS format. download.

ora Provide port and the host name Sqlnet.. In order to change certain parameters SPFILE is maintained. Oracle contains 3 Modes (4 Including Restrict) 1.148 init<sid>. 04-Sep-09 Special Parameterization files (SPFILE) All the changes that are made requires a reboot of Oracle database. These are located in Oracle_home/ database(windows) DBS on UNIX. We need to explicitly create SP file this SP File cannot be edited manually E:\ORACLE\QAS\I02\ADMIN Oracle Startup When Oracle is started the database available for users. Network/ Admin Listener.sap us used to provide the database backup/ restore (brbackup..dba is used to provide authorization to SAPDBA/ BRTOOLS. Startup Nomount : This phase is used to create control files and database. Tnsnames. 4..ora Provide Port and the Host Name. Init<sid>. brarchive.. No datafiles are mounted. 2. a) Change the archive log mode status 3.ora . brrestore) control parameters. Startup Mount: We can start a DB and mount a database without opening it. allowing us to perform specific maintenance operation. Commands Startup open Startup mount Startup no mount. Startup Restrict: . brconnect.

(Which is committed) Not Consistent. Shutdown Immediate 05-Sep-09 Shutdown Modes 1. Shutdown Transactional. Shutdown Immediate The database is shutdown immediately but all the committed transaction are updated in the database and opened transactions are rolled back.ORA 2) SPFILE.e. 4.ORA 4) INIT. 3.ORA 3) INIT<SID>. all the committed data is updated . 1) SPFILE<SID>. End uses cannot perform any tasks. Shutdown Abort The database is forcibly shuts down and may not be consistent and requires recovery during startup. Consistent.ORA Oracle Shutdown 1. 2. SMON ensures that the database is consistent (REDO/ UNDO) All the users who are working on the system gets terminated abruptly and the intermediate data is lost. restricted to the above operations. b) Perform a data load (With SQL * Loader) c) Temporarily prevent typical users from using data d) During certain migration and upgrade operations e) Used during patch applications the database is opened but not allowed i. No new connections are allowed. The database does not allow any new connections.149 a) Perform an export or import of database data. It reads the init parameters in the following sequence. Startup Open: When DB is started using startup cmd.

Eg: Req: 150 Given 200 Next 50 Max 500 These table/ Indexes are grouped logically into a tablespace/ Container . Shutdown Normal It allows the users to complete all the transactions and shut down the database. no new transactions are allowed. Each block size is 8KB(8192 Bytes) Block size is determined by parameter DB_BLOCK_SIZE (refer inti<sid>.ora) The two parameters DB_NAME and DB_BLOCK_SIZE should never be modified.. STORAGE The database uses file system but organized in the RDBMS concept. Data files are physical files on the file system where data is stored in Datablocks. EXTENTS These are used to allocate space to a table/ segment to control the growth 1. Minimum Extents 3. Initial Extents 2. No new connections are allowed but time consuming to stop the database... Max Extents Segment means (table or Index) Group the blocks to Extent Reorganizing . The data is stored in terms of Database block size in terms of Datablocks... Next Extents 4. .150 In the database and opened transactions are only allowed to complete.....Utilizing the fragmented space... Consistent 4.

PSAP<SCHEMAID> 2. This tablespace is pointing to two datafiles of size 4GB each. EKKO and other child tables. PSAPROLL/ PSAPUNDO 6. These tables are assigned to a tablespace PSAP<SID>. Resolution . Tablespace is pointed to physical datafiles. Oracle provides default tablespace "SYSTEM to manage the database".151 Tablespace is a logical entity which contains related tables/indexes. Note: Each datafile is assigned to only one tablespace. User encountered an error ORA-1653/ ORA-1654 tablespace over flown and the user could not update/ create any more PO's The user could not update the data because the datafiles are filled (or) there is no enough space to allocate for extents. SAP provides the other tablespaces that starts with naming convention PSAP 1. SYSAUX PSAPDEV PSAPDEV640/ 700 PSAPDEVUSR Temporary Table Space UNDO Table Space SYSAUX is a new tablespace available from version 10g. PSAP<SID>USR 4. Eg: Users are creating purchase orders extensively into the tables EKPO. PSAP<SID>RELEASE 3. Each Tablespace can have one or more datafiles to store the table data/ Index data. PSAPTEMP 5.

DMTS . CAP is Max. Init. EXTENT MANAGEMENT When a table or Index is created they are assigned with Min Extent. Max along with the Percentage of Increase.152 Use BRTOOLS (Backup Recovery Tool) to resize the datafile (or) add a datafile. Select username from dba_users. it uses next extents.e. Select * from dba_users. Locally Managed Table Spaces Default table spaces from 10g which manage the extents locally instead of dictionary management.. (Alternatively we can add using SQL Command) SQL> Alter tablespace (Tablespace Name/ PSAP<SID>) add datafile location and size. SAP Tables are stored in DD02L Users are used to login to the database with various privileges. Similarly PSAPROLL should be migrated to PSAPUNDO before upgrade. but there is a tablespace. Use BRTOOLS or SE14 to increase the Extents. The free space in the existing extents is not used there by Fragmentation. Select * from dba_users. 06-Sep-09 SQL> select * from dba_tablespace. Users encounters an error ORA-1631 and ORA-1632 Max Extents Reached. . Next. Select * from dba_tables where table_name like dba%.Dictionary Managed Tablespaces When ever a table is growing it increase it extents i. It collase the space that is left in all the extents before allocating an extent. It requires database Reorganization. It reduces the fragmentation there by reorganization is not required. SAP recommends to migrate all the dictionary managed tablespaces to locally managed before 10g upgrade (Oracle).

1. We need to check the abnormal growth of the database.log which resides in SAPTRACE directory. DATABASE MONITORING As a part of the routine SAP basis checks the following database tasks can also included. Monitor the size of the database to have a detailed capacity planning. Login to SAP system and log the database growth on daily basis. Note: Oracle writes all startup logs into alrt<SID>. Have a storage of 1 TB = 1024 GB At the current growth rate of the database can use the storage up to 30 days approximately. recovery.The complete or absolute owner of oracle database server to perform the activities. Inform the inventory department to order more disks if there is really a DB growth. restore etc.153 ops$willsys99\saservicesr3 ops$willsys99\saservice<SID> ops$willsys99\<sid>adm sys . If we consider 2 Months duration the graph will be like this . Size in GB 1 200 2 210 3 220 4 230 5 230 6 230 7 250 8 280 9 300 10 350 Conclusion The database is growing at an average of 15GB per/ day. It is the only log which can gives us the complete history of database activities. System SAPSR3 SAPSR3DB Administrative user but cannot be used to create modify the DB Perform backup. For Eg.

command BRTOOLS Type option 2 for Space management. Segment is nothing but a table or index.154 DB02 is used to monitor the disk space. DB13 . Option 1 show tablespaces Continue 3 times to display the list of table spaces and their growth.1 (For which tablespace we need to increase the size of datafile) PSAPSR3700 . segment_space_management from dba_tablespace. . Option 7 for additional space function.Overview for a Database Identify the tablespaces which are grown more than 90% and add datafiles.Login as SIDADM on windows or ORASID on UNIX . Tables and Indexes Monitor SQL> Select tablespace_name. System 8192 ----SQL> select tablespace_name.Press Enter E:\oracle\SID\sapdata3\sr3700_16 . critical objects based on Table spaces. block_size from dba_tablespace. BRTOOLS BACKUP RESTORE RECOVERY TOOL These tools are provided by SAP for Oracle Database.Tablespace Particular (DBA Planning Calendar) DB12 . Enter choice .

we need to check if there are any missing indexes and recreate them if required in DB02/SE . blocksize from dba_tablespaces. .The buffer hit ratio should not be less than 94% .SAP Provides all the indexes (Predefined one(Primary Index) + Four (Secondary Index). Select the database buffer hit ratio.Objects which are missing are displayed in Red. transaction ST04 .Add the datafile or resize datafile before its gets an error message "Tablespace overflow" MISSING INDEXES Identify the missing indexes in DB02 (which will reduce the performance without proper indexes) Goto DB02 > Diagnostics > Missing Tables and Index Check the objects that are missing .Physical Reads)/ Logical Reads) * 100 . Physical Reads: The number of reads that are made to Physical Database. select them and create in the database.155 In this path 16 datafiles are there if we increase the tablespace size one more data file is created called sr3700_17 SQL> select tablespace_name. . 2. Hit Ratio = ((Logical Reads .Recreate them .It is calculated based on reads Logical Reads : The number of reads that are made to Database buffer.For each table we can create 1 Primary Index and 4 Secondary Indexes these are predefined because of the huge table growth indexes are missed.

Update stats. BRCONNECT It is used to connect to the database and performs various administrative tasks.Open it Change the parameter values Backup_type = disk 07-Sep-09 BRTOOLS These tools are used to manage or monitor the oracle database which are specifically provided by SAP. it is used to check the database and writes the logs into sapcheck directory.f check . Archive directory is having space 4.. If the ratio is reduced we can conclude that DB_BLOCK_BUFFERS size is not sufficient or there are frequent updates on the system. DB backup is performed successfully or not 2. SCHEDULE DB BACKUP Init<SID>.sap It resides in Oracle_Home\database (Windows) In UNIX DBS directory It controls the runtime behavior of BRTOOLS. Offline to Oraarch are scheduled periodically and running fine. DB Housekeeping Jobs are running successfully or not (DB Check. adapt extents) 3. BRTOOLS contains the following Options 1. BRTOOLS reads the parameters from init<SID>. Check conditions are described in transaction DB17 which in turn stores the details in DBMSGORA Open Command Prompt > brconnect -f check .156 Physical reads are increasing conclude that the database hits are more. clear old log files. DB13 We need to check 1.sap ---------. BRCONNECT ..

It is consistent and reliable. Running update statistics improves the performance of the system. It is updated periodically (Weekly). BR-BACKUP BR Backup is used to take backup of the database (Datafiles). It identifies the tables whose statistics are outdated and updates them. Optimizer is used to collect the statistics for the tables whose statistics are outdated. There are various types of backups 1. When ever a backup is triggered BR Backup is initialized. How ever when these jobs are scheduled BRCONNECT runs in the background.e. (Eg. Next extents can be increased automatically) These jobs can be scheduled using DBCALENDER (DB13). Offline Backup (Cold Backup) The database is down during backup and no transaction is allowed as it is down. We need to run the DB optimizer once a week. Friend comes to India from America after 5 years) Cleaning up OLD log files brconnect -f cleanup It is used to clean the old log files from saptrace and sapcheck directory brconnect -f next It is used to adopt the next extents (i. Incremental Backup 4. So that all the tables and Indexes where there are stored will be known to DB Optimizer. Whole Offline Backup: The backup taken fully and a catalog is opened to start the incremental backup. Partial Backup 1. Offline Backup 2. Online Backup 3. .157 > brconnect -u system -p <pwd> -f check brconnect -f stats Used to run the database statistics.

4. 3. It can be online or offline. Catalog (SUNDAY . BR ARCHIVE (initSID. Whole Online Backup: The backup is taken fully and a catalog is opened to start the online incremental backup. Online Backup The DB is up and running with out effecting the user transactions. Full Online Backup: It is complete database backup with out any catalogs.sap) . Partial Backup It is taken for a specific table during a patch (Especially HR Patches) Backup type is defined by a parameter Backup_mode = all Backup_type = offline Backup_dev_type = Tape or Disk Backup_root_dir = H:\oracle\SID\sapbackup All the above backups are performed by using brbackup.The rest will be taken) 2. Full Offline Backup: It is a complete database backup without any Catalog. It is consistent and reliable with redo logs that are generating during backup. Incremental Backup It is initiated from level0 backup and used when the database size is too big.158 Eg: A database is of 2000 GB Which is not possible to take a daily full offline backup with a backup speed of 150GB/ Hour. Online Backup: It is consistent always with redo logs.

159 It is used to backup the offline redolog file to tape or disk i.e.While copying Oracle provides various means of log save because we don't want the corruption of logs.. ....So the Oraarch content needs to be moved to alternative location on hourly. . .Archive function means the saving mechanism of log files.e (Offline redologs) the content of oraarch is referred as offline redo logs. OriglogB. NWDA30. bi-hourly for every 4 hours or daily depending upon the frequency of updates. from ORAARCH directory to tape or disk.If Oraarch is full the archive gets stuck and the complete update mechanism stuck and users encounter congestion. Reads content from Log Buffer. Archive_function = SAVE/ COPY/ DELETE Archive_copy_dir = H:\Oracle\NWD Tape_size= 100G Volume_archive=NWDA01..Log writer logs into OriglogA.. Mirror Log B. Log writer writes to OrigLogA and OrigLog B. MirrorLogA. . . . MirrorLogB -When online redo logs are full then Arch writes contents to Oraarch i. When OrigLog A is full it is moved to OrigLog B When OraArch is full it is backed up to a tape or disk. Mirror Log A..

Redolog Backup .Restore Database . Rebuild.Extend the tablespace by adding datafile or resizing datafile. . cleanup logs. mostly create and drop are not used) . BRRecover with various options. Max datafiles are 250 in SAP.Reorganisation (Create. 08-Sep-09 BRTOOLS It uses BRConnect. System Copy/ Homogeneous Copy ..Tablespace management (Create drop alter. dbcheck. Indexes Export and Import tables) . DB REFRESH 1. adapt next extents) .Start and stop the database .Recover Database from Redolog Backup . We can do the following with BRTools.160 The data transfer from Oraarch to disk is done by BRArchive. SYSTEM COPY/ HOMOGENEOUS COPY/ HETEROGENEOUS COPY. .Display profiles. BRBackup.Database standard house keeping jobs (DBStatistics. Each datafile size is 1% of the Whole database (100-200) 2 GB 200-400 4GB.. change schema password etc. BRRestore.Database backup .from database backup .

. To change the hardware. Review the inputs and continue the import. 3. While applying patches.161 It is used to setup a system similar to a PRD.specify typical .e. Use Installation Master DVD . To setup a new system in the landscape (Only DEV and PRD exists.specify the password if <sid>adm . THE REASONS FOR SYSTEM COPY Unicode Migration or Code Page Conversion 1. Database and R3 without changing OS or DB. STEPS for SYSTEM COPY 1. R3) remains the same but only database is refreshed. the system is completely build from OS. Kernel Upgrade to test the objects with Production data. Source System 2. To move out from one OS to another or One DB to another DB which is called as OS/ DB Migration which needs to be carried under the guidance of Certified consultant. QAS etc.specify Profile directory e:\usr\sap\sid\sys\profile .Use Additional Tasks . 3. 2. System Copy is performed using export and import of the database. i. DB. now we need to deploy QAS as a copy of PRD) 2. 4.System Copy . Heterogeneous Copy When ever there is a change in OS or DB then it is said to be heterogeneous.Source System .Specify the export location for Import. 5. DB Refresh It is the process of refreshing the data of one system (OS.select database instance export . DATABASE REFRESH by another system data.

Take a copy of them using transport requests. Start the system and restore the target dependencies Pre-Steps for DB Refresh 1. Users. QAS and PRD. POST STEPS Pre steps Pre Steps on the Target system.Copy the cofiles & datafiles in usr\sap\sid\trans . Delete the entire SAPDATA files. 2. Roles etc. Make the BTC Processes to 0. add-ons in the landscape. Printers. Eg. It is required to keep the dependencies of the target system to restore them later i. 3. So we will take a copy in QAS and apply before PRD. The report is good in DEV and QAS but bad in PRD that means quality checks are failed. We don't want any issues that crops up on the production system. PRE STEPS 2. Restore the database from Tape or Disk. Se we need to delete the source dependencies and restore the target dependencies. QAS and PRD existing in the landscape. Kernel .162 Let us say there are three systems DEV. DB REFRESH 3. Similarly we need to apply patches. Generate the control file from source system. screen shots etc. 1. The objects which are developed in DEV needs to be transported to QAS and PRD the objects behave differently in DEV. After Refresh the target system QAS behaves like production System. Eg. PRD DB Size 1TB 2TB. 4. . A Small report which fetches monthly sales executes 1 Sec in DEV and in QAS where as in PRD it is consuming 30Min. after refresh. Create Control file with new database structure of QAS 5. RFCDES and TBDLS And then we need to release the Transport of Copies.e. RFC Connections. Batch Jobs. so that no background job is triggered 6. Create the transport of copies by using SE01 and specify the following objects/ tables USR01. USR02. License. So we need to copy the PRD (DATA files) system to QAS system from time to time to get proper quality done. Process 1.

163 - Take the screen shots of SM59, BD54, DB13, SM37, AL11(All the SAP Directories), WE20 (IDOCS), SMLG, RZ12 (RFC SERVER GROUPS), RZ70 (Inorder to populate the backend system details to SLD), RZ04 (Operation Modes) SCC4, SPAM. 4. And then We need to delete all the datafiles related to QAS system. data1, data2 etc. First we need to stop the oracle services the structure should remain same. Directories like sapdata1.... sapdata..n, MirrorlogA, B, OriglogA, B 5. First Activity After taking the backup of PRD server we need to generate control file. > Alter database backup controlfile to Trace. It will generate the Cntrl File under usertrace directory. Copy the cntrl file to quality system and rename it as with .sql extension. If it is offline backup the foldernames offline b.afd online b.afd

08-Sep-09 BRTOOLS ERRORS 1. Tablespace over flow (ORA-1653, 1654) 2. Max Extents reached (ORA-1631, 1632) 3. Archive Stuck (ORA-255, ORA-272) 4. Datablock corruption (ORA-1578)... restore from old backup 5. Missing end backup while performing a backup 6. stats out dated - run brconnect -f stats 7. Oracle listener, Tnsnames port issues 8. Oracle DLL Compatibility issues (Patch Oracle) 9. International hardware errors ORA-600 (Refer to SAP and Oracle) 10. OPS$ issues related to authentication while logging 11. Connection issues between R/3 WP: Oracle Shadow with error ORA-12560 12. Oracle is corrupted or Disk corrupted, External disk not available, datafile missing, Space issues. 13. Missing Indexes in DB02 14. Database backup not successful due to space issues, tape issues 15. Control file missing - Recreate control file Note: All Oracle errors refer to Oracle/ SAP (ORA-XXXX) 16. Oracle shared memory not available issue with SGA 17. If buffer hit ration below 94% (Increase block buffer size)

164 09-Sep-09 IMPLEMENTATION Installation of SAP System 1. Download the Installation Guide from the Market Place. www.service.sap.com/instguide 2. No of users/ Load on the system 3. Perform Sizing www.service.sap.com/sizing

4. Download the software www.service.sap.com/swdc 32 Bit means I386 cmd> memsize/ memlimit 5. Entry in etc\services PORTS Dispatcher Port Message server Port Gateway Port Secured Dispatcher Port Secured Gateway : : : : : 3200 3600 3300 4700 4800 to to to to to 3299 3699 3399 4799 4899

6. Make sure that Installation Ports 21212, 21213 are not used 7. Kernel depends on O/S 32-64, Database, UC/ NUC Exports are OS/ DB Dependent 8. All the entries are stored in control.xml and installation progress is stored in keydb.xml If the installation is aborted/ cancelled then the above two files will help us to start from the point where it stopped earlier. 9. An installation directory sapinst_dir is created which host the log files of the installation Note: SMSY > System Landscape > Other object > create sap* : 06071992 ddic : 19920706


10-Sep-09 TADIR - Stores all the repository objects

Repository consists of your ABAP objects like programs, function modules. ABAP data dictionary consists of tables, domains etc. Data dictionary is like a part of repository only. From SE11 these are database objects Database tables views datatype Lock objects Searchhelp. Type group Domain. Note: Instance No 00: Port No: 3200 Database O/S R/3 sap* : 06071992 ddic : 19920706



166 1. No Solman Key 2. Pre requisite checker 3. Passwords are default and OS/SB passwords need to be provided in the input screen 4. Central instance and database are installed separately (Central system is introduced with combination of CI and DBI) --------------------------------------NTI386 - Intel Pentium IA64 - Intel Itanium X64 - AMD64 AIX_64- IBM --------------------------------------5. Kernel used to reside in RUN directory and in current versions in sys\exe\UC\NT\I386 6. No screen to review the inputs and change them if required. 7. No interactive / colorful screens 8. Up to 4.6C r3setup is used to install SAP. sapinst is introduced from 4.7 version. 9. Tablespaces are 27 up to 4.6c from 4.7e onwards they are reduced to 6 Tablespaces. 10. SAPDBA is replaced by BRTOOLS in newer versions 11. MMC passwords are required to start SAP in newer versions cmd> startsap name=DEV nr=00 SAPDIAHOST=HOME ---------------------------------------------------------OS = SIDADM SAPSERVICE<SID> ST06 - gets for SAPOSCOLL service Trans - EPS (Electronic Parcel Service) - All the developments are hosted. ---------------------------------------------------------PROFILE MANAGEMENT Usr\sap\SID\sys\profile There are three 3 profiles which are available by default 1. Default 2. start_DVEBMGS00_<HOSTNAME>.pfl 3. <SID>_DVEBMGS00_<HOSTNAME>.pfl Installation Questions 1. Installation Pre-Requisites

167 2. Installation Inputs 3. Difference between earlier and Current Versions 4. Installation Checks 5. Starting of SAP System.

Installation Pre-Requisites 1. Download the Installation Guide www.service.sap.com/Instguide 2. Sizing 3. Download the Software from www.service.sap.com/swdc 4. Install JAVA j2sdk_1_4_2_12 5. Set the Environment Variables JAVA_HOME PATH 6. Set the Virtual Memory 7. Install ORACEL 10g Execute OUI.exe (Oracle Universal Installer) (.) Install Database Software Only 8. Install Patch Installation Inputs Sapinst.exe from InstMaster Folder SAP Netweaver 2004s Support Release2 > SAP Systems > Oracle > Central System Administration Select (.) Typical Prompts to logoff to get some privileges Login as Administrator Select the Usage Types AS ABAP AS JAVA BI JAVA DI EPCORE EP MI OUI.exe

168 PI Browse for Java Components Browse for JCE Policy (JAVA Cryptographic Encryption) Prompts for SID and the Installation Drive [E:] Prompts for Master Password Prompts for DBSID and Database Host Prompts for Installation Exports path (Actual Content lies in Exports) Exports varies from Component to Component Prompts for Kernel and Oracle Client paths System Landscape Directory (.) Configure Local SLD IF Local SLD then Object Server Name [Hostname] Parameter Summary If required change the MirrorLogA and OrigLogA, B to different directories Requires SOLMAN Key from Solman System [SMSY] Task Progress.....~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~ Install SAPGUI (Setupall.exe)

Installation Checks 1. Users: Two users are created <SID>ADM SAPSERVICE<SID>

<SID>ADM is used to start the SAP system and Administration of SAP SAPSERVICE<SID> is a service user used to run the services. Verify from My Comp> Manage > Users and Groups

169 SAPOSCOL is an operating system collector ensure that sufficient resources are available to start SAP system. SAP<SID>_INSTANCENO used to start the SAP system.

2. Groups: Following groups are created to work on Oracle Database and R/3 Executables. ORA_<SID>_DBA ORA_<SID>_OPER SAP_<SID>_GLOBALADMIN SAP_<SID>_LOCALADMIN SAP_LOCALADMIN 3. usr\sap\trans is created to host the transports. It is a common transport directory where the changes of development are stored as transport requests, provides EPS\in for patching the system. 4. Kernel executables are extracted into usr\sap\SID\sys\exe directory Used to start and manage the runtime of the SAP System. 5. Profiles are created in usr\sap\SID\sys\profiles Which governs the startup parameters, runtime parameters of SAP System. 6. SAPDATA1 is created with datafiles saparch, oraarch, sapcheck, saptrace, sapreorg and redolog files (OriglogA, OriglogB, MirrorlogA, MirrorlogB) Database specific file system. 7. On Windows MMC(Gui based) is created to start and stop the SAP System To start and stop the SAP System 8. On UNIX startup scripts are created on <SID>ADM in Home Directory (startsap, stopsap) 9. Work directory is created in usr\sap\SID\DVEBMGS00\work used to host the trace files(Logs) which are generated during SAP system startup. 10. Oracle database uses (ORASID on UNIX other users like OPS$ Users, SAPSR3, SAPSR3DB) ORA<SID> is the owner of the database in UNIX

Open Terminal .sql (From here we can find whether the database is up or not) b) Starts the Message server using executable msg_server.cmd .136.log which is in the work directory strdbs.consists of a entry .65. The IP addresses from 192/ 172/ 10 are private IP Addresses which can be used internally in the companies. 4.log All the log files resides in Work Directory.pfl Startup Profile consists of a) Starting the database using command strdbs. dev_w1.170 <SID>ADM is the owner(Administrative Privileges) of the database in Windows Starting up of SAP System 1. dev_wn-1 11-Sep-09 192/ 172/ 10 Global IP Address (ARPANET) If we assign other than this the system are considered to be public.cmd this command starts the database and writes the log files to stderr1. buffers etc and writes the logs into dev_w0.Startsap (Scripts) 3. memory.146 . In future there is possibility for address conflict.exe and writes the log into work directory dev_ms.pfl Such as number of work processes. 202.log if it is not started it writes the log into stderr. When engine is started it reads the startup profile which is located in usr\sap\sid\sys\profile\start_DVEBMGS00_<hostname>..log c) Starts the Dispatcher using executable disp+work and write the log file into work\dev_disp and stderr. On UNIX login as <SID>ADM ..V9start. dev_w2 . On Windows use SAPMMC/ Startsap to start the SAP System 2. We need to buy public IP addresses from ISP's. When the process are started they read properties from Instance Profile SID_DVEBMGS00_HOSTNAME.

Extended Binary Code. It is translated to Private IP or Routed to PVT IP.Physical Memory (RAM) The Internet communication Manager ICMON started by using icom.Network Address Translation All the servers are managed with Private IP but . they are available externally by using Public IP. listener hostnames. listener ports. EPSIBIC . Check the database is up and running by Start > run > sqlplus "as sysdba" 2. listener.log. Whenever a request comes from Internet to a public IP.2GB 64 Bit . It is also called as Trace directory or Developer traces.Allocates upto 4 GB Virtual Memory (Hard Disk) ..exe All the startup logs are stored in Work directory.e.Supports .171 NAT . DB_Connect Issues. PAM . The work process is unable to connect to the database. If the database is not started then start the database and look into the log files alert<SID>. System not started? 1. cmd> lsnrctl 14-Sep-09 .log which resides in saptrace\ background directory Oracle\SID\saptrace\background Identify for Oracle errors that start with "ORA" Example 1033 . Q. listener status.. i.. database startup statuses etc. Check the connectivity.Product Availability Matrix 32 Bit .

172 07-Jul-09 BASIS Recently SAP -Manufact uring -Retail Applicati on Server Allocates Processes Accelerates the requests INSTANCE It's an Agent Communicates .

Analysis.173 with Database with the Native SQL .. performance..0 (Service) will handle the user request. Administration. ABAP BASIS BW into a common supply chain/ Platform The integrated ITS uses the common HTTP mechanism as in SAP Web AS.Dispatcher As the load goes on increases we will go with adding a Dialogue Instance Accessing the BASIS repository over the web. 08-Jul-09 BASIS . . auditing and development. .It provides a platform for User Management. and for this SAP Implemented a component called ITS (Internet Transaction Server) separate tool windows specific. no additional Web server is required as. Monitoring. tracing. in the case of the standalone ITS.It provides the runtime environment for all SAP Components. IIS (Microsoft internet information service) SAPWAS: SAP WEB APPLICATION SERVER which is capable of providing internet Including ICM 6.

2.Additional Life Cycle. It is similar to single code page and supports only the like minded When there are no plans to expand the business globally this is the best option. EBP (Enterprise Buyer Professional) etc. the characters are stored in more than one byte.Work Load Monitor .Security Audit .e.Sub Module of SCM BIW (Business Intelligence Warehouse).Multi Display Multiple Language) on the same system.. SAP Stopped supporting blended (Multi) code pages i..Audit Information System . Refer TCPDP table and I18N NON-UNICODE: languages. Dutch. . code page conversion. Use SAP Installation Master DVD . (NON UNICODE to UNICODE) Process: UNICODE Migration 1. due to this reason we need multicode page (MDMP . Korean. reliable. From SAPWEBAS 640 SAP provides only two versions (Non-Unicode and Unicode). German. and consistent which are built on ABAP language.User Management . SMLT Languages like Chinese. MDMP has various disadvantages during upgrade i. In future we can perform a UNICODE Migration.0. Ensure that the version is Unicode enabled like ECC6.System Trace .ABAP Editor There are various BASIS platforms for R/3 APO (Advanced Planner and Optimizer). BI7. and Japanese cannot be accessed using the above code page.) but each additional languages should be imported... . .0.Sub Module of SRM All these applications are robust..174 SU01 SM21 RZ20 SM20 ST03 ST01 SECR SE38 .e. MDMP and introduced UNICODE to support all the languages i.e.Administration (System Logs) .. LANGUAGE *************************** SINGLE CODE PAGE: The database is installed on a code page like 1100 which can support the like minded languages around 10 (En. and CRM2005 etc.Monitoring (CCMS) Computing Center Management System .. stable.. Thai.

Note: We need to perform certain pre post steps.0 . ITS consists of two gates (WEB Gate and APPLICATION Gate) Process Flow: 1. .175 . In the earlier scenarios APPS Dispatcher used to handle the user request but in web scenario the HTTP requests are handled by ITS. These requests are forwarded to Agate. The web requests are received by Wgate which are in the form of . **************************** ITS: Internet Transaction Server In order to provide the web functionality to all SAP components ITS (Internet Transaction Server) is introduced by SAP. Note: As the Kernel is going to be changed during migration the whole database needs to be deleted.6c to ECC6. Refer UCMIGR.. 2.CSS (Cascading Style Sheets)..TASKS .export NUC 3. Unicode consumes 40% of additional resources than NUC. Target system System -> Import with Unicode Kernel. ITS installed on a separate machine or Application server to handle the web requests.NUC to Unicode. Upgrade Migration .Source system .System copy .HTML or .4.

Response is forwarded to Agate. 5. The Dispatcher in the Application server handles the request and process it. Agate converts web request into Dynpro specific requests so that they can be handled by Diag Protocol. 4.176 Diag is a protocol that is used to handle the request coming from SAPGUI on port 3200 Series 3200 + Instance Number 3. .

Instead of ITS SAP included WEBAS 640 and included ICM service within the Application Server.Internet Communication Manager) which is called IITS (Integrated Internet Server) Tcode: SITSPMON . Update or delete.177 Time Consuming Not an Integrated Service It depends on IIS (Internet Information Server) to host the pages Non Business User input -> Queue -> Assign a Counter -> Screen -> Withdrawal -> Insert. (ICM .

offline.0 ECC 6.6D) ITS provided the web functionality (APO 3.0 SCM 4.0 CRM 4.0. WEBEX.0 SRM 4.5 ECC 5. dynamic.0 XI 3. Rooms.. this platform is going to be a common platform for all the SAP Applications even the ICM is introduced in SAPWEBAS and its still require ITS to process the web request.0 Are the SAP components that are installed on a common platform SAPWEBAS 640. BIW 3. Logos etc.6c (Kernel Version 4. Subsequently SAPWEBAS 700 and 710 are released 09-Jul-09 WEBAS ABAP could not provide Colorful. Knowledge Management. Work List. . It is accessed by the tcode: SITSPMON BIW 3. SAP introduced IITS which is integrated in WEBAS640.0 are the last basis components) SAP Introduced ICM (Internet Communication Manager) and named the platform as SAPWEBAS 6.178 IE -> [ICM + IITS] WEBAS Introduction of WEBAS Until versions R/3 4. chat.

.Exchange Infrastructure: Provides communication from one system to another system. Exchange Messages called as Process Integration (or) Intelligent Broker (or) BPM using an adapter.179 Consider an Example - XI .

PI .180 KM . XI.Content Management TREX Engine .Where the content is fetched either from BI.Text retrieval and classification engine searches the information and bring out from Terra Bytes of data. BI.Knowledge Management CM . as and when required The 4 Layers PI. XI. Application Platform called as NETWEAVER .

181 MDM ERP ECC SCM SRM CRM . ABAP.PIPA P I P A .Enterprise Resource Planning . PI content etc.Enterprise Central Component . SAPWEBAS 640. BI.Master Data Management . provided as add-on. Portal Content.People Integration . SAPWEBAS JAVA 640.Supply Chain Management . NETWEAVER: Is a common platform which provides EP (Enterprise Portal).Process Integration . KM (Knowledge Management). PI.Supplier Relationship Management . CM (Content Management)..Information Integration .Application Platform Note: For Netweaver ABAP is mandatory as the business lies in ABAP.Customer Relationship Management NETWEAVER . . JAVA & Mobile Integration.

EP. SQL. SR2. It provides runtime executables/ libraries that are required for SAP Engine (SAPWEBAS) The Installation master provides an option to install all the Netweaver components together with SAP application component (ERP. MI (Mobile Infra). BI-Java PI .0 Netweaver Components accelerates the business components.Mandatory for all the components except for EP JAVA . BI. MaxDB) After installation the entire content resides in the database only. Usage Types: Provides certain functionality to the business components. XI.JAVA Development . SR3 From Netweaver '04 S. ORACLE.. . Usage types are selected during the installation. Development Infrastructure. SR3 or Netweaver '07 all the above content provided on one single DVD..Java Components .Both ABAP + JAVA required BIJAVA . EP.Kernel .communication between one process to another process. also called Netweaver '04 S.The software that is required is Installation Master . Kernel resides at OS level.Mandatory for PI. EP. BI. ERP and BI cannot put together in a single box. ABAP . (OLTP) and (OLAP) XI . JAVA. SCM. SR1. MDM7.Exports . BI.Data Consistency Try to populate the data from one repository to different servers MDM5. Usage types are ABAP. Mobile. SR2. SR1. MDM: Master Data Management . JAVA. PI.182 Netweaver is introduced along with SAPWEBAS 640 but most of the components as add-on.5. and SRM) Netweaver Components: ABAP. EPCORE EP CORE EP . CRM. EPCORE. However WEBASABAP is a mandatory Note: EP (Enterprise portal is not a business component for Java and it is only meant for GUI and Formatting) and EP doesn't requires ABAP EP = EP Core + JAVA ERP and EP cannot put together in a single box.JCE Policy (Java Cryptography Extension) . JAVA. i. PI.e.The respective database (DB2.JAVA..

(sapinst. 5.. MSS (Microsoft SQL Server): <SID> OS (UNIX) : ORA<SID> R/3 Specific application users : SAP*.183 Infrastructure . Netweaver Installation: 1.. Master password for the users : <SID>adm : SAPService<SID> DB : ORA: Sys. SCM etc. 6. Select the installation Database (Oracle. Provide the following inputs 1. Exports. However when we choose to install ERP. SQL.ABAP Message Server 3900 . SID 2. DDIC R/3 DB Owners : SAP<SID> upto WAS640 : SAPSR3 for ABAP on WAS700 : SAPSR3DB fro JAVA on WAS700 MSS : <SID> Select username from DBA_USERS.ABAP. Instance Number (00 to 97) 3. Outln.Dispatcher port OS . Select the respective Sapinst. Use Installation Master 2. CRM.exe for windows and . Provide the path for Software dump (Kernel. MaxDB. System. JAVA Components) on UNIX we may need to abrupt the installation and install the database but on windows the database can be installed before in hand.which is used to provide secure communication over the web.JAVA MOBILE . JAVA 10-Jul-09 Netweaver alone cannot bring business it should be coupled with one of the SAP Business component like ERP. CRM.) 4.3297 .3697 . SCM they gets installed on ABAP platform which is a part of Netweaver.JAVA Message Server 3200 .3999 . JCE Policy (Java Cryprography ./sapinst on UNIX) 3. 4. Ports 3600 .

SSL (Https) ref: help.04 (EHP4) .4797 3300 .JAVA instance port if instance number is 00 Say for eg if the instance number is 25 then 50000 (100 + 25) = 52500 04 is for Administration port : 52504 Say for eg 99 .22:50001 50001 Starting ABAP Engine: Windows: UNIX : MMC (Microsoft Mgmt Console) startsap .59904 .01 (EHP1).Instance Number) Eg: https://201.3397 4800 .184 4700 .Gateway port . 7.Secured gateway port .Dispatcher security port .SDM Ports (00 .com Startsap all : (Includes the Dialogue Instance) Startsap r3 Stopping ABAP Engine: Windows: UNIX : Starting JAVA Engine: Same as starting ABAP Engine Starting Integrated Engine (ABAP + JAVA): ABAP dispatcher starts the JAVA instance provided the parameter rdisp/ start_j2ee is set to true or use SMICM to start manually. BASIS) Enhancement Pckg : is an upgrade to the current functionality 700. BW.59916 50008 .Telnet Port 50026 .12.17. MMC (Microsoft Mgmt Console) stopsap Notes (Patch) : This does the small corrections Support Package : Group of patches Support Stacks : Group of Support Packages (ABAP. 7.sap.4897 50000 .

Dispatcher-JAVA is used to handle the requests and process them to server processes.Foreground ABAP Instance: Central Instance DVEBMGS (Dialogue. Gateway and Spool) Except Message and Enque (Dia. Central Instance 3. BTC Message. gateway & Update) Database Processes Consists of Dispatcher & Server processes Dialogue Instance: Database Instance: JAVA Instance: Dispatcher-ABAP is used to handle the requests and process them based on FIFO Dispatcher allocates the requests to work process (Dialogue) for interactive communication.185 Upgrade 640-700-710 Installation of Instances: It is an integrated installation which consists of 1. Database Instance Central Services instances are provided in JAVA Engine which consists of JAVA Message Server and Enque Server to provide load balancing to the web users and central locking for all the JAVA instances. Note: ipcclean in UNIX pagefile. Central Services Instance 2. Dialogue Process .sys in windows is used to clear the pages Resource at the disk level is a Semaphore. Spool. Update. BTC. . Enque.

186 .

Create the change request . Service Desk Creation. ABAP Request Handling .Service_Desk_change_st32A13 . business management criteria to a unit. SCPR20 . quality assurance and re-use purposes which is independent of the original Customizing tables/views which is accessible across the system landscape.Create Support Message.BCSet . For documentary.Maintain .187 11-Jul-09 A Business Configuration Set is a set of Customizing settings which are grouped according to logical.OSS_MSG -Save .expert mode Continue Goto satellite system SM30 Look for BCOS_CUST Help .

User submits the request using GUI .Work process handles the request using Work Process Task Handler . JAVA Request Flow . .Task Handler interpret the request and submit the request to Database .Dispatcher keeps the request in Queue.The request is received by the dispatcher .User submits the request .Dispatcher assigns the request to Work Process .188 .The database process the request and response is sent back to the user.Dispatcher serves the request based on FIFO .

Database Instance .ATM Handles the user request internal process/ Intra process (For Locking) is handled by Server process.Central services are used for load balancing and locking purposes.JAVA Dialogue Instance (Optional) Process Flow 1. . .Startsap command . Process of JAVA Startup . It uses default profile to start the engine with minimal parameters that are required by all the Dialogue Instances. User uses any of the above startup methods to start the JAVA Engine 2.SMICM .or rdisp/j2ee_start=true used to start along with ABAP Engine but consumes at least 10 Mins to 30 Mins.Server process processes the requests till it is completed/ or the memory is exhausted/ timeout .Server process assigns application thread manager to process the request . 5.Server process communicates with DB and the response is sent back to the user.Request is handled by JAVA Dispatcher .Central Instance .Dispatcher assigns the least loaded server process . It uses the instance profile to start the engine with instance specific (Memory Buffer etc) <SID>_SCS01_Hostname for SCS and <SID>_DVEBMGS00_hostname for Integrated Engine and <SID>_JC00_Hostname for Standalone Java Engine 6. The system is started by using startup profile START_DVEBMGS_<Hostname> (Integrated Engine) START_JC00_<Hostname> (Standalone JAVA Engine) 3. . (During an update) JAVA Startup .Central Services Instance .Use MMC .189 . It also uses START_SCS01_<Hostname> for starting SAP Central Services 4. In order to start the JAVA engine Jcontrol process is used to initialize the system.

properties JLaunch . What are the inputs that are required during the installation? 4. jlaunch for SDM and while initializing Jlaunch for server process it synchronize the binaries(All logs) of the dispatcher and the servers. What is JAVA Instance/ JAVA Cluster 2.190 7.properties Error logs are stored in DEV_JControl from the WORK Directory DEV_JLaunch DEV_Dispatcher DEV_Icm It consumes more time to start because bootstrap reads the parameters from the database to instance. logs and profiles that are used.? 6.properties and bootstrap initializes Jlaunch for dispatcher. Explain the JAVA file system? LAB . Explain the process of JAVA Engine startup & Describe the executables. files.Dispatcher JLaunch . What are the various profiles that are used during startup & Explain the significance of them? 5. 1. JControl starts JLaunch process by reading instance.server process JAVA Engine Startup Flow Note: JControl reads from SDM/config/sdm_jstartup. What are the types of Installations and which of them are recommended based on the usage types? 3. JControl initializes the bootstrap process to read the parameters from 8.

000 MB = 15GB .Properties .Assign the computer name : willsys11 .Organization name : willsys11 .4.2_12\bin .Allocate the remaining During installation of O/S .ok Now under system variable Search for "path" and highlight it and click on edit .Advanced .Allocate 15.Assign the product key .under performance click on settings for C Drive for D Drive eg: 223467MB = 223GB .under Advanced tab .click on New Set variable name : JAVA_HOME Set variable value: c:\j2sdk1.provide the system name : willsys11 .provide the Admin pwd : admin123 Install the LAN Drivers and assign the static IP Address : 172.2_12 (without \bin) .After installing copy the path from c:\j2sdk1.ok Setting Virtual Memory .My Computer .4.17.2_12 .10.click on environment variables .2_12\bin Set the Environment Variables from .0 .Install the j2sdk.11 255. se v1.255.4.0 Copy the SAP dump by accessing another machine \\willsys04\d$ Installing ECC6.0.4.0 on Win 2k3 Server Enterprise Edition Install the O/s .191 Installing SAP ECC6.under variable value : c:\j2sdk1.

Used to identify the usage types \usr\sap\<sid>\config\ usage. . Usage types ABAP.properties Specifies the configuration of the Netweaver system 1.Master Password .192 .Access the folder oraclelog\NT\Oracle\sapserver.Kernel And prompts for SOLMAN Key get this from SOLMAN System.exe During Installation it prompts for various inputs . 12-Jul-09 Usagetypes. BI JAVA.D: . Machine Type .select C: drive and set .run sapinst.SID .provide the SID eg: W11 SAP Installation. PI and MI 2. EP. JAVA.cmd .custom size Initial size: 2046 Max-Size : 8000 If RAM is 2 GB we can select up to 8GB from HDD.click on change under Virtual Memory and Hit change .Oracle 10G .Exports . Installing Database . DI (Development Infrastructure).JAVA Components .select advanced tab . EPCORE.properties .

Admin Directory: Used for administrating the J2EE engine using Visual Admin tool. IGS: 3. It also contains instance. 1. J2EE: 1. Memory available on the system 4.Straight away we can see the ABAP Engine It is the Instance directory which specifies the types of processes. System ID and Instance Number 6. Note: In an integrated installation (ABAP + JAVA) J2EE_ADMIN is the administrator and on standalone JAVA Engine (Administrator) is the userid that manages J2ee engine. It contains the following directories. Cluster: It specifies the dispatcher. engine type. This user reads the ABAP user master and ensure all the users are in the JAVA engine. JAVA engine doesn't let us to create users as the Data source will be in ABAP.properties to start the instance (We can find by what time the instance is started) . It also specifies the users that are created during installation along with the encrypted password. Dispatcher + Server = Local instance (Cluster) 2.193 NT INTEL. statistical data etc DVEBMGS it is a Kernel directory (Soft link to the physical one) Internet Graphic Server which is used to provide graphic services over the web. It specifies that the JAVA engine is installed on the Machine. IDM : Identity Management SAP* DDIC SAPCP These are not counted for Licensing DVEBMGS<Instance Number> . DATA: Used for storing the lock entries. The number of CPU's and CPU speed 5. server and bootstrap process. It contains binaries that are required to start the above process. It also contains the directory Standalone Log Viewer to display the logs of the J2ee engine if its not started. It consists of the following directories 2. Note: SAPJSF user (Security Framework user) is created in ABAP Engine to communicate with JAVA Engine. Hostname and ports used along with backend ABAP Client. instance number. HP UNIX etc 3.

Standard error logs starts with std and these are used to debug the startup errors.Software Deployment Manager It is used to apply the patches for various Netweaver640 and 700 and it is discontinued in 7. XI folders. Config Tool: It provides a tool to change parameters of the instances either globally or locally. template config tool. 3.1 NETWEAVER TOOLS \usr\sap\<sid>\sys\global Sys consists of system executables (Kernel). XI. profiles. 1.194 Cluster\dispatcher\log Defaulttrace. Double click on cfgtemplategui. SDM: <sid>\DVEBMGS . Template Config Tool : It resides in global directory \usr\sap\<sid>\sys\global It is initialized by cfgtemplategui.bat (.sh in UNIX) This tool is used as a part of the post installation and used to set the system with minimal parameters that are required for an usage type. Log Directory: sol\DVEBMGS00 it specifies the MMC log/ SM21 Logs with log goto slog . Deploying: It is a tool that is used to deploy the small programs in to the JAVA engine. \work directory: consists of developer traces. 4. 5.trc is a file available in the log directory for both server and dispatcher. SAP Provides predefined templates to configure BW. EP.0. global directory. J2EE engine etc. JSPM: it is a tool to apply patches (JAVA Support Pack Manager) 6. JVM Logs (Java Virtual Machine).bat Under choose action .clear all the logs and that is equal to Syslog. Adobe services etc. Sys\exe directory : Consists of run time executables (Kernel) Sys\profile directory: consists of profiles to start and also to control the behavior of the instance Sys\global directory: consists of SLD (system landscape directory).

SDM Directory contains a document related by SDM itself (SDMKIT. SDM : Software deployment manager This is used to deploy and undeploy the support packages. SDM has its own directory which contains binaries. SDM is started as a process using the executable jlaunch.standalone 3. Select the template file and click next Used to set memory. SDM is initialized by using remotegui. date and time. In WEBAS 640/ NETWEAVER 640 JSPM is not available and in NW710 SDM is not available.bat from \usr\sap\sol\DVEBMGS\SDM\program. .195 Select apply and hit next. config. (Displays the logs in user friendly format) \usr\sap\<sid>\DVEBMSG\j2ee\admin\logviewer.sca (SAP component Archive) . .JAR) Changing the SDM Password: if SDM password is unknown we can set a new password using command line interface . SAP recommends to use JSPM from 7.jar (JAVA Archives).war (Web archives) etc..0 onwards.sdc (\sdm\prog\config) During deployment (applying the support pack) it takes backup of the repository. small developments that are coming with extension . It is started by using sdm_jstartup. There will be only one SDM in the entire system.sda (SAP Deployable archives). . Log Viewer Standalone tool: It is used to provide the log access at O/S level when the instance is not started and also used to display the logs based on search text. CPU etc Note: Should not be executed after setting up the system because it will over write the changes. log and libraries. . 2. severity etc.zip. The major advantage of SDM is to undeploy the support packages(during conflicts) but its a disadvantage when compared with system consistency because it can undeploy the dependent packs also.ear (Enterprise archives).properties in the \sdm\program\config. It is recommended to execute in the initial stages. It requires SDM Server data like hostname & SDM port 50018 During initialization it will read the repository information from sdmrepository.

. Modifications will get effect only after a restart of the J2ee engine (the parameters are static) J2ee engine startup is not required to work with config tool. 2.. file system or J2ee engine. Deploying a support pack through SDM 1.. SDM can be started in standalone or in integrated mode using command sdm jstartup sdmhome =<.> [mode = integrated/ standalone] Note: it is always recommended to logoff from the SDM instead of closing the window.information option in the home page http://<hostname>:50000 SDM startup modes are standalone/ Integrated. It is used for the following purposes a) To increase the server processes up to MAX 16 . It is initialized by using a script configtool. the window is closed but the SDM Client is still connected to the server in this case we need to restart the SDM.sh on UNIX It resides in \usr\sap\<sid>\dvebmgs00\j2ee It connects to the database to modify the parameters of the J2ee engine when the engine is offline or online.sca file and hit next 6. Default mode is integrated and standalone mode is used to change the password. Click add browse for . Download the support pack from the market place. Note: In order to change the password SDM should be running in standalone mode. click on Deployment Tab. Depending upon the nature of the patch it updates any one of the above Click on next and click on start deployment Logviewer tab provides the deployment status along with the duration of the deployment. Deploy (or) copy the patches into the shared folder so that (DEV.. SDM reads the files from the specified location not eps/in and it has its own inbox to process the deployment. PRD) are accessed (Not mandatory to EPS) directory 3.196 sdm changepassword. 5. QTY. 13-Jul-09 4. Config Tool: Used for Offline configuration. The patch status is obtained from system .bat /. login to SDM Tool 4. patch location can be a database.

d) It is used to configure the user management to LDAP engine ie. JVM contains Byte code verifier and class loader. Initially JVM checks the class files and verify the bytes in the code and then signals to load the class file to display the screens/ Logic executed. This class file will be distributed to the customers irrespective of the operating system Authenticate . This is required when memory is available to configure the additional server processes. b) it is used to configure the JVM (JAVA Virtual Machine) memory settings. JAVA VIRTUAL MACHINE It is a platform specific software provided by sun Microsystems. (ABAP/ JAVA) e) Offline configuration mode to change certain parameters eg: when all the users are locked.java) it is compiled into bank. c) It is used to store the Administrator password using option secure store. users who are created in AD (Active Directory) server. LDAP protocol is used to transfer the users from AD to the Application platform.197 cluster = disp + server process Note: if we want to have more than 16 then we have to include dialogue JAVA instance. It consists of java run time environment to interpret the JAVA programs. a) When JAVA programs are defined they used to save extension .JAVA (eg bank. The server processes are used to handle the user requests.Executing tasks These files are interpreted by using JAVA Virtual Machine. Unlock the admin users and disable SAP* (two restarts are required) f) It works only on the database as it needs to connect to the database using the OS authentication (doesn't require any userid and password) 5.login Authorized . (Platform specific JVM should be installed on the customers system) b) It is used to configure various managers and services. when SAP* is enable no other user can work on the system.class file. It is the only tool used to modify the JVM Settings. To handle the load we have to add server process. this option is used to enable SAP* user. This is the reason why JRE is required to execute JAVA Program. Visual Admin Tool: .

hostname and port p4 (50004).To identify the processes .198 This is an admin tool which is used to change the static and dynamic parameters (Except JVM) It is initialized by using go.1 only 7.1 SAP provides Shell Console Tool in the J2ee Directory and up to Netweaver 7. It is discontinued in 7. Shell Console Tool (or) Telnet tool It is used to login to the system remotely when the system is congested (Hourglass mode). It needs admin user . 14-Jul-09 6. From Command prompt telnet <Ipaddress/Hostname> telnet willsys11 50008 <port number> Provide the login details as J2EE_ADMIN and the password Prompt changes to > > lsc (list services) > man (gives the manual) In Netweaver 7. It is used to configure various services and managers. It can also used to start/stop various services and applications. Command=> 0 to Exit Command=> 30 to refresh the instance data (It is used to clear the shared memory in use) 12 .10 NW but widely used in 640/ 700. It can connect from any system using the above credentials. JCMON or JControl Monitor It is initialized by using command line executable jcmon suffix with Jcmon pf ="path of the instance profile" Eg: D:\usr\sap>jcmon pf=d:\usr\sap\<sid>\sys\profile\wis_dvebmgs_hostname It provides the menu to administer cluster. memory and restart the processes if required.sh in UNIX which resides in j2ee\admin It works only online because it needs to connect to J2ee engine. \usr\sap\<sid>\DVEBMSG\shellconsole from 7.0 telnet tool has to be executed manually from the command prompt.bat /. password.

JAVA Support Patch/ Pack Manager tool It is introduced in Netweaver 7. . It is only executed in the <SID>ADM home. It is initialized by go. It is also used to upgrade kernel where the system will be restarted as per the requirement (NW Consultant should take the backup of the kernel) Process: Download the respective software into EPS\In directory (.sar etc) and place them in EPS\In Ensure that the logged in user is <SID>ADM.199 5 . JSPM . JSPM has its own patch level similar to SPAM which is updated by JSPM. new software components & additional usage types.sca. patches from \usr\sap\trans\eps\in Similar to SPAM but it works on SDM port and password. Initialize JSPM by using go. It is also used to control the transport of objects between systems in the landscape. Specify the patches target level (Select or Skip) Note: In earlier cases before applying any packs need to apply SPAM but here JSPM.sda. . Select the type of the package to apply Eg: Single Support package JSPM reads the EPS\In directory and displays if a valid support pack is available. (The environment required for JSPM is provided by user <SID>ADM. consistency between support packages are checked and displays the source and target patch levels. SDM is not available in NW 7. .0 to replace SDM tool. manager self service.This is used to monitor the status of the instance 8.bat which is available in JSPM directory. JSPM is used to deploy business packages like employee self service. The another major advantage is the patches can be deployed arbitrarily like 1 to 5 (i.1 It reads the support packages.e missing the sequence). The main advantage of JSPM is undeployment is not possible.bat Specify the SDM Password (SDM and JSPM should not be operated simultaneously to avoid inconsistency of the system).

EHP1 . JSPM maintains its own log files if any dependencies are missing it will abort the deployment. Select the target SP level can click on next to deploy the patches. patch levels.18 EHP1 . (000. memory. Also used to start/stop various services. groups and roles. From NW7. USER Admin Tool It is used to administer the users.For user management PORTAL . clients information etc. components etc similar to ST03. software components. 9. SLD Tool (System Landscape Directory) http://<hostname>:50000/sid It is a landscape information provider service to provide the information of all the systems in the landscape along with products.for Portal engine J2ee . Standalone JAVA engine has various options lie user creation and password management in the user admin tool but whereas in the integrated engine the user management is taken over by ABAP Engine except assigning J2EE roles.EHP4 Note: Among the selected packages SAP Identifies which one be prioritized first in this case JSPM goes first. configuration and monitoring. NWA Tool (NETWEAVER Admin Tool) It is available since NW7. It is used to perform the post installation activities based on the usage types. performance.For J2ee Engine ABAP . 11. User admin is a part of NW Identity Management tool. UME .001.roles Note: ABAP roles are groups in JAVA Engine. administration. 10.10 all the visual admin tool tasks are performed by NWA Tool.0 and used for JAVA engine.200 Support Packs SOL ERP NW . process and applications. 066) . It provides reports related to users.

136. Config Tool 3. Template Config Tool. 15-Jul-09 1. SLD (System Landscape Directory) JAVA Startup Framework . Standalone log viewer 6.201 It is accessed by using the url : http://202. JSPM (JAVA Support Pack Manager) 7. User Admin 10. SDM (Software Deployment Manager) 4. PI and became a mandatory component as per ITIL/ Standards Infrastructure Library. 2. Visual Admin 5. JCMON (JControl Monitor) 8. Shell Console (Telnet) 9. NWA (Netweaver Admin Tool) 11.146:50000/sld It is effectively used in XI.65.

202 .

properties 5. \server0\apps\sap. JControl Initialization 2. Initialize bootstraps (Cluster) 3. Server Kernel. Libraries are synchronized before they get started 7. Bootstrap updates instance. JControl initialises JLaunch (SDM) 8. Libraries. JControl initialises JLaunch (Server Process) 9. Application Thread Manager . DTD: Data type definition JAVA Startup Framework 1.com Applications only sync by the server process.203 DVEBMGS\ J2ee\ cluster\ server0\cfg\kernel Applications lies here for sync. JControl Initialises Jlaunch (DISP) 6. Bootstrap reads properties from DB 4. Dispatcher Kernel.Server Starts the Application Note: Thread Manager is for System process Thread Application Manager is for the customer (Dispatcher cannot handle ATM) Kernel provides runtime which consists of Managers to work at J2ee Engine level The J2ee Engine contains the following Managers 1. Binaries are synchronized before they get started 10.

.. It needs to maintain 5 Dispatchers/ 25 server process which requires editing the config tool 30 times or simply use Global configuration and edit only 2 times i. . These are also used to perform certain post-installation activities.204 So each manager/ service has four values and the priority of execution as follows Global Default Global Custom Local default Local Custom Global configuration doesn't have any ID Eg: Have 5 dialogue instances with 5 server process each..e. one for server and the other for the dispatcher Services: These are similar to SAP Transactions to perform certain tasks on the J2EE engine.

Log configuration Service: This is similar to SM18/ SM19 to trace the user activities. logs.205 1. RFC. It is also used to set the traces for certain activities. Eg: In Log Configurator Service Tracing option is provided in VA Tool whereas in config tool it is not provided. Goto Market place : www. Enque. These are logged into categories. J2ee\cluster\dispatcher\log 2. Licensing Adapter Service: This is used to apply the license from the text file. Logs: These are by default written to the default log locations without any initiation/ Initiative. These are logged into locations. Most of the services are available both in config tool and visual admin tool. Difference between categories & locations Logs & Traces We can also switch SQL Trace similar to ST05 to identify the expensive SQL Statement. Log Viewer Service: It is used to display the logs and it is similar to standalone log viewer service. It is used to set the log locations for the applications. It is used to set (SQL. 16-Jul-09 3. Traces: These are explicitly switch on by the user to trace the user activities.com click on SAP Support Portal under FOR CUSTOMERS Provide SUSERID and pwd Click on Keys and Request Tab . Buffer ST05 Trace) the traces.sap. or using the service in config tool/ Visual admin tool.service. It can be edited by choosing the server/dispatcher. VA services are explanatory than config tool services and also VA provides additional functionality. Set the granularity of the log level (Using Min & Max) Severity is also setup based on requirement.

JCORFC Provider Services: It is similar to SM59 used to create RFC connections to the backend systems. For ABAP .SAINT & SPAM For JAVA .12. Program ID plays an important role to establish connection between the systems.9999 and the other one is maintenance certificate which is valid up to 3 months.JCoRFC Provider Provide : Program ID : JAVA_2_ABAP Gatewayhost : WILSOLMAN Gateway Service : Sapgw00 Service Count :4 .SDM & JSPM Apply the license through Market place Display license script Download to PC From Visual Admin . From Visual Admin Tool . 4. Maintenance certificate locks the SPAM and JSPM after 3 Months.0 (2004 S) System: NT/ INTEL Database: Hit Continue Note: In earlier versions we use to type the command saplicense -get From Visual Admin Tool Licensing Adapter for Hardware Key Note: It contains 2 licenses one is standard license (Permanent) which is valid till 31.206 Click on Request Permanent License Key Select the Installation Type Click on New System Provide SID as PRD System Name : Hostname System Type Product: NW Version: NW 7.Click (Install license from File) and Upload the file.

It is widely used in XI/ PI to check the specified applications are running. Note: [ANT] is a tool to archive . It is also useful to deploy the small application like (*. They will wait in the queue until they are processed (or) timeout (This is applicable for dispatcher only). From Visual Admin Dispatcher .ear) Enterprise Archive files. For single Prog ID Max 20 RFC can be generated. Client. Userid. if not manually run/ start the application. Specify Hostname. HTTP Provider Service : It is used to handle the request and keep them in socket queue.Services HTTP Provider Keep Alive time to 75 instead 15 Sec.207 Application Server System Number : 00 Client Logon Lang User : wilsolman : 001 : en : sapuser (Backend EP System) SMGW is the T-Code to verify whether the connection is established or not.ear format files .Click on Deploy The small programs which are developed in-house are moved using this service (When NWDP not in place) Netweaver Development Infrastructure. Language (Details of the backend system) 5. Specify Program ID. Gateway Host (If the gateway is installed separately) Gateway service (< Instance>) Server Count (To specify the number of server processes that can work simultaneously for this Program ID. On server side we have to set Cache Size up to 999 and file buffer size & Other parameters specified bye SAP from VA Tool. Deploy Service: It is used to start and stop the deployed applications. From VA Tool . Password. 6.

Eg: If the defined threads are completely used then Thread congestion occurs. Buffers and enqueue. 13. We need to switch on the trace explicitly for a specific module along with the user name. Pfcg which is used to create users and assign roles. It is similar to CCMS Monitor (RZ20) alert monitor. Locking Adapter Service It is similar to SM12 and is used to identify the users who are explicitly locking the resources for update. 9. 10. SLD Data Supplier Service: This service populates the JAVA Engine information into SLD for every 720 Minutes (12Hrs) in ABAP Engine RZ70 is used to populate SLD. threads. JARM (JAVA Application Response Time Management) Used to fetch the information of users. component and requests. 12. UME Provider Service: . services and performance of the system. Security Provider Service It is similar to SU01. If no threads are available the system marks the respective Manager/ Service in traffic light signals (Yellow-Green) in this case it is Red. It is also similar to SM04 to display the login Users. We can select the user and release the lock. Performance Tracing It is similar to SE30 runtime analysis of ABAP Program and ST05 system trace to trace SQL. RFC. Similar to ST03-(Work Load Analysis) 11. Monitoring Service It is used to provide monitoring for all the kernel. (Process needs to be followed) Enqueue Table (100MB size) determines the locking table size enque/table_size 8.208 7.

This is content repository This two information's are updated by SAP as per Note 669669 . Defined the user management UME .for Integrated SU01. add-ons using SDM & JSPM (Update the system to level 18) 11. Configuring JAVA System to send information to SLD (SLD Data Supplier Service) 6. LDAP. UME(Java Itself)) define user store. Applying license (Licensing Adapter Service) 2. 17. Both the systems are used to maintain the landscape information. Define System Landscape (http://<hostname>:50000/devinf) usage type DI should be selected. Configured JVM memory using config tool. Defining Admin Users 7. Configured SLD 18. Adding Server Process (Config Tool) 4. 15. Need to take complete \usr directory backup for JAVA CIM . Configuring Time out period (Http Provider) 5. Enterprise Manager in SQL Server 12.Component Information Model. Note: Form Netweaver 7. Installed Netweaver Developer studio to start the development.10 onwards VA tool is discontinued instead NWA is implemented. 9. Working with UME Provider service to restrict the parameters of userid and password 8. Configuring logs (Log Configurator) 3. 17-Jul-09 Post Installation Activities for JAVA Engine: 1. 16. Note: Solution Manager installed with usage type JAVA and SLD is configured on it. CR_Content .209 It is used to set the logon parameters similar to security parameters that starts with login in RZ10 Login\password digits Login\lang etc. Defined process documentation 14. Applying patches. Assigning security roles using security provider service. for a standalone JAVA engine (SU01. Define RFC connections from JAVA to backend systems (JCORFC) 10. Defined backup schedule using BRTools (Oracle). Installed additional dialogue instances 13.

.. Screens... DB Refresh/ System Refresh DEV QAS PRD Restoring 120GB 125GB PRD QAS 2009 (500GB) Rename PRD to QAS Repository consists of Functions.Management Studio Select the system Goto Maintenance plan Define the schedule for backup.. 19.. OS For this take the backup of PRD DB New system build Patches Install central instance Sapinst Tool Install database ..... Heterogeneous System Copy . On the SQL Server . Programs etc. Scenario: 1. JAVA System Copy 2.Backup BRTOOLS Backup Recover Restore tool DB13 calls internally BRTools..... Or Select database rt click ...... Goto DB13 or BRTOOLS to schedule backup..... System Copy of JAVA Based systems System Copy / Homogenous Copy Existing System PRD Upgrade PRD without touching the box PRD....210 Always one patch less than the Market place available patch..

211 JAVA System Copy/ DB refresh ERP CRM SCM SRM EP XI BI DI With JAVA Stack SAP Provides system copy option in the installation master DVD from Netweaver onwards. Code page conversion 2. In this case it exports the directory structure.Preparation Export Split . Insert Installation master .select source system (PRD) .Additional software tasks life cycle .Goto the target system import the database System Copy: While performing a system copy using SAP tools it will prompt whether database can be exported (use database specific methods) This option should be unchecked if we are performing the following. File System 2. 1. SDM and application specific content. 19-Jul-09 No class 20-Jul-09 . Database backup Only export the file system . In case of a system refresh select Database specific tools so that the DB can be restored from a valid backup which will minimizes the export and import. OS / DB Migration changing OS or DB Note: It is a time consuming process because the complete database content is exported into an independent format which will suite to all operating systems and databases. (D:\tmp) 18-Jul-09 Discussion class about System Copy.select export database 1.

Local Memory: The memory reserved for a work process Ztta/ roll_area Extended Memory: The memory that is exclusively measured for all the SAP WP (It is a part of shared memory) . Virtual Memory: (SWAP) The memory that is installed could not cater to the requirements of the users so a part of disk is used temporarily which is referred as virtual memory. It should atleast 20GB or 3 times the RAM (which ever is larger) Shared Memory: The memory that is shared by OS DB and R3 Processes.212 Memory Management Physical Memory: The memory that is installed on the machine and allocated to the machine by PHYS_MEMSIZE.

Memory Usage sequence: Zttaroll_first Zttaroll_ext Roll_Area ABAP/ Heap 20 KB 500MB 20MB 2 GB PVT Mode DIA . Eg: Note: Use only 50% of Extnd Memory for PVT Minimizing the work process will causes Hour Glass . ABAP/heaplimit ABAP/heap_area_dia ABAP/heap_area_nondia ABAP/heap_area_total Note: If any error encountered like Storage_parameters_wrong_set its a memory issue.213 Ztta/roll_extension per user context Em/initial_size_mb = 512MB Heap Memory: The memory that is dedicated to a process till the completion of the task or timeout.WP congestion or Hour glass Mode WP goes to pvt mode then use DPMON and kill the session.

Roll. Command soladm> memlimits Multiple instances on a single server Then for eg : 64GB 16 16 16 16 PHYS_MEMSIZE . Heap SM50 Refer : SM56/ SM66 Note: All the memory parameters need a restart as the memory is @ OS level. ST02 Over all memory Page.214 Eg: Search for Rdisp* from Rz10 Rdisp/max_priv_time Rdisp/wppriv_max_no (wont waits for default 600secs) Eg: Say for eg: 4GB 50% 2GB 2GB/ 250 = 8 Note: SM04 is used to find how much memory is consuming with Tcode.

JAVA uses heap memory to ensure that the requests are completed. configured by ztta/roll_area 5. If this memory is not sufficient then it uses the extended memory i. Each dialogue WP serves 5 . When a user request for a resource the Work Process rolls the user context for handling the task. The programs are loaded using class loader. If local memory is not sufficient the it uses the heap memory that is configured by abap/heap_area_dia which is a part of abap/heap_area_total 6. This memory should be configured by (PHYS_MEMSIZE). 2. byte codes are verified before they are interpreted. It is only configured for Active instances i. . configured by ztta/roll_extension 4.215 MEMORY ALLOCATION: 1. only local configuration is allowed.. If Extended memory is not sufficient then it uses the remaining part of the local memory i. 3.e.e. The above scenario is on process based. if the work process uses the heap memory it is said to be in private mode and its runtime cannot be controlled by Rdisp/max_wp_runtime but it is controlled by Rdisp/max_priv_time If more number of WP goes into pvt mode then memory bottle neck/ hourglass/ WP congestion occurs which can be resolved by killing the expensive work process using DPMON because logon is not possible to kill through SM50. JAVA MEMORY ALLOCATION JAVA memory is managed by JAVA Virtual machine. Dispatcher and server has their own values.e. Heap memory is configured using -XMS 1024M from config tool. In order to roll in the User Context it consumes memory that is configured by memory ztta/roll_first.10 Users. Each WP required around 75MB to 150MB (DVEBMGS) of memory.

. OLD GENERATION MEMORY: (Tenured Generation) If the content is old and can be reused then it will uses OLD/ Tenured generation. methods) then it will uses PERMANANT GENERATION MEMORY. packages. Note: Only server process requires more memory because it needs to process the user requests. If the content is not eligible to store it will be thrown into garbage (GC) Should be careful while changing the memory parameters 1. It effects only after restarting the system. It is configure by the parameter -XX: PERMSIZE -XX: MAXPERMSIZE It will be around 1/4th of the Heap memory.SU01 or USR02 table authentication in SAP system . It is calculated by using new generation memory. .the data/functions that needs access are provided with the help of Roles and Profiles.It provides userid and password . Heap memory = OLD + NEW GENERATION MEMORY For server process the new generation memory will be 1/6th of the Heap size or 1/4th of the PERM size.XX:MAXNEWSIZE It will be 1/3rd the size of heap memory Eg: for 1GB(1024) Heap 341MB PERMANANT GENERATION MEMORY: If the content that is interpreter is required permanently (JVM) (classes.User Master record in SAP system .XX:NEWSIZE .216 While interpreting the requests if a new content is fetched it uses NEW GENERATION MEMORY which is configured by parameter. 21-Jul-09 JAVA Authorization Concept .

The details are available in UME Provider Service from VA tool. .e. JAVA Engine itself. Directory server using LDAP 4. su20.217 . UDDI (Universal Directory Description Integration) How to configure user Goto Security Provider in Visual Admin Tool (go. Authorization fields & Activities Pfcg. User store can be 1. We can also use VA tool to get the configuration of the back end engine. ABAP Engine 2. ABAP + JAVA).JAVA uses (Userid and Pwd) Authentication method comes from user store. 3. The default store is UME store (User Management Engine). Universal Description Discovery and Integration is used to populate the users from the third party database (Oracle.User Management Change Mode . Siebel etc). It is an industry standard to populate the users from one database to other using web services.Click on Manage Security Store Do not modify the store unless it is recommended by SAP. users can be populated in ABAP engine using LDAP. Using ABAP SU01 (Mandatory in case of an Integrated Installation i.Authorization activities table creation of TACT & TACTZ . Note: No need to create RFC's to have the users to replicate in JAVA which has been created in ABAP (SU01) & LDAP. pfud . su22. bat) JAVA Authorization Concept ABAP using SU01 JAVA Using UME Directory Server Using LDAP UDDI provider Goto Security Provider service in Visual Admin tool .Authorization objects. su24. It is also possible to have LDAP in the back end engine i. surc. UME resides in J2ee Engine UME can get the users in the following ways 1.e.

UME can get the users from any one of the following Data source. (Lotus-Domino from IBM).Microsoft Active Directory).e.Config Tool (usr\sap\<sid>\jc01\j2ee\config tool. ABAP engine take over the complete user management i. . a) LDAP (Light Weight Directory Access protocol) b) SU01 of ABAP Engine c) UME itself d) UDDI (Universal Directory Description Integration) a) LDAP (Light Weight Directory Access protocol) It is used to populate the users from a directory server (MSADS . Goto .218 Note: In case of Integrated engine. users are created only through SU01 (The back end engine can get users from either LDAP or CUA) Note: No Client Mechanism in JAVA Engine Stand alone JAVA Engine In order to ensure the consistency of user management SAP Allows only one data store to populate the users. IPlanet.bat) Select UME LDAP data and provide the following info.

..xml) . willsys.net ... in order to access a report on the web the user should have permissions .. .save and test the connection/ Test authorization Userpath: it shows where the users are placed common name : BASIS The above information is provided by Domain administrator. Logon lang and host name....User management to create users Roles: Roles are used to provide access to data and functions..specify the active user.. Save and restart to get this effected. SAPJSF ... http://<hostname>:50000/ useradmin Click on Configuration_provider and provide the above details. userid/ pwd.219 (datasource_ldap. * SAP_BC_JSF_Communication_RO (read only) we can also cerate our own user but the above role is required to communicate with J2ee.... 389 (default for MSADS) .security provider service .xml file and specify Client..specify the server port .User Admin to create user Assign roles etc We can also use Visual Admin tool ..saperp...this user contains the role.Specify the server name . b) Users from ABAP engine Goto .specify the userpath... The same can be configured using User Admin tool..UME Provider service / User Admin tool Click on configuration Select the abap.... c) UME Engine The UME manages users by itself (Very rare) Goto . account and group path...... password to read the info from ADS . As discussed above users are only populated from the backend systems we need to assign roles in the J2ee engine to access the functionality over the web so.

R/3 Roles are groups in JAVA Engine UME Roles Security Roles R/3 Roles . Refer: TDDAT. composite profiles etc.To restrict the application . Roles are used to protect the base of the JAVA Engine NOTE: SAP_ALL (S_RFC is not accessed) ABAP roles wont play any role in JAVA authorization SOX: Segregating roles to different users. TDRG 22-Jul-09 ROLES JAVA Roles Actions Permissions Defined in programs ABAP Roles Authority check Authority Object field value Role: Is the collection of favorites.are the groups in JAVA Group of roles are controlled by authorization group.To work on JAVA Engine . SU54 Authorization Group. If any one of them are missing user cannot access the functionality. menus.220 both on the J2ee/ ABAP (back end system). A business transaction should not be assigned to a single person to avoid the fund misusage .

UME Roles 2. J2EE Security roles. a) User Administration b) Role and Administration c) Support and Administration J2EE Security Roles .Permissions are grouped into actions .221 Sarbanes-Oxley Act (SOX) 23-Jul-09 AUTHORIZATION ROLES: Roles provide the activities that can be performed by user. . ABAP roles does not have any authorization in JAVA Engine. JAVA Roles are defined as 2 types 1. UME Roles: J2ee core engine is built with Java programs. Each program that needs control is defined by permissions.Actions are assigned to the roles Note: There is no need to create UME roles unless SOX is in place.

Execute SM59 2. As the programs needs security the developer should identify and define them during development.Services . These roles need to be assigned to the users using VA tool. However other application roles will be displayed as portal roles. these roles will be moved to portal roles and can be assigned using User Admin tool. Even though full authorization is provided in JAVA engine we may not able to access the content/ functionality in the back end system unless ABAP roles are assigned to the user.Security provider service . Create an (System User) not SU01 user 5 Define LDAP Server by using connector 6. Functional information.t.r. programs or generic connection to the back end) Each Application should be defined with roles that appears as J2EE security roles. pages to display the above data.xml contains the roles and these are displayed in Visual Admin tool . SAP_BC_Roles SU. In most of the programs web. Transport) LDAP . During deployment the descriptions should specify the roles. Java roles provide screens. The traffic light should be green . Due to the discontinuation of VA Tool. Specify the connection (LDAP Connector) 4.Security roles. Alerts. CCMS) SM (Monitoring) ST (traces. These applications provide functionality to communicate with backend system (functionality means screens. Note: ABAP roles are used to protect the sensitive data like HR information.222 SAP Applications are ported on J2EE Engine.SM59 1. Sale Info etc. Material information. Connect to the LDAP server using system user 7. Define a connection of Type T 3. RZ (Profiles. Also should have authorization in the back end engine. Example: SLD: The role name is lcradministrator is now displayed as UME Role. User should authenticate to login JAVA and Authorized to access the screens. SU01) 8. Define LDAPMAP for user attributes (users that are defined in ADS needs to be mapped w. Portal roles are application roles that are used to protect business packages.

9. Schedule synchronization using RSLDAPSync_user 11. Log files such as default. Dev_Rd are not populated largely (the growth indicates the RFC issue). JAVA require only memory and CPU no need of DB Request -----> JAVA ----->Stores in the ERP ABAP System Select count(*) from DBA_TABLES where owner = 'SAPSR3DB'.trc J2ee\cluster\server0 3 Monitor the space (there should not much growth on the file system. The response time is defined as 2 to 3 seconds depending on the system resources. 2. Use LDAPLog to check the user synchronization logs. unless the log files grow abnormally. Use log viewer service to monitor the logs related to the applications.223 9.(It purely depends on the backend system database time) 10. patch application. component overview and identify the critical requests with high response time. 10. 5. The backend system may sabotage(damage) the response time of J2ee Engine so it is also required to fine tune the back end systems (running DB stats. 333 Where as for SAPSR3 29327 6. 7. Use RSLDAPTEST in SA38 to test ADS (Active Directory Server) JAVA Monitoring 1. tran/eps/in (Can be cleared) 4. The DB growth will be normal as there were no updates but keep an eye on the size of DB if custom updates are defined. Using monitoring service to monitor the user request overview. Log files in cluster directory and archive them frequently. Ensure that traces are not switched on during normal operations(they will fill the OS and the J2EE engine may not be started) 8. Monitor the work directory so that Dev_Rfc. Monitor the growth of the Archived logs. identify the missing indexes etc) .

User creation and role assignment 12. 22. XMII and BI Note: X Cross APPs . Patching the systems using SDM and JSPM 13. 26. . Displayed the SLD Logs during Import errors 25.It is a manufacturing. Configured ABAP engine using RZ70 to populate information into SLD. software components for third party vendors. Imported the latest CR Content into SLD from the Market place. 17. Deployed business packages like ESS. Defined technical systems of ABAP. Performed backup of the SLD so that it can be imported during SLD Inconsistencies 23. Upgrade the system to NW EHP1 15. JAVA and NON-SAP systems 21. Defined products. Installed standalone gateway/ and configured parameter Data supplier 18.224 11. 24. integration and Intelligence 16. Upgrade the kernel to level 185 14. 19. Worked with SLD assigned roles LCR* to configure SLD both manually and using NWA Tool. MSS. SOLMAN Administration TADM 10_2 SLD SLD is only a landscape information service based on J2EE engine. Defined XI Domain and included technical & business systems. Define the landscape and include all the systems in the landscape. Configured JAVA engine using SLD DS service to populate info in to SLD 20.

DMTF.deploy and change configuration views .225 24-Jul-09 SLD: SYSTEM LANDSCAPE DIRECTORY AND SOLUTION MANAGER SLD provides the landscape information of both SAP and NON-SAP systems. It can be assigned using Visual Admin Tool but now in User Admin Tool. In order to work with SLD we need lcradministrator role. because SLD needs a gateway which is available through ABAP engine.DMTF SLD is available using url http://<hostname>:50000/sld. NWA tool is to check the SLD. IT Infrastructure library standards.click . SLD . This is required as a part of the ITIL standards.Distributed Management task force is an initiative to provide the information of the available systems in the landscape. SLD can be initialized by using NWA tool. By default SLD is configured in the J2EE engine. SLD on a standalone J2EE engine is not available to other systems. RZ70 NWA Tool . Startup and also the availability of SLD to other systems. Eg. To work with standalone gateway to be installed on the SLD.

REGISTERING ABAP SYSTEM: We can register a system in SLD. Installing Standalone Gateway: Sapinst.Gateway . but it is recommended to use RZ70 in ABAP engine .exe .Gateway installation SLDDSUSER (for Directory Server User) SDAPIUSER (for communication) Created with master passwords SLD_UC SLD_NUC RFC's are created to establish communication with SLD.Netweaver 2004s . EP. MI. etc.All configuration tasks Post Installation activities can be done from here for PI.226 .Initial configuration or .Standalone Engine . BI.

patch levels. Under software Catalog . The system is registered in SLD REGISTERING NON-SAP SYSTEMS Systems like XI. SAVE and Activate / Execute to send the information to SLD.Click products SLD is used for the following 1. DB. It is also used to import and export the CIM information. message server etc. It provides the available and current patch level information using CIM/ CR_Content (Component Information Model and Content Repository) This information is updated by downloading from SAP Market place using note 669669. To define a third party system we need to define Product and the Software component version. Specify the details like SLD Host and Gateway 4. Remedy can be registered as a third party systems. BTC job interval (default is 720 minutes) 2. Save the settings with interval 720 Minutes. Used as LIS (Landscape Information Provider System) 3. 4. Used to register ABAP. Goto SLD Data Supplier Service 3. SAP_SLD_DATA_COLLECT SAP_SLD_DATA_STARTUP 5. . SAP Application. logon groups.227 Specify the following details 1. 2. Automatic (Recommended) RFC to SLD_UC/ SLD_NUC. number of instances. client information. Specify the SLD Bridge information SLD host and the gateway (we need to install gateway in case of J2EE engine) 4. Seibel. It provides the details of each managed systems like OS. It uses SLD_UC RFC connection (Type TCP/IP 'T') REGISTERING JAVA ENGINE 1. JAVA and NON-SAP Systems. Run Visual admin tool 2. 5. Specify the RFC (Use explicit if there is an RFC customized to communicate with SLD. 3.

TYPES OF SLD 1. P&G. Used to define business systems (Business systems are associated systems that are used in XI Domain) (Technical system is a system which is pointed to Hostname.31 contains 382 Products and 2189 Software components. It is used to define the system landscape and system domain. 25-Jul-09 SLD. BI needs to be registered as Technical systems in SLD. Coke has their global presence through out the world which maintains multiple landscapes across the world. So it is recommended to have individual SLD for each landscape and communicate each other using data suppliers. DISTRIBUTED SLD Companies like HP. 8. Downloads Tab > SAP Distribution Center >Downloads >Support Patches and Contents . GE. This is used in small mid sized companies where only one landscape is maintained.4. CIMSAP.228 6. RFC and the Gateway) But business system is a technical system pointing to a business client. Note: 1. All the systems to configure as backend for EP. SINGLE SLD There will be only one SLD in the landscape which provides the complete information of systems in the landscape.zip contains their own versions Goto SLD Administration and click on details to display the versions. It is possible to have more business systems from a single technical system. XI. CR_CONTENT. 7. It will be difficult to fetch the information of all the systems using single SLD. 2.zip.

All the production systems in the landscape uses a different SLD called as ISLAND SLD.229 >My Company Application Component CIMSAP_CR > Import the file to this folder. ISLAND SLD Companies may require Data security. To display the SLD. SLD Log 1. SLD can be started and stopped using the option Administration. CIM and CR Content Profile It is used to set various parameters that are required by the SLD (Do not change the parameters during import. QAS and PRD. It will not effect the operation of J2EE Engine. export and backup) . Used to display the logs of a SLD runtime 3. Production systems and they doesn't want the SLD to be shared between DEV. It provides the log settings and filter 2. CR_CONTENT. CIMSAP. It is used for comparison with market place products. Export and Import logs 4.ZIP provides the product and software components versions that are released by SAP. 3.ZIP.

Change Logs: Used to display the logs of content change based on user name. But we can also import the content that is exported earlier from the same SLD.230 Eg: In a standalone J2ee installed reset the Data supplier parameter. Content Maintenance: Used to define the role of systems in the landscape Eg: XI-Domain. Adapter Engine. Backup (Copy of SLD Content) Export: It is similar to backup but versions are maintained between exports along with time stamp. . Also used to define associated systems in the XI-Domain. Data Supplier: We can configure other SLD's in case if we are defining distributed SLD. It provides the product and software component information along with systems that are configured on the SLD. gateway service. Note: ABAP should know which gateway it should be used. class name and the time interval. Class Browser: It displays the class information of the CIM Model. Default trace should be false. Gateway host. Import: Basically this is used to import the content that is delivered by SAP. Integration Repository. System Message: SM069 SM02 Content: Import export backup. TREX server. Name Space: Used to define the namespace for developing the objects by default SLD/Active is provided. Backup: It is used to take the backup of SLD content. It contains only time stamp to differentiate between backups.

21% + Country Taxes. SAP upgrade may involves O/S and database upgrade which drastically improves performance on the new hardware. To get the enhanced features that are provided in the current release. R/3 patch levels for homogenous.2 Years The license is valid till 31. upgrade. From JAN 2009 maintenance certificate will be issued for every 3 months. After 3 months it locks the SPAM. . Different OS. The upgrade only upgrades data dictionary and repository objects. 19% and 7 Year and 8th Year with additional 2% i.50 Lakhs 150 Users .. The additional fees are based on total cost + additional users 4. Different DB but same R/3 version with patch levels. notes. Eg: R/3 4.6C maintenance is expires on Dec 2005 Each SAP Product is supported based 5-1-2 i. developer keys etc. All of the above can be obtained by using suserid of the other company Maintenance optimizer is introduced to approve the patches related to our landscape. The product is out of maintenance and support. Upgrade never impacts on the DB Size. The same OS.7 Enterprise edition normal maintenance ends in 2009 100 Users .231 26-Jul-09 UPGRADE MOTIVATION 1. then the version is 4. patches.e.Heterogeneous.0 vice versa because the complete DD and Repository is different. If the DB Schema ID/ Owner is SAPR3. runtime support.12. DB.e.9999 SAP Supports support packages.. 5 Years with normal maintenance fee i.6C and below. The Hardware doesn't support the current load and users encounter-frequent bottle necks on memory CPU and storage.e. stacks. 17% 6 Year with additional 2% i.50 Lakhs + 10 Lakhs ----------.e.7EE on ECC5. It is not possible to refresh database of 4. license key.

SPDD and SPAU correction needs to be handled. The upgrade timelines should be calculated on the mock system with production data.0 SR3 19. Do not skip any phase in prepare/ modify the logs manually. Perform Hardware sizing with expected growth of database for next 3 years. DB should not be done at a time) Eg: WinNT Oracle 8i 4.0 If the DB Schema ID/ Owner is SAPSR3 then it is an ABAP system on NW7. 16. Download upgrade notes and known problems 8. Upgrade key from solution manager and upgrade key from master note are required. 4.7EE . 14. Decision on Languages 12.ECC5.0. 15. Decision on Add-ons 11.0 If the DB Schema ID/ Owner is SAPSR3SHD then it is a shadow instance on NW7. 9. Upgrade should be performed in the sequence of landscape. Upgrade may involve OS. UPGRADE PLAN 1. DB upgrades as well plan them accordingly/ separately (OS . Read the checks. 5. Download upgrade master/ upgrade technical guide 2. Download the software from Market place/ SWDC 6. Unicode consumes atleast 40% more than the current system resources. Verify the compatibility of OS/DB/SMP/PAM (Product Availability Matrix) 3. SAPCAR.232 If the DB Schema ID/ Owner is SAP<SID> it is 4.0 SAPSR4 .6c OS upgrade from NT to 2003/2008 Oracle 8i to 9. Download relevant JRE 7.4 R/3 4. Upgrade SAPUP. 17. Decision on support packages 10.0 If the DB Schema ID/ Owner is SAPSR3DB then it is JAVA sys on NW7. TP if required. R/3.6c to ECC6. 13. Define the best strategy for upgrade (Downtime/ Resource) minimised 18.2. 27-Jul-09 .log for the prepare errors.another instance. Run the prepare well in advance. R3TRANS.2 to 10.

22.. 21. VIRSA.server mode..log Mount the upgrade master and execute prepare. CONTROL IN etc.jar NOTE: There is no upgrade to ECC6. Development and Technical teams need to certify the upgrade before going live. So upgrade server needs to be started to run the upgrade assistant. On UNIX we may need to create /usr/sap/put with SIDADM as the owner with atleast 10GB of space.233 20.6c MySAP (CRM.. A user created in component can access other components with same license key.) All the components are priced based on business suite. MAESTRO.0 from below versions 4. SR1 ->SR2 ->SR3 ->EHP1 ->EHP2 ->EHP3 Say for Eg: if a product costs 60 Lakhs 50% discount will be given by the SAP 30 Lakhs but the maintenance cost is calculated on the whole (60L) PREPARE Can run during production operations. Running Prepare Prepare need to be executed and ensure that all the prepare phases are run successfully....) Accelerated Components (XI. SCM.. Upgrade runs on client . REDWOOD. It is used to run before upgrade . Use the following commands to start the server and GUI JAVA -cp<upgrade directory> \ua\ua. VERTEX.PI. Use that list to document the phases and to update the status to management and SAP... Prepare and upgrade phase list are provided with expected percentage of time.bat to create a directory and extract executables.. Background Schedulers like TIDAL. BI.. Document all the interfaces and 3rd party tools like IFS. Prepare prepares the system for upgrade by checking all the pre-requisites and documents in checks. SRM.

Mount point of CD's (Upgrade master. INITIALISATION PHASE Specify the parameter dir_put (put = \usr\sap\put) put directory is the upgrade directory which hosts exe. Instance number. SAP<SID>.234 I. Checks the connectivity with the DB. checks RFC connection using DDIC pwd and the client. DB upgrade. . Eg: If profiles (Startup. INPUT PHASE It checks all the pre-requisites and writes into checks. languages. During initialization it checks for OS. Profile paths \usr\sap\<sid>\sys\profile. kernel. In the INPUT phase provide the following 1. \put directory is an upgrade directory.0 II. checks for enough space in the put directory for import. It checks for the following OS Versions. All the above phases can run individually or can run as a total.log OS. readability of profiles etc. Instance) are corrupted or not readable the PREPARE fails. DB Versions. Default. upgrade languages. Patches. Disk space. Additional Hardware. Host name.6c to ECC6. File system. batch host (The instance that provides the background process). log etc. DB versions. kernel. upgrade exports) From 4.

move name tabs and performs main import. Support Package. create DB_user for shadow instance. add on conflicts. profiles (\usr\sap\put).Checks the space in the upgrade directory . ORA-1632) .Free database size and recommends the tablespaces that needs to be extended. kernel directory.There should not be any unreleased transport requests SPAD/ SPAU During the upgrade it only changes the SAP standard data structure like tables. During the prepare phase we need to download the upgrade fix FIX.SAR 28-Jul-09 PREPARE also checks the following . Stack etc. INSTALLATION Provide the following details for upgrade shadow system.Free extents in the tablespaces which needs to increase (ORA-1631. programs. It performs a test import (DDIC Import) activation. It checks for unreleased transports. screens. It also checks for incomplete imports. language compatibility and database issues like table space over flow (ORA-1631 & 32). Patch. IMPORT PHASE It performs extraction of release dependent data and the support package imports. Instance number of shadow system.Checks the Archive directory (ORA-272. distribution. port number. Customer might have changed the above objects by obtaining SSCR keys (SAP Software Change Registration) or they are upgraded by Note. .235 III. Add-ons in IS_SELECT phase and languages LANG_SELECT. Include support packages in the BIND_PATCH phase.The should not be any terminated/ Pending updates . 1. conversion. . Note: \usr\sap\put\log specifies the log files during the upgrade. function modules etc. ORA-255) . (ORA-1653 & 54) Archieve Issues Ensure that all the prepare modules ran successfully to proceed for the upgrade.12500) . IV. menus.Checks the connectivity to the database (ORA .

236 During the upgrade it prompts SPDD/ SPAU SPDD: for the data dictionary elements (like table. Screens.log . Programs RICEF) that is code which is written in ABAP is changed.sap. 3. The SPAD & SPAU changes can be recorded in development system to change requests.7C TO ECC6 SICK SE06 RZ10 System name : Can be find from RZ10 Stms Slicense (HW Key) E:\usr\sap\put\us> java -cp ua. domain and the dataelement).stores the installation time taken. SAINT TABLE E070 UPGRADATION FROM 4. EMPID 25(INT) is changed into EMPID 50(INT) SPAU: for repository objects like (Reports. 2. SPAM. TIPS 1. From service.com > My Profile > Single sign on for SAP Certificate 4. which can be included in the upgrade of other systems in the landscape. Eg: Employee ID is 25 . SDM.jar UaServer to bring up the Upgrade (Assistant) Wizard From Menu Start > PREPARE . TABLE E070 .jar UaServer us> java -cp uagui. SAPINST.stores all the change requests.

Kernel . R3TRANS should be capable of communicate with DB Libraries and update database.237 Provide the following or follow the on screen for inputs Host : willsysdell User name : administrator Mount Points .\upgrade\sap upgrade1\UPG1 . DB Exports are OS/ DB independent. . Add-ons. Downtime minimised provides high availability to the system which is going to upgrade.Provide SAP Components . After 14 days we need to obtain SCCR Keys Upgrade Process: We need to choose the strategy either downtime minimised or resource minimised.Lang1 .upgrademaster\UMN Windows . CRT. ACCTIT Large size tables COEP 29-Jul-09 [TP . Notes.sar Usr\sap\trans\eps\in The standard objects should be corrected within 14days after an upgrade.R3 Trans] ------Communicates with DB Depends on OS TP Connects to the database using R3TRANS. In order to apply them to a specific database and O/S TP.to Lang6 . R3Trans is capable of converting the DB specific data into OS independent/ DB independent cofiles/ datafiles That is why support packages.to UPG16 (TO car the sar files) (Support Packs) Sapcar -xvf *.

238 TP. RDDIMPDP.I/E *.Index View.tsk *. RDDNEWPP jobs should be scheduled in client 000 using user DDIC (DDIC should not be locked) RDD* Jobs are scheduled in the background which reads content from TRBAT and TRJOB and import into DB R3load .str These all will be in the Task File STR files are provided by SAP (We can create STR Files during the exports) 1.pfl TP initializes R3TRANS and writes all the jobs in TRBAT and TRJOB.pfl To read parameters from tp_domain_<SID>. Structure .Data P .Primary Key I .bak T .toc *. Note: No business data @ OS level or file system.data *.ctf (Create Task File) R3load . > tp connect DEV pf=E:\usr\sap\trans\bin\to_domain_dev.tpl *.cmd *.Table D . R3TRANS should be compatible with DB specific libraries to connect to DB for import. *.log *.tsk.

Splitter 3. DEVELOPMENT INFRASTRUCTURE DI JDI is used to provide development of JAVA programs DI is an usage type which provides JAVA transport Management system (Change Management System) to move the developed objects in the landscape. DB Export with DB specific method 4..239 2. DB export method Use option 4 only heterogeneous environment/ Unicode conversion Export the structure Import the structure Perform table splitting The above two options are used to handle large databases to perform parallel export and import.. However DB export will be performed by option 3 only. DB Export . Programs/ Reports SE38 Domain Data element Tables Function Module Screens Menus SE11 SE37 SE51 SE41 . Experienced OS/ DB Consultants can trigger all the above at OS level using R/3 load.

Change request of type Work Bench 2. ABAP uses client mechanism to differentiate customizing . ABAP requires both compiler and Interpreter (F3 & F8) Save. TFDIR. No specific format for ABAP Programs. 3. Data Inconsistency (In BI. ABAP uses TP. R3Trans to move the objects from DB to OS specific and vice versa. 8. Data files. ABAP requires SE38 transaction to perform development. ABAP development resides in the Database. Refer Table TADIR.Table entries 30-Jul-09 1. 6. ABAP Objects are consistent because the objects are locked by a developer while modifying the code while others can only display. ABAP Development is Central where as JAVA Development is Local. 4. TRDIR. ABAP development consists of the same program with different versions from developers. 2.240 Forms Transaction SE71 (Medruck) SE91 Note: Transaction is a logical entity (internally contains Programs/ Reports) [Prog/ Report] in pfcg role Cofiles. Customizing . Activate and Execute. PI there is a locking system) 7. 5. DD02L. Transport Requests will be in our scope 1.

javac and java to save.net.* Import java. 2. JAVA can be programmed using any of the editor at file system. compile and execute program 4.*. 9. *. JAVA uses the entire system to differentiate customizing because JAVA does not have client customization. 3. JAVA Programs are executable provided we have JRE 8.JAVA DEVELOPMENT INFRASTRUCTURE. JAVA is Case Sensitive but ABAP is not case sensitive. It is an usage type provided by SAP to develop programs in-house for meeting the specific requirement.Change management system 6. JAVA 1. JAVA objects are defined based on product/ SWCV version (Software Component Version) that are defined in SLD. JAVA uses tracks to transport the objects.awt.* Public static void Main() JDI . JAVA requires JRE. 10. Eg JAVA program import java. ABAP objects are defined in the custom name space 'Y' and 'Z'. ABAP uses transport routes/ transport layers to transport the object. JAVA uses SDM to move the object to the landscape 5. ABAP are not executable outside the SAP environment. 10. ABAP uses transport routes/ Transport layers to transport the objects. JAVA uses CMS and four system landscape (At least 3 system landscape) CMS . JAVA development resides at file system. INSTALLATION . 7. 1.241 9.

http://<hostname>:50000/nwa form tab Deploy and change option select scenario as DI from the Drop down. It enables effective team work among developers distributed over different locations. NWDI_CMSADM NWDI_DEV NWDI_ADM These users are created during post installation to work on DI. Consider the diagram . users require certain roles to work on CMS. Select NWA to perform post installation activities. Version histories and concurrent work on resources.242 Select the usage type DI during the installation POST INSTALLATION. NWDI Administrator JDI Administrator NWDI Developer JDI Developer Use url http://<hostname>:50000/devinf devinf : displays design time repository DTR The DTR provides central file and folder based on storage of source code. Provide the passwords for the following system. Execute.

(usr\sap\trans : usr\sap\jtrans) Configure Check in > NEW Click on Landscape configuration to configure the JAVA system Landscape. Click on DOMAIN DATA and specify the following - .243 Each Individual system is a DEV System but development is not done in the DEV system. If any changes required it will be sent back to individual systems which is considered as Development. NWDS (Netweaver Developer Studio) In order to work with DI we need to be NWDI Administrator http://<hostname>:50000/devinf Click on Change Management service Configure check in so that the objects are checked in using the default directory.

Note:/ Mechanism: The Transport Mechanism performed by using SDM. PROD. In ABAP engine the objects are assigned to development class and development class is . (Generally domain will be development). Test and Production That needs to be configured as a system in the landscape Provide the details of each system as follows Specify SDM HOSTNAME SDM PORT NUM SDM PASSWORD J2EE Engine URL J2EE Engine User ********** http://willsys28:50000 DEV DEV DEB DEV DEMO http://willsys28:50000 NWDI_CMSADM ********* d:/usr/sap/trans/eps/incmswillsys28DEV : J2ee_Admin Select 4 systems in the landscape DEV.244 CMS Name CMS Desc CMS Url CMS User PWD Transport DIR Now under Domain Domain ID Domain Name Domain Desc Ext Servers SLD Url Save the domain. SAVE and Click on SAVE & RESTORE TRACK Track is used to define the path to move the objects. Track is mandatory to move the objects. TEST. Developer uses developer studio to develop the programs upon successful completion they will check in the objects into \usr\sap\trans of domain. HOST. CONS. The objects are checked into DEV system using the credentials that are provided in runtime systems. PORT NUMBER 50018 & PWD. Click on the Tab Runtime Systems Check the following options : Development. Consolidation.

Include SWCV defined in SLD Defining a Track From CMS Click on the Tab TRACK DATA Click on NEW Provide .Design time repository Design time repository is used to maintain the versions. Define software CV/ Product 2.Repository type DTR .Track Desc DEMO Design time Rep URL : http://willsys28:50000/dtr Comp build server URL: http://<hostname>:50000 SAVE DTR . In JAVA TRACK is equal to DEV CLASS and LAYER 1.Track ID DEMO .Track Name DEMO . Goto CMS define TRACK 3.245 assigned to a transport layer and layer is assigned to a transport group and subsequently assign the route to a system to define the landscape. : .

Transport of Packages (Export/ Import) PI/XI .is deployed on portal so it uses transport of the packages. BI has their own transport package. SAP from 2007 onwards implemented Unicode i. 31-Jul-09 SINGLE CODE PAGE Each database supports various languages depending upon the code page i. selected.Export Objects and Import Objects BI-JAVA . Define Product and software component version in SLD 2. all the products will be released on Unicode only. It is not possible to access the system in Chinese. XI. If the customer is not satisfied with the Single code page then we need to install additional code pages i. software components and programs specific to industry requirements. Define the Domain 3. SAP components are installed on code page 1100 which supports English.STMS EP . There are around 3000 MDMP logon/ system_lang = EN . BI . MDMP . 1.Component build service used to build the components Note: This DI Configuration is only required when there is a need to develop the products. MDMP has various issues during upgrade and migration. Eg. Include the run time systems 5. As a new consultant we need to perform the following.e. Define the tracks 4. German & Other languages.e. Deploy service is provided in Visual Admin Tool to import the small objects. Japanese and Korean etc using the same code page. transport mechanism to transport the objects. blended code page.Multi display multiple processing. Define users and assign roles so that users can work on CMS Installation of NW Studio on developer PC's Note: Even though DI is introduced for transporting the objects EP.e.246 CBS . Move the objects between systems either manually or using DI 6.

SAP Note: 648016 Conversion to Unicode. AIX. Note: Without executing SPUMG Unicode conversion is not possible. Pooled and Cluster Tables) depending upon the size of the database.Multiple language with different code page. . Specify the parallel process at least to increase speed depending upon the available resources.247 Unicode supports all the languages because if it is installed on double byte code depending upon the language. Little Endian is used by Windows NT. It runs for hours 1. Install the system with option target system using Unicode kernel. * NUC to UC happens only during the Exports. Execute the transaction SPUMG and schedule the consistency check for all the tables (Transparent. Pre-Requisites for Unicode From market place/Unicode (Unicode Media library) SPUMG: It checks for all the tables that needs to be converted to Unicode. Executes the background jobs from the Unicode conversion 2. Unicode to Non-Unicode is not possible Blended code page . LINUX Big Endian is used by HPUNIX. Unicode is installed on code page 4101 or 4102 which depends on Endian [Little Or Big]. 3. Big Endian stores the most significant byte in the smallest address. It may take hours. Export the database using Non-Unicode kernel. SUN SOLARIS and ISERIES. While exporting select Unicode(Little Endian or Big Endian) 4. Zcsa/ system_language Abap/buffersize Unicode consumes 40% resources than a Non-Unicode system. 5.

Single point of access to all the applications. Web server GUI.to make effective use of JRE. WebTop i. People centric. Siebel. Lock of Interface and Integration. Less Productivity. 4. 5. SAP GUI. Too many GUI's (Outlook Client. 2. Customer needs multiple GUI to communicate with each of them. language specific. role based single point of access. 2. in the specific language to all the applications. browser used to communicate without any GUI Installation.248 01-Aug-09 Current Environment Problem 1. IE etc. single point of access to all the applications. How to resolve? 1. 3. SAP Introduced Enterprise Portal to overcome the above issues. File Browser. Mailbox. Domino Server. web based. Portal is meant for . SCM. SRM. Single interface with back end connectivity. Oracle Apps. Too many passwords to remember. SRM etc. Customer needs the people centric. single point of access to applications. Customer (SONY) should provide the feasibility to work from home for developers. Exchange Server. role based. File Server. Customers having applications like Microsoft. Too many applications like ERP. Web browser 2. It provides an interface to communicate with all the applications . Web Server. technical consultants. Single sign on to communicate with all the applications. CRM. It provides the following. Motivation of Portal Portal provides a role based. 4. user based.e. SAP ERP. 1. functional consultants and end users.) 3. XI.

12. 17. 9. fonts and colors etc. quick poll. Transportation etc. banners. 14. 15. screens and desktops can be customized. Single sign on is configured to communicate with all applications. No GUI is required (Browser serves the purpose) 5. 13. news. SSO provides only authentication (Single Sign on) 6. announcements' etc. managers. SAP provides development environment using visual composer which is a web based tool. 11. EP provides Interactive environment where logos. suppliers. favorites etc. over the web. SAP provides administration environment for Monitoring.249 3. EP provides rooms. user forums. others customers communicate over the web. ABAP engine user can use EP without any license. User management. It resides on the proven JAVA Engine there by using all the features of JAVA. FAQ's. However authorizations needs to be maintained in the back end systems. It provides self registration features for the guests. vendors. SAP provides predefined content in the name of business packages which can be deployed by using JSPM. Administration. EP provides content management which is the part of Knowledge Management to access the documents from various repositories. chatting engine. Its License cost is around 1/5th of the ABAP license cost and cost depends upon negotiation. 10. 4. It provides personalization to select our own themes. EP Provides collaborative environment where employees. history of navigation. It provides 20 Languages by default. 8. 16. 7. It provides user friendly navigational features. .

Logging in . Low users Users are segregated based on the answer time between pages.250 INSTALLATION Similar to JAVA Engine we need BI functionality is required over web then Include BI-JAVA usage type. Users are categorized into 3 types 1. 120 PO's per day . High users 4800 to 144000 Dialogue steps / 40 hrs 480 dialogue steps = 40 * 60 * 60 seconds Each DS = 40*60*60/ 480 = 300 seconds Assuming each PO high volume consumes 12 dialogue steps. HARDWARE SIZING Sizing is an activity that is calculated over web using sizing tool provided by SAP. But in general PO is created with 8 DS 96/8 = 12 PO's per day. Medium users 480-4800 Dialogue steps/ 40 Hrs 3.One dialogue step 2. Medium Users 3. User creates 8 POs per day. ABAP Users 1. Medium Users Each DS = 40 *60*60/4800 = 30 Seconds I. Low users 0-480 dialogue steps/ 40 hrs 2. Issuing SU01 Tcode .e.One dialogue step 3. It is used to calculate the hardware resources that are required by the selected application based on number of users. Dialogue steps 1. High Users (concurrent users) 2. Selecting field .One dialogue step *ST03 Work load analysis We can find number of dialogue steps 2.

Specify the component (Usage type BI. XI) 6. Hard ware details like CPU. Network Connectivity. 5. Name the project 3. User SAP Proprietary tool (QUICK sizer) 02-Aug-09 SIZING Tools 1. CPU systems of SAP (SAP APP) benchmark for performing standard It is calculated based on SD Module i. Save and calculate the result Results provide the following 1. Celeron and ) each processor has their own unit. 800 SAP's are generated by I Series CPU (IBM) similarly DELL. Storage Capacity 1000 GB 3. for every 2000 sales document that are created 100SAPS/ Hr Sales order contains more dialogue steps. maid. Vendors to calculate the number of CPU's required. Low Users Medium Users High Users Consumes 600 Seconds Consumes around 180 Seconds Consumes 30 Seconds. Specify the customer number 2. Band width etc. high 7. RAID. SAP S is an understandable unit of hardware. CLUSTER. Memory and Storage 2. Platform/ Hardware details like OS DB. Backup mirroring. SAP's is an unit to measure CPU. CPU could not arrive as a direct measurable unit like memory and Hard Disk which is independent of the Hardware vendor. Cytrix. medium. High Users Each DS = 40 * 60*60/ 14400 = 10 Seconds 360 PO's per day JAVA SIZING As it is web based the time taken to flip between pages is considered. SUN has their own measurements for CPU calculation. STANDBY Server. Memory . Country Name 4. Vendor (Pentium.32000 MB 4. Specify the users low. Cust info like contact no.e. EP. CPUS specific to Hardware. HP. .251 3.

Example. Storage size should be net storage/ not gross storage. 2. DUMPS and other software (One disk each) d) RAID one disk for parity (Hot swappable drive) 160 * 6 = 960 * 90/100 = 850 GB (NET STORAGE) . A company buys 10 HDD of 160GB Total 10 * 160 = 1600 (consider only 1400) Remaining will be for format etc. you need to 1. DB and other applications utilization. Calculate the OS.252 Ordering the Hardware Do not order the sizing output directly. a) Space is reserved for firmware (10% of the disk) b) OS mirroring and Log Mirroring (One disk each) c) SWAP. Database growth for the next three years 3.

8. There is no single role which provide access to the entire content.253 Note: Consider the number of interfaces on the system (Job Scheduler. webdynpro connections which needs to be configured. . If the component is SAP-APPL then its an ERP Component BPP-CRM CRM Component BICONT BI Component ABAP. CRM. The deployed business packages contains roles. Most of the EP content is available through roles 5. It does not have any specific steps in NWA like BI. Note: The purpose of JAVA standalone . CPU and memory are major bottle necks on the portal. EP by default cannot contain any business transactions. Mail Server. EP is an application that resides in JAVA Engine. UME provides portal roles to access the EP content. The collaboration and KM features are available which needs activation/ enablement for access. SMS. MI and SLD. 6. SAP_BW. 4. Paging. BIW. 2. PI. XI. 3. Knowledge Management and Collaboration. Front end customization can be performed based on requirement. SRM and SCM) (Memory required at CPU Level) In Principle add 30-40% more the net calculation while calculating sizing for portal 1. BI_BASIS We can view these from System > Status POST INSTALLATION ACTIVITIES 1. BASIS.It is a platform and we need to have an application installed on it. EP consists of portal. KM repository & CM repository (Stores in the Portal) 3. The business packages need to be deployed to communicate with backend systems. Calculate the number of interfaces 2. 7.

Header Area 2. RTC Real time Collaboration. EPCore.) http://<hostname>:50000/irj (integrated run time java) PORTAL DESKTOP/ HOME PAGE SAP provides default desktop for the portal which can be customized. NWA Tool for monitoring. JSPM. Memory Usage Memory concept is as same as JAVA stack. EP. Visual composer for development etc. Telnet tool. SDM. Portal Security Portal roles are available to access the portal content. Navigational Elements 1. Collaboration. VA tool. Header Area a) Mast Head . Visual Composer.254 9. KM.) Portal User Management JAVA UME is used for user management. Portal is accessed by using URL http://<hostname>:50000/irj 03-Aug-09 Starting and stopping EP As portal is installed on JAVA Engine. The portal desktop elements are the following 1. Content Management. the same process is applicable startsap stopsap Portal logs (Config tool. Portal utilizes the J2EE engine runtime along with deployed portal applications (BI. Content Area 3.

SAP best practices provides 3 Three themes 1. LOGO. search and advanced search collaboration need to be enabled. Eg: Home ----. SAP also provides theme editor to create and edit the themes. SAP provides various themes to customize the desktops. Navigational Elements It is used to provide various navigational elements. salutation can be customized. RED 2. home. Third strip contains the header and fourth strip contains detailed actions under that role. Content Area It is used to display the content and it will be around 2/3 of the page. logoff.255 It is the first strip on the page. PORTAL DESKTOP It is default desktop that is provided by SAP. c) Top level navigation The third and fourth strip on the page TLN is a role based and tab strips are displayed based on assigned roles. BROWN 3. history of pages navigated and flexibility to move forward and back. It contains collaboration.Third strip contains company. 2. Save favorites detailed navigation. It provides an option to save the screen as favorite. We can change banner and logo. They resides on the LHS to the page. d) Page title bar The fifth strip on the page and it contains page title. personalize and SAP logo. work. team documents and portal information on the fourth strip. BLUE . 3. b) Tool Area It is the second strip on the page. It contains salutation. Personalization is only available when EU_ROLE is assigned. banner.

export and edit themes Goto Themes import > specify the path and import the theme into the portal.. Goto Theme Editor and select a theme . Customization 3. MSS and XMII configuration (Manufacturing Integration and Intelligence) Defining roles and User assignment Enabling various functionality of portal like (Personalization. branching and Images etc. Development . PORTAL ACTIVITIES 1. Developing pages internally for training. Dealer management.Knowledge management from various repositories. personal.Developing the pages for E-Filing Tax returns. MSS and XMII Customize portal.256 Goto System Administration > Portal display > Theme Editor Theme editor provides options to create. -----TASKS . logos. ABAP engine) Installation and Post Installation Activities/ -----Install Portal Apply patches. 18 patch Deploy ESS. collaboration.. Update etc. login screen..Screen desktop. . Change the theme according to the requirement. banners. RTC. Public.. import.Single sign on Deploying business packages Patches Establishing connectivity to backend systems. Content Manager . 2.. content management etc) Working with user management (LDAP. save it as a new theme and customize accordingly. ESS. common folders and Taxonomy (displaying in a structure) 4... Administration ..

Netweaver 04 Installation (based on 640) 1. one Master data for all the systems Note: Web dispatcher identifies the least loaded ICM when going for BSP .0.0.0) All these components need to be maintained customer.0. SRM7. JAVA Engine 2. Collaboration. supplier. SAP provides MDM where the synchronization starts from MDM to all the systems i.0 (SCM7.257 List down the JAVA Activities List down the SOLMAN Activities What is the purpose of DI? Explain the process of upgrade (326) include prepare Explain HW sizing Explain the functionality of Market place with respect to customer environment.e. Motivation for portal. ECC6. TEP10_2) MDM: SAP introduced MySAPBusiness suite 7. KM 3. 04-Aug-09 SAP Netweaver certification books (TEP10_1. CRM7. vendor. SR3 EHP4. material master records in various systems and synchronization is becoming difficult.

Rough ---------Refer ST07 UME .User Management Engine Note: If SAP * is enabled we cannot login with the other users.258 Note: Central Services Instance Central Instance Dialogue Instance --------. User Groups Roles Tcode: SUGR Authorization > transfer > change Authorization of Group check S_USR_GRP --------------------------------05-Aug-09 .

e. Due to the performance issue on the web the personalization is restricted to change the password and contact info only. when a user partially entered data in the screen while navigating away from that screen it should prompt whether to save changes or open up a new window or discard the changes or save the data. themes and manage personal data. Fonts. TCODE: SU2. SU3 authorizations required for that user. On a standalone JAVA change password is also provided.259 ENTERPRISE PORTAL PERSONALIZATION It is used to setup the portal desktop along with specified language. Under "Personalization Tab" Portal Theme: It is used to change your portal desktop.objects Select tool area > open + Enable collaboration launch pad (CLP) Set YES . contact info.open . Eg: Users uses standard HR user to get the HR related information from the back end. User Mapping: (Remote Iviews) While accessing the data remote systems specify the userid authorized in the backend systems. Work Protect Mode: This option is used to set the work protect mode i. User Profile: It is used to change the general information like email-id. Enabling Collaboration Option Http://<hostname>:50000/irj Click on content administration> Portal Content > Portal users > Standard Portal Users > Open default Frame work page Check . Add the role to the end user group and assign the group to every user. Every user needs EU_ROLE (Standard End user role) which can be customized according to the requirements.Tool Area . address and organizational elements.

Unlock the object System Administration.SAP with dedicated application server/ load balancing when more than one instance is available. assign the tasks.Specify the system name: ERP . 3.i. Login to the Portal 2. create tasks.net) .260 Enable RTC Real Time Collaboration Set YES SAVE. monitor the tasks etc. logon load balancing is configured in SMLG/ RFC server groups configured in RZ12. It is also used to move the objects based on the folder name. Select the folder > Rt click> and select create "New system from template (new system from portal achieve) par file.System ID Prefix EWD (System should have atleast two dots like com. Select SAP with dedicated application --> Next . Instant messages.willsys. Select the template . Home > Documents Collaboration is used to provide various options to communicate with employees. 4.saperp. . 5.com or EWD. Click on the Tab System Administration . sending email.System Configuration .System ID: EWD .System Landscape .e. 06-Aug-09 DEFINING SYSTEM Each back end system needs to be defined as a system in the Portal.Portal content > Rt Click > Create new folder to identify our objects (Your custom portal content). System Definition 1.

SAP_R3 2. User] [Save] Display System Alias Add Alias name: BAS Save . Aliases is a pointer to the backend system. Select the language .Open the object for describing the backend details and specify application host [Willerpdev] gateway host [ ] gateway services [ ] sapgw00 SAP Client Client 800 Port 3200 System type SAP_R3 Save. The real system will be customer system. When the content is defined like ESS and MSS they will use alias name which intern points to the real system. SAP_CRM Note: Supply chain management (SCM).Click on next .Close System aliases is a name that will be used while defining the portal content objects. .Finish SAVE . SAP_BW 3. THERE ARE 3 SYSTEM TYPES 1. The alias name will be unique through out the landscape.EN . SRM can be considered as R3 systems Now > GOTO property type : [ User Management] Select type : [SAP Log on Client] Logon Method: UIDPW Mapping type [ Admin.261 6.Specify description [ ERP system as a backend system ] .

262 Defining the portal Content Portal content provides the data that needs to be displayed over the portal. The properties are inherited from the Master template only. Using delta link the properties are inherited from linked iview and master (template) iview... Browse > Select Folder > Rt Click >Create > New Iview. Iviews are defined from a portal template when we copy from an iview it is completely copied pointing to the template. FINISH. pages. Select Iview template. specify the iview name For Eg: Name ... portal content directory.. MSS configuration ---07-Aug-09 PORTAL CONTENT DIRECTORY .e. It is displayed in the content area..net Select the GUI type > Next> select the system ERP . not from the copied iview. Iview can be SAP transaction. worksets and roles GOTO > Content administration Portal Content Select the folder that is created above > Rt click the folder to create PCD objects. PCD is the portal content database which are in the directory structure i. layouts. Portal content contains the following iviews. Iviews are created as an copy or as an delta link. webgui. url etc.saperp... IVIEW: It provides an internet view to the content. Portal content is built using templates and delta links.Monitor Specify the prefix Custom mon. Iviews are pointed to an alias > Rt click the Iviews and preview.. ---Portal + ERP ESS.

Once you add it refresh it till you get in under portal favorites. 1. Provide an user mapping ID in user admin to access the content without userid and password. Goto User Admin Tab > Identity Management > Add Identity Search name: ABAP J2ee_Admin Hit modify Goto User Mapping for system access > System : Your Back End System Eg: NW6 Userid : Superuser Passwd: Admin123 Note: When you copy the system to the FOLDER the alias will not be copied. PCD contains folders. . ADD SYSTEM LANDSCAPE TO FAVORITES. so you need to create alias one again. views. DEFINING THE CONTENT. (Portal Content Database/ Directory). worksets and roles. Create System 2. SAP also recommends to use the predefined prefix to identify the objects uniquely. System Administration> System Configuration > System Landscape Select the System Landscape > Right hand side corner click to add to favorites. 3.) Transaction Iview > Next > Select the system [ALIAS] > FINISH > select the iview and preview. Copy copies the content without any references. Select the iview and paste same. pages. Now Goto > System Administrator > Support > Sap Application > Select type > Transaction > RUN Now Goto your Folder > select RC > IVIEW > (. * Portal provides user based.263 Enterprise port contains predefined content that is available through PCD. Goto > Content Admin > Portal Content > Select the folder and create the respective content. role based and secure interactive content. There are locate name prefix which is displayed in Quick Info.

Importing Packages. Copy it into usr\sap\trans\eps\in 3. 1. Now Goto > System Configuration > System Landscape > Assign the alias name as SAP_R3_BP > SAVE. It provides two options. role defines a group of activity and mostly a position in a company. worksets. (BP .Back end system user and Password. Page define the layout. (. 5.Best Practices) System Administration > Transport > Transport of Packages > Import. Now Goto > Identity Management > Find out the user J2EE_Admin > Goto > User Mapping for source system tab > Give the mapping users & password > Mapping user id sapuser -. Now Goto > User Administration > Identity Management > Select the user J2EE_ADMIN > modify > Assign role called Finance Manager select Finance manager ADD similarly add material manager. EPA .) Role needs to be assigned to the user. PAGE : Select the Folder > RC > page > give the details > Next (. Delta link also copies but with reference & inheritance. role.264 4.Enterprise Portal Archive. After Import > Goto Content Administration > Portal Content > Content provided by SAP > Specialist > Here you will find all the roles and iviews. roles. From Client 2. documentation. worksets define the activity. Select the Iview > RC > Add to page. User JSPM to deploy . DEPLOYING ESS/MSS AND XMII 1. Download the content from Market Place 2.) Default page > Next > light : 2 Columns > ADD > T-Layout > Next > Finish. > Give the path > Select Import. users to implement in the landscape with high productivity. Server which reads from directory D:\usr\sap\nw\sys\global\pcd\import. Similarly define page. BP Best Practices provide predefined content.

What is meant by system alias and how do you create systems in portal? 27. What is the difference between Knowledge Management & Collaboration? 14. What is the significance of the portal number. worksets. Backend system is recognised only when it is configured in SLD to create JCO. What are the various mechanisms for fine tuning portal? 17. aliases. (Java Connector) 08-Aug-09 Questions PORTAL 1. How did you perform Sizing? 3. Jlaunch) 23. Explain the significance of JAVA startup (Jcontrol. server. Standalone. Check the dependencies before deployment. roles. Shell Console. What is meant by personalization? 15. What is the difference between config tool and visual admin tool? 7. How security is controlled in Portal? 26. ABAP 13. What are the post Installation activities for Portal? 5. CON. How do you transport packages (Export and Import) in portal? . What is the significance of NWA Tool? 30. single sign on et. What is webdynpro (JCO Destinations) in portal? 29. log. LDAP. 6. Explain the directory structure (VA. How the user request is handled in portal when compared to ABAP request? 9. Name the significance of Services and Managers? Explain some of them? 8. global config directory etc. template. What are the various tolls available to work on Portal? 6. Bootstrap. What are the various patches that you have deployed? 11. What is the significance of memory in JVM. How do you configure them? Explain the ratio between them? 20. cluster. 25. What is SSO and how did you configure between ERP & Portal? 18. What are the factors considering Sizing? 4.265 4. What is portal content views. What is ESS and MSS and how do you configure them? 16. pages. What is SDM & JSPM and explain the difference between them? Which one of them are consistent and why? 10. What is the significance of SLD in Portal? 28. How did you configure UME in the portal? Explain with steps? Expected user store in Visual Admin. Explain Portal branding techniques (Logo Banner etc) 24. How they are calculated? 19. dispatcher. What is the significance of BP/ 12.) 21. groups etc. 5. Define the webdynpro connections. How do you install Portal? OS and DB? 2. My Portal could not be started? How do you start and where do you start from? What are the developer traces? 22. boot strap. Config Tool.

Page can contain page and iviews. Favorites. user role) No user gets access to the portal content without defining permissions. How do you configure BI in portal? Explain the steps? 32. Role assigner (Include it for a group.266 31. How do you configure CRM in the portal? Explain the steps? 33.Page is a layout to store and display the iview. Note: Iviews cannot contain anything Workset: It is used to display an activity. Rooms? 37. All the above can be assigned as a copy or as a Delta link. Portal lies in JAVA Engine where as ERP lies on ABAP engine.epa (Enterprise Portal Archives) Permissions Editor : Used to assign the permissions to the content. How do you monitor the portal? What are the various tools available? 35. How documents are stored in Portal? How do you create documents? 36. Role: It is a synonym of a position. 09-Aug-09 . page. What is Visual Composer? Adobe SVG Viewer? Iview .Internet View which displays the content. It can contain iview. groups or roles. Client : Path Server The extension is *. It is recommended to use delta link because inheritance from parent to child exists in Delta link. Allows us to set authorization permissions on portal objects. What is the purpose of Portal? Explain few differences when compared to ERP Engine? A. Goto > Permissions Editor (System Administrator Tab) Select enduser role. It can contain iviews. How do you work with Quick Poll. News. Page. To use portal we need only internet explorer where as for ERP we need SAP GUI. pages and a workset. 34. Forums. components and services to portal users. Import and Export: The developed content can be exported to global directory to transport to other systems. workset and role. SAP Provides transport of packages option to include the content in the package and transport. Roles are assigned to users and groups.

02. JCO Connections. Webdynpros etc.10 Note: NW7.select the business packages & select the system in the system landscape if NWDI is in place.bat .SOFTWARE DEPLOYMENT MANAGER It is used to deploy the patches up to version NW7.0/ NW640 becomes NW7.10 when is it upgraded where as it comes 7. PCUI needs to be downloaded from the market place. . . PCUI (People Centric user interface) need to be deployed to get the interface in the Portal. Identifying the Patches.0 to PI7. ESS.SDM uses port 50018 and password to deploy the packages. .On 7. If DI is not configured then select no NWDI control.Enterprise services repository.267 SDM . BP ERP is required to deploy ESS/ MSS 2.When the BP is deployed the predefined content is also deployed as well. roles. . ESS/ MSS package is required to get the portal content. 7. 4 associated patches. worksets. 3.10 PI.5 to BI7. .10 . BI are available Eg: XI3.0.03. It is discontinued from Version 7. Deploying Business Packages SAP Provides predefined packages that contains views. MSS. JSPM reads from EPS\IN where as SDM needs to be feeded with the path ESR . EHP2.04 (EHP1.10 and BW3. 7. . support stacks and business packages. We need to import the package and define the JCO connections. JSPM . 3. 7. user mapping or Single sign on etc.01.JAVA SUPPORT PACK MANAGER Used to deploy the patches/ support packages. 4) when EHP is applied.start JSPM using go. pages. 1.Copy the content to usr\sap\trans\eps\in. SDM is also used for undeployment which is a great disadvantage/ because of dependencies may not work.Deploy the packages.

The logon ticket is stored as a non-persistent cookie on the browser and valid till the browser is closed or logoff. personalized. SSSO cannot provide Authorizations. The user credentials are authenticated (UID. people centric. End user etc) Assign the roles to users and ensure that the respective tabs are displayed. The user login to the Portal 2. User sends a request to modify the leave request.Goto Webdynpro (in Content Administration Tab) .268 . Mechanism: 1. the request should go to the backend ERP system. PWD) and user is issued with a logon ticket.select the JCO connection and Create There are 2 types of JCO's Application Path Connection should be created using dedicated application server. web based interface to the users. Application data should be created using a dedicated Application server. Eg. Single sign on provides an access to all the back end systems without any password. 4. language specific. . The logon ticket is send through the request and gets authenticated on the back end system. SINGLE SIGN ON The portal is role based. user based. Predefined roles are available only we need to set the permissions (Role owner. Test the connection Refer to ESS/ MSS documentation and create systems and aliases accordingly. Meta Data/ Dictionary Data Connection should be created using logon load balancing. SAP_TRAVEL_METADATA: SAP_TRAVEL. it provides only authentication. Define the permissions for the deployed content. 3.

Create RFC's in BW and EP using program id (SM59. 5. 6. Communication User: To transfer the data from one system to another system. like RFC users. CONFIGURING SSO EP to BW 1. pages and worksets. JCO.269 5. 6. The backend system will provide authorization to modify the leave request. STRUSTSS02 1. SU01 . Production target/ bonus. Dialogue User. 10-Aug-09 DEPLOYING MSS/ ESS Deploy using JSPM: The content deployed contains predefined roles. 3. Create BW system in EP 5. Reference Users .Under Role tab. issues. authentication scheme. Execute RSPOSRT. Similarly export from keystore admin and import in STRUSTSS02. date of expiry. 4. Perform user mapping. SU01 Types of users 1. The login ticket does not contain passwords.Repopulate info to SLD . Configure SLD RZ70 . login is possible. Maintain the portal setting in RSPOR_T_PORTAL in SM30 back end systems 3. 7. Export the certificate in STRUSTSS02 and import the certificate in EP Key store administration.To transfer the data or client copy with in the system or local clients in the system 2. Service User: Is also called as reporting user. When the user is absent the reference of the other user will take care. information about the issuing system. 4. digital signature. It contains userid. PWD doesn't expires. System User . In order to setup SSO. JCORFC provider service) 2. we need to setup single sign on parameters from RZ10.To Provide additional rights to the user.

The roles are controlled by assigning them to end user. The mapped user should have a valid employee ID which can be assigned in Transactional HRUser. role assigner. .Directly to behave as owner.270 The user from Enterprise portal communicates with backend system using mapped user. Content -------. Content Assignment to group -----. end user. role or a group. Groups .Role. The Data access is controlled in the backend engine. sets.Assigned with roles Note: Even though roles are defined on portal they are used to only to control the access to tabs. role assigner. end user. Content --------. pages.Roles ---. Role assigners and administrators.Group of users . Each Portal Content is assigned with a role 2. Iviews. Regarding Permissions> System Administration > Employee Self Permissions > Permissions Permissions > 1. read only. read only. role assigner.to behave as owner. Role .Users ----.to behave as owner. end user. read only.users ---. The Content can be administrated by using a user.

271 11-Aug-09 NO CLASS 12-Aug-09 * SU01 users should belongs to ESSGroup .

2. JSPM or SDM . There will be a SMTP server built-in. Instant Messaging to the users who are logged on to the portal. . Create tasks to the subordinates and check the status of update from time to time. 3. COLLABORATION It is available by default when the portal is installed. Note: Portal provides runtime for any kind of JAVA or Webdynpro ESS/ MSS .272 Collaboration: Enable the collaboration launch pad/ real time collaboration From Content Administration Using default framework page >Open > Rt side select > Enable the collaboration > SAVE Restart the engine Collaboration provides the following . Contracts Management (Add. We can check the users availability to send email.Webdynpro is deployed through. It can also be server as Intranet portal for the larger companies.Send email Collaboration means communication between people. Collaboration brings the integration between people and provides all the features which are available with yahoo. Google etc. Favorites etc. Delete. Folders. Edit) 4.Show the status of the users . 13-Aug-09 What are entry points? Entry points are those in the home page of the portal like public documents. Collaboration provides the following : Work : 1.For Knowledge Management JAR files. meeting invitation etc.

Personal Documents: We can store our personal documents and can display from any part of the world provided access to portal is available. Common Folders: It is used by a team or group to store the documents between them. Favorites: It is used to store the accessed in links/ documents and provide navigation in one step. Documents: Home > Documents SAP provides entry points to store and access the documents. It provides 6 entries. SAP also uses TREX to search and classify the information. Lotus domino server or any other mail servers. chemistry. Http://<hostname>:50000/ user admin Identity Management LDAP Server. Teams: It is used to collaborate between group of people. Click on NEW > Provide the user logon domain. Here we can create the documents. 5. Recently used: It provides the list of documents that are recently accessed. The information is fetched and organized by topic. Note: All collaborative activities using system administration > System Configuration > Collaboration in RHS and click on group ware transport. TCODE: SCOT to configure mail server in SAP. 2. 3. Goto > Content Admin > Collaboration Content > Room Creation (in Right Hand Side) Give the description and details > Hit Next > Add User > Finish. Now click on Enter Room http://<hostname>:50000/irj Content Management . . If you click on physics you need to get statics and dynamics.273 Navigation: Home > Work > Documents etc. Eg: Science/ Physics. 1. We need to configure rooms before we work with teans. biology. Taxonomies: It is used to organize the date in categories. 4. Group ware transport are used to configure the Microsoft exchange server.Quick Poll Administration.

Password rest. Customization. Role Assignment(in portal and backend system).Portal Users . JSPM we can jump from 6 to 9 Directly where as in SPAM we need to follow sequence. Portal Thread Weaver is a monitoring toll. QUICK POLLS etc.Request Overview. User creation. vendors. assigning to a group and group assignment to users. Goto Security Provider service and monitor the user sessions and if we require to terminate we can terminate the session upon approval. FAQS. user mapping. Eg: A company with 30. customers and business process owners) . Releasing the object locks similar to SM12 approval is required. using JSPM and update Kernel.274 14-Aug-09 PORTAL DAY TO DAY ACTIVITIES Transportation of Portal Content Objects. (Use transport studio to transport objects or SDM to deploy them manually) User management (End user requests from suppliers.ensure backend system mapper user (Service User) has relevant authorizations. https://<hostname>:50000/irj. Content Manager role to change the NEWS. . System Administration . It can be enterprise portal archive or webdynpros. Modifying the system IP Address (Host Name) in systems if required --.Assign Portal Roles ---. (like SD group.Users are created in ADS (Active Directory Server) ---> Populate What is the difference between JSPM and SPAM? SPAM is for ABAP and JSPM is for JAVA. JSPM is cumulative/ growing and SPAM is incremental. .000 portal users will be maintained by using user groups. MM group etc) Understanding the user and security mechanism. defining roles based on content.User Mapping --. It is always advised to terminate the user session instead of terminating the locks. Portal ---.Monitoring . employees. Monitoring the user load on the system. Webdynpros mainly transported using JDI.Rare Job (Sys Admin ----System Config) Apply support packages/ business packages etc. We can download from Market place and apply.

Request summary is used to identify the CPU time. Fine Tuning the Portal.200 6 -----. CPU time and No. Missing Index and buffers are small. Average response time. it is running expensive Iviews (Embedded Iviews). We need to work with JVM and their Patches 4. It is used to identify the expensive users at that point of time. 8. System Administration . User uses only CPU and Memory of the portal to get the content displayed.1000 5 -----. Server Procurements is not as per Hardware Sizing .200 As the calls are more Response time will come down Request overview provides the user and component accessed along with CPU time and duration. 1------.e.2000 3 -----.10000 2 -----. CPU time more than 40 to 60% of the response time then consider CPU is expensive. We need to work with OS and their Patches 2. We need to work with Iviews 7.Monitoring .. total number of calls. It contains time because the database engine is a backend system. 6. DB Statistics. ST04 > DB Buffer init ratio DB02> Missing index.. If the calls are more and response time is high we may consider deploying of a proxy server. Each component should not consume more than 2 Seconds on all average.Search in Google. i.2000 4 -----. We need to work with Backend systems. Component. We can recreate the index by using BRTOOLS also.275 Monitoring content overviews . We need to work with DB and their Patches 3. find out the missing index and recreate. SGEN. Userid etc. We need to work with Cache Note: Tune Performance of Enterprise Portal .It is used to display the components that are accessed.Content Overview Identify the component which consumes more gross time.. 1... We can display the content based on search criteria like duration.. Request. of Calls etc. We need to work with Browser IE/ Mozilla Patches 5.

Thread Manager assigns the request to server process 5. Never exceed 80 to 85% of CPU load for extended period of time on ABAP 70% 10.. 1.(In Netweaver 7. Thread managers are used to serve the user requests. Requests are handled by server socket queue of http provider services.. 7. BI is used to run those reports with out effecting the performance. Request is handled by dispatcher and assigns to Thread Manager 4. Eg. 3. 8.0 It became a part of architecture with Information Integration) Motivation 1.000 as per the Industry standards.1C are the Basis versions . 2. SAP_BASIS.0 3.e. Configure Thread Manager in Config Tool. Bar Charts. Server process assigns the request to Application Thread Manager So we have enough threads to process the user request. Compare the date that is available in market DUN & BRAND street to define the competitive reports. When ABAP is installed (SAP-ABAP. Business Cockpit (In BI7) New 6. Graphical Representation with help of BO (Business Objects).276 9..1 3. Archiving system (Date from legacy systems is achieved into BI Systems. Pie diagrams. Roles etc. Threads min is 500 and Max is 10. User Submit the request. Dash Boards etc. Web Broadcasting 5. Analytical Reports 2. Reporting system to run the heavy background jobs. So. 4. Line Charts and graphical representation . ECC/ ERP system is consuming more time to run the background jobs. BIW From WEBAS 640 it is by default available with the Platform i. What does BI do? . SAP_BW) comes by default. 15-Aug-09 BUSINESS INTELLIGENCE/ BUSINESS WAREHOUSE / BUSINESS INFORMATION WARE HOUSING Versions 3. Decision Making System 3. SAP Provides BI_CONT (BI Content) which contains predefined info cubes.

goto SE12 Specify the table --. 8. Select the usage type ABAP for a normal BI system. CRM etc) and fetch the data into FACT and Dimension Tables. Small tables are grouped in to (DeNormalization) Big Tables. 4. Installation of BI System 1. 2. If BI Portal is required then select ABAP-JAVA-BIJAVA-EPCORE-EP 3. BI Communicates with various backend systems (ERP. BW User = BW user 6. Normalization is a process of splitting up the larger tables into small tables upto sixth normal form to have the granular information and establishing the key relationship between tables.xls.Change . Crystal reports. 5.RSADMINA . Establish connection between ERP and BI system .277 BI is an SAP ABAP application system with platform ABAP. 7. 7. Define logical system to client (BI uses ALE Mechanism to transfer data from ERP to BI) so the communication happens between logical systems only. The Data is not eligible for fro updates. These tables are used to define various reports as per customer requirements. STMS etc) other wise SAINT wont work. *.03 (Deploy atleast 703 because upto 702 are out of maintenance) current is 710. It becomes intelligent by deploying the business content through SAINT.csv.specify the field MANDT = <CLIENT> SE11 .txt. Download the BI-Cont and deploy through SAINT (SE06. Set up the Master client in table RSADMINA --. If BI Portal along with webdynpro development then select DI as well. Front end can be BEX or an Enterprise portal. The data can be a master data with transaction data The report fetches data from various data sources so more memory and more BTC work process are required. Now it supports XML files through PI BI is an Analytical system it is based on OLAP Technology (Online Analytical Processing). Initialize RSA1 to replicate and activate the BI System. Flat files (*. *.BWMANDT = 1 save. XCelsius can also be used to fetch the reports from BI system.

RSA1 > Goto Source systems Select SAP > Create RFC Connection Available destination: DEVCLNT001 SID: DEV Sys No: 00 Users ALEREMOTE. Now Under system administration > Monitoring > you will find Business Intelligence .Installation & Upgrade .BI Content 7. RSPOR_SETUP is a program (BI and EP) Maintain settings for Integration into SAP EP.> Select -> Download Once downloading copy it to usr\sap\trans\eps\in (It is in .com/ SWDC .sca format) Now goto JSPM & initiate go.03 around 500 MB Select download .NO CLASS ----------17-Aug-09 DOWNLOAD BI CONTENT www.bat Select business package -> Next > SAP BI/ ADMIN (next) . BWUSER are created with password provided.Deploy will be finished.downloads . 16-Aug-09 --------.downloads . Once deployed goto > /irj > User Administration > Identity Management > Find the user > Modify > Assign roles > Search for "BI Administrator" role > Add > SAVE. ST03 . RZ20 . Check test and activate the connection. BI ADMIN is a business package provided by SAP BPBI Administration .sap software distribution center .Add to download basket & Download BIADMIN also from the Market place.service.My SAP Application Components .sap. With this we can admin BI System through Portal.278 9.

2. SMLT. Installation of ABAP System. Activate the content by using SAINT 6. Execute > Setup call to BI Admin cockpit. Download BI Content from Market Place 5. It is a web based BI Admin Tool introduced in Netweaver 7. For WEB Monitoring using Business Packages 2. 3. BI-JAVA. . 4. 7. JAVA. a backend system in TCode RSA1 8. EPCore when EP. Analyzer. 1. 3. Business Explorer. Now goto> SPRO > SAP IMG Reference SAP Netweaver > Business Intelligence > General BI Settings Setting for Administration Cockpit. BI Integrated planning that is modeling can be performed over the web. Reporting retrieval settings > Overview Integration into Portal. Assign the roles to users in the Enterprise portal. Broad Caster can be used over the web. We can perform Technical . Installation of ABAP. Define source system i. Modeling & Administration etc. Define Master Client in RSADMINA Table. Click on new entries. EP. Perform other post installation activities like (SE06. Implement Usage of BIADMIN cockpit.e.0 2. SR13. Backup. BI-JAVA functionality is required.279 RSC_COl is a background job runs to pump the date to ST03 MONI is the table from here the data will be read by the above Job. SMLG. STMS. Standard Job Scheduling (SE36) and DB13 etc. Easy Administration for Complex BW's Navigation Goto > SPRO Why do we need EP for BI Administration? 1. Download the BP[BI ADMINA] from Market place copy it to \usr\sap\trans\eps\in directory Use JSPM to deploy the Business Package [BI ADMIN] BI ADMIN COCKPIT 1.

BI Intelligence.. After performing system copy in the landscape we need to change the logical system name. You cal do it by using NWA . Note: Don't change logical systems name once they are assigned to client. BI_JAVA. Instead use BDLS to change the logical system. /nwa RSPOR_SETUP (SA38) SPRO in BI System Or manually in BI System... 18-Aug-09 SARA : Tables and Archiving objects TDM_365_BW : BW Security . Define JCO Destinations in webdynpro (Four Connections 2 Metadata and 2 Applications) Goto ../irj > Content Administration > Webdynpro > Maintain JCO RFC. post installation activities. Define SAP_BW as a system and create alias..280 The roles are : BI Administration. BI Explorer. Define the Integration between portal and BI Engine (Reporting Setting) in SPRO Use NWA toll to perform. System Copy in Landscape The above figure shows it is a system copy in the landscape. To perform this we need to go with BDLS and change LSN RSPOR_SETUP (SA38) is a report specify the steps that needs to be followed to integrate BI with JAVA Engine. Note: Logical system names are required to change only during system copy.

S_RS_COMP1 . RSSMTRACE. user assignments. SU22.0 the RSSM. user comparison.Info Area. administration and deployment BI Security is similar to R/3 Security which consists of SU20. SU25 with authorization field. If you install Solman we will get all the above components. The area that differs is to protect the info objects at field level. reporting component. Info cube Sub object SAP Provided RSSM and RSSMTRACE upto 3.5 i. Info Cube. Qry Owner S_RS_LCUBE . Web tools for modeling.Reporting component. SU21. Info Provider. SAP Provides around 20 authorization objects which are required for reporting administration. Netweaver onwards the above transaction is obsolete.Info Area. RSR and RS . composite profiles. S_RS_COMP . activities. development. authorization objects. New Security Features 2. Now it is RSECADMIN. composite roles etc. From BW3. . authorization profiles.In BW3.1c version of BW. BI System & Solution Manager System. authorization classes. roles.0 Eg: To Create custom authorization object we use SU21 in R/3 where as in BW(BI) we use RSECADMIN.e. . Solution Manager is a CRM System.281 BI SECURITY 1.is the prefix for all reports. RSSMQ has been moved to RSECADMIN in Netweaver 7. favorites. menus.

....Info Object RSA1 is the TCode which is used to activate the content and replicate the content.Click on change authorization tab -> X . Note: Every user will have the default tcodes (SU53.. It is also use to define the transport connections and editability in the Target systems.In the next screen . In RSA1 .RC ... 19-Aug-09 SYSTEM COPY (FOR BI SYSTEM) 1.Select the grouping ... SP01. Info Cubes..Perform user comparison Goto PFCG .Save and generate the profile in PFCG and assign the role to the user. Now Goto > PFCG -.We can also include authorization object in a Transaction SU24. DEFINING CUSTOM AUTHORIZATION Goto RSA1 .Change . Now Goto > RSECADMIN > Maintain > Create Give the description . TRANSPORTATION OF OBJECTS In RSA1 define the objects -.Transport Connection .. Pre-Steps on the target system (The tables/ Data that need to be restored after a system copy) 3.Select the char which is in authorization relevant.282 In order to protect the reports at object and field level we need to make them authorization relevant in RSA1 where as SU20 in R/3.. DSO.. SU3).Include Authorization object manually or . It is also use to define key figures. Clean the database (SAPDATA1. SU56.do the user comparison. Chars.Select the object click on Truck BEX we can transport in this way.Create Zrole .Define Role -.) .Goto Authorization Table . Take the backup f the production system (Source) 2. SAPDATA2.Info Object . We have another button Object Changeability with this we can give the object as a edit compatibility.Assign the user .Collect them in package and transport -.Select Info Objects .Goto Business explorer tab Authorization Check relevant..give the object which is authorization relevant .. PFCG will defaultly we need to use.. Save.BI Content . objects . Goto > RSA1 . .Use Object Changeability tab in RSA1 to ensure that the object can be modified in PRD system.Add manually . We need to provide this to every user. Info Objects.

When the user log in with userid/ password/ mandt/ language it goes to the table USR02 (Internal security of SAP) to validate users.e. SQL> select count * from dba_table where owner = 'SAPSR3'. SQL> Select table_name from dba_tables where owner = 'OPS$willsys99\NWADM'. 5. 6.sql" to setup permissions on the database to create OPS$USERS a. Restore the database from backup /or physical copy of the datafiles (SAPDATA1. Run "Oradbusr. work process connects to the database as user "OPS$<Hostname>\SIDADM to get SAPSR3's password. Up to 4. SQL> select bname from SAPSR3. b... Remove the entries before "startup nomount" and after "Characteristics WE8DEC' Run Control file on the target system 7. c. 2..0 SAP<SID> is the owner of the database.0) on wards SAPSR3 is the owner of the database for ABAP..USR02.. From Netweaver 04S (WebAS 7.. Mechanism: 1.e. User i. ... 4... The Process gets the password and disconnects the session. 4. SAPDATA2. SAPSR3 is the schema user whose password stores in table SAPUSER which is owned by OPS$<hostname>\SIDADM Note: OPS$ mechanism provides a means to connect to the database without any password i. up to ECC5.283 SQL> Select username from DBA_USER.. Remote_OS_Authenticate = True 3. Generate control file (Alter database backup control file to trace) A trace file is generated in saptrace directory Rename the file to control. The connection is only possible when . user with prefix OPS$...) 5. The OS user is created in the database with prefix OPS$(OS Username).sql (Change the SID and path name of datafiles accordingly) 6. Process relogins to the database with user SAPSR3 who owns the complete SAP database. Now the user can access the complete SAP Schema.6c SAPR3 is the owner of the database. SAPSR3DB is for the JAVA system...

.com/ecatt ------------------SM35 Create new recording . Export that data as excel sheet. Change the password & username and . SQL> Insert into table 'OPS$<hostname>/SIDADM'. Truncate the table RFCDES. 1. Now goto SM35 you will find all the activities on SU01.Change password .Save. SAVE Goto that particular SU01. Now go to change mode > click on Pattern www.Give tcode SU01 . SAPUSR TABLE SAP recommends to change the schema user password using BRTOOLS/ SAPDBA.284 Note: If any of the 1-5 fails then R3Trans -d results (0012) snote : 400241 SAPSR3 password resides in two tables. Or You have different users with different roles and profiles.SAPUSER values SQL> Alter user SAPSR3 identified by "New password" When you insert password it is alphanumeric(It will be in the encrypted format after restart) Goto > Tcode SECATT Test [ ] create Description [ ] Component [BC] Question: We have 300 user and every month their password needs to be changed. DBA_USERS 2.give the record name. This is sued to truncate all the RFC connections. [SAVE] . Change . Click on Execute F3 In the main screen >> In the toll bar. ------------------Ensure that R3Trans -d results in 0000 POST ACTIVITIES 1. If not the restore system behaves as a source system and triggers the jobs. How can you achieve this? This will be achieved from SECATT Tcode. If it is manual we need to change in two tables..erpgenic.

extended and heap memory.285 SQL> Truncate table SAPSR3.RFCDES. DBLS (Used to change logical system names) Client information. 20-Aug-09 BI MONITORING BI uses batch processes to execute the reports.sapuser values < 'SAUSER'.Profiles. extended and roll memory sequentially where as dialogue uses roll memory. SMQ1. STMS configuration. If the memory is not sufficient in both the cases the process gets terminated or hangs up. Pre-Activities SM51 . BTC uses Dialogue uses abap/heap_area_nondia where as abap/heap_area_dia . While client copy in ECC error: FINB_TR_DEST type 3. etc. Use 1. which consumes more time and resources. Alternatively you can set rdisp/ wp_no_btc=0 before you start the system or set the time to rdisp/btctime = 0 (Don't worry as SICK results in error) 3. Programs . Specify the RFC name in FINB_TR_DEST.Is a report to pause the background jobs BTCTRNS2 SM37 . Table . For this we need to create a self RFC.Global Instance SCC4 .Logon Load Balancing RZ04 .'ADMIN123'.List of Background Jobs RZ11 . RFCDES.Relocation of objects SE01(Relocation of objects) 3. 2.TOC (SE01) Transport of copies 2. Screenshots.Transport Group BTCTRNS1 .Operation Modes STMS . SLICENSE. system specific programs. reports transactions. Technically batch process uses heap memory. SMQ2. SQL> Insert into "OPS$willsys99\NWDADM". CDCLS(Cluster Table) we can truncate strictly Backup need to take USR02. queries.All the clients SMLG .

286 ST03n is used to identify the response time of the users, Transaction of reports and processes. Response time depends upon the data to be fetched, query being used, or the duration of the report. (From Date - To Date) Scheduled: When the jobs are defined the status is scheduled. Released: When the execution time is specified for a defined job then its status is released to execute at a point of time. Ready: When the specified time elapses then the status will be ready. Process Flow 1. BTC jobs are defined in SM36 2. The jobs are saved in table TBTCT, TBTCS...... TBTC* 3. A background job SAPMSSYST which runs periodically for every 60 seconds or the time specified in the parameter rdisp/btctime = 60 Secs. This period job runs in the dialogue mode and collects the jobs and runs them into active mode which are in the ready state. Active: The job is actively running on the system. Finished: The job is successfully completed/ Terminated Cancelled: The job is failed The possible reasons for Job Failure: 1. The memory is not sufficient 2. User authentication/ authorizations/ validity ......... issues 3. The variants are not properly defined. Variant is a selection criteria to provide the inputs runtime without user intervention. 4. The dependent jobs are not completed in the process. 5. Database specific issues related to space during the data extraction from backend system. 6. File system issues when extracting the data from flat files (File corrupted, file not opened, file system permissions are not as per ETL format. CDCLS is the cluster table which is having huge data DB02 - We can find the top 50 Tables. TCodes RRMX - It is used to start the business explorer and analyzer. RSRV - To repair the info objects

287 RSPC - It is used to monitor the process chains and check for the links that are broken. RSA1 - ADW RSPC Variant RSPC Process Log Note: Each BI System has its own process before you start working ensure that you are well aware of the process of DTP, Source System, Process Owner, Critical Jobs and their priority and escalation levels. Capacity Planning: DB02--------- Space Analysis------- Identify top 50 table and record them every week to identify the growth of the table. (It is also used to identify the accidental data growth) ST04 : Buffer Monitoring ST30 : Global Performance Analysis 22-Aug-09

DATA TRANSFER TECHNIQUES RFC: Remote function call (SM59) it is used to call the other system using the gateway to fetch or send the information. There are 4 types of RFCs 1. ARFC 2. SRFC 3. TRFC 4. QRFC ARFC : Asynchronous RFC: It is used to communicate between two systems but the source system process may not get the acknowledge from the Target. Some times the data may be lost in transition. The source system process does not bother whether the information is received by the target system. It is similar to a post card. It is not reliable and consistent. SRFC: Synchronous RFC: It is used to communicate with receiving system and wait for acknowledgement. If the acknowledgement is delayed it will go into RFC/ Sleep/ CPIC Mode. It is reliable but the resource gets blocked at the target system. If the target system is not available (Example BTC Process waiting too long in the active state) - All BW Systems uses SRFC.

288 SM58 - To find all the IDOCS TRFC: Transactional RFC : It is an advanced version of ARFC. It is used to communicate with receiving system and if the system is not available it will generate a Transaction ID in SM58. and a background job RSARFCSE runs for every 60 Seconds. It is reliable, gets the acknowledgement and data transmission is consistent. Example: Central User Administration Parent client creates users and send it to child clients. If child client is not available it creates a transaction ID in SM58 and ensures delivery when the child client is available. QRFC: Queued RFC: It is an advanced version of TRFC to ensure the jobs are processed in a queue. To execute QRFC we have a job called QUIN Scheduler - We have SMQ1 (Outbound), SMQ2 , SMQR - Quin Schedulers QRFC generates the process of LUW's in the sequence. When the sequence is mandatory in the data transmission QRFC is recommended. SAP Implemented all the above services to ensure the quality in the data transmission. SAP named it as QoS (Quality of Service). SAP consider SRFC, TRFC and QRFC.

1. SRFC --- BE (Best of Efforts) - With best of efforts it will deliver to Target system. When you find BE it is SRFC. Majorly we are going to use in BI and XI Systems. 2. TRFC -- EO (Exactly once) - It checks exactly once. 3. QRFC - EOIO - Exactly once in Order. ALE: (Application Link Enabling): It is used to transfer two loosely coupled systems (SAP to SAP systems) Eg. BW to CRM; ERP to ERP etc. SALE/ BD64/ BD54 it is used to define the logical systems and sending/ receiving systems. Each system that participates in the data transmission is identified by it's logical system name i.e. SIDCLNTCLIENTNO. Transfer ----------- Exchange -------------- Transmission => Are Same And is recommended to define the RFC's using logical system name to uniquely identify in the landscape. 1. Define the distribution model (In Sale TCode) in BD64 (Change) - Create Model View - Give the tech name - Continue.

289 2. API's Application Programming Interface: It is an interface in BD64 select the model click on ADD API defined based on your application either to send or receive data based on the business it is called as BAPI. (Business API's). The BAPI will be assigned between the sending and receiving system

BAPI contains one or more methods. Methods are similar to function modules to perform certain tasks. EDI: Electronic Data Interchange: It is used to transfer the data between SAP to Non-SAP systems and vice versa. In order to monitor the EDI used TCODE WE05 IDOC: Intermediate Document: It is in the understandable format of both sender and the receiver. Non SAP systems could communicate directly with SAP systems. They required adapters (File Adapter, J2EE Adapter, IDOC Adapter, HTTP Adapter etc) When the supply chain market is growing the necessity of 'E-Commerce' Electronic business EB's) is gaining importance and the vendors, suppliers wants the documents flow electronically with out any paper In order to monitor multiple senders and recipients it will be difficult to use SAP Standard transactions, SAP standard systems and mechanisms. XI/ PI EXCHANGE INFRASTRUCTURE/ PROCESS INTEGRATION It is used to communicate between SAP to NON-SAP and vice versa. It communicates with both sending systems and receiving systems via Intelligent Broker. XI Communicates with out Adapter for the versions based on WEBAS 640 and above i.e. 4.6c is involved then it requires an adapter. SLD : http://<hostname>:50000/SLD


1. Why SLD is mandatory in XI? - SLD is to define technical system (Hostname) & Business system (Client) that are going to participate in Integration . - It is used to define the roles of business systems in the XI domain. - It is used to define the XI Domain - Architectural components need to be defined. Integration Directory is nothing but customization Integration Repository is nothing but Development. 2. How to open the XI home page from ABAP? - By using Tcode SXMB_IFR => To Open the XI Home Page. We have default user PISUPER Password : Master Password. Design means IR Customize means ID config time. 23-Aug-09 XI 2.0 very limited XI20 to XI30 is called as Migration. XI 3.0 very limited based on WEBAS 640 XI30 to PI7.0 called upgrade. PI 7.0 Immediate release on WEBAS 700 which required both ABAP & JAVA Environment. It required both command on ABAP & JAVA Environment. XI is Used to exchange the information between SAP to SAP and NON-SAP systems vice versa.


- XI/PI is an Intelligent broker to communicate with systems using adapter with RFC Mechanism...... (BE, EO and EOIO) - XI/PI has not penetrated into market because ALE, EDI, IDOC, file transfer, Batch inputs, BDC (Batch data transfer communication) are in place. To replace them we need a new server i.e. landscape (DEV, QAS, PRD) environment which is expensive and technology required.. Where as companies are habituated to use TIBCO, ROSETTANET etc. Eg. In India Reliance, Hero Honda is using XI3.0 Xchange Infrastructure 3.0 based on WEBAS 640 Process Integration 7.0 based on WEBAS 700 PI 7.10 based on WEBAS 710 PI 7.10 based on EHP1 WEBAS 710 It requires both environments i.e. ABAP and JAVA. XI Architecture: Integration Builder -------- Integration Server Integration Directory ----- Business Process Engine Integration Repository --- Runtime Work bench Central Adapter Engine. PI is deployed through Integration Repository (IR). - Integration Builder is used to build the objects that are required for Integration (Source and receiving system). It contains two areas IR and ID. - IR is often referred as Design Time (Integration Repository) which is used to create and design the integration objects. NOTE: XI/PI license is based on date transfer like size -- 2GB, 5GB, 10 GB. XI Uses global format (XML Format) Extensible Markup language with the help of SOAP (Simple object access protocol). XML is an industry standard which is in the understandable format (Using meta data (Data about data)) It uses its own tags <address>, <price>, <customer>, <shannu><willsys> - ID (Integration Directory) is referred as config time (Integration directory) which is used to configure the run time objects (Sender, Receiver, Interface, Agreements). - To avoid complex developments SAP Provides predefined XI-Content which can be deployed using Integration Repository. The content provided will be in ZIP format which contains ".TPZ" Extension.

292 Note: 1. How did you deploy XI-Content? Through IR. 2. Architecture of XI? 3. How did you apply patches? Through JSPM 4. How did you transport the objects. Extensions: CAR SAR JAR WAR SCA SDA EPA .ZIP EAR TPZ - Compressed Archive --- Mostly for Patches - SAP Archive -- Mostly for SAP Kernel. - JAVA Archives - Web Archives - SAP Component Archives - Deployable archives software SAP - Enterprise Portal Archives - Zip Files - Enterprise Archives - XI/ PI Content

Tools Visual Admin Tool. Usr\sap\sid\dvebmgs00\j2ee\admin\go.bat On UNIX ./go (JAVA parameter need to set like environment variable) Config Tool. Usr\sap\sid\dvebmgs00\j2ee\configtool\configtool.bat SDM Usr\sap\sid\dvebmgs00\SMD\remotegui.bat JSPM Usr\sap\sid\dvebmgs00\j2ee\jspm\go.bat NWA http://<hostname>:50000/NWA SLD http://<hostname>:50000/SLD Template config Tool.

REP etc for user name analysis) . (In the above user names take out PI and use the AF.You can find in SU01 -> PI* Press F4 PI_JCO_RFC .message Exchange Profile: http://<hostname>:50000/ exchange profile In order to ensure SOD (Separation of Duty) XI creates users during installation only. UME in standalone JAVA & Integrated Engine (JAVA .Adapter User PIDIRUSER .Runtime Workbench user. How do you apply kernel? 4.Integration Landscape user PISUPER . DIR. Difference between config tool & visual admin tool? 3.Integration Repository user PIISUSER .Integration Directory User PIREPUSER .Integration Server User PILDUSER .293 Usr\sap\sid\sys\global\templateconfig Standalone Log Viewer Usr\sap\sid\dvebmgs00\j2ee\admin\logviewer\standalone\logviewer Questions IMP 1. J2EE_Admin? 5.ABAP Engine)? EP Url's IR http://<hostname>:50000/irj Useradmin: http://<hostname>:50000/user admin J2EE engine: http://<hostname>:50000 XI Url's IR: http://<hostname>:50000/rep (SXMB_IFR) Tcode ID: http://<hostname>:50000/dir (SXMB_IFR) Tcode RWD: http://<hostname>:50000/rwp MDT: http://<hostname>:50000/MDT . For XI we have XI Super and PI we have PI User Users in PI . Difference between SDM and JSPM? 2.RFC User PIAF User . Users created in standalone JAVA & Integrated engine Administrator.Super User PIRWBUSER .

There are two roles in the XI System 1.0 all the above can be selected during the selection of usage type. This is used to communicate with XI/PI to transfer data to SAP systems.Post Installation Activities Install JAVA as an add-on on that client Install XI_Content Install Adapter Engine PI 7. XI Installation 640 . If the participating system is ABAP a technical system pointed to business system is mandatory. Integration server to process the messages 2. XI requires both ABAP and JAVA components.0 In PI7. Production Landscape . This can be installed at partner landscape. JAVA and process integration.0 Install ABAP Instance (Central and Database Instance) Create a client and perform ABAP .XI3. XI Landscape XI Usually connects to ERP and SRM There should be at least two systems in the landscape one for DEV and one for PRD.Select ABAP. Application system which is a sender or receiver 24-Aug-09 PCK: Partner connectivity kit. .294 Note: All the system that need to participate in the integration must be registered in SLD along with software component version and products..

Earlier these activities are performed during installation. Check all the services are running from Visual admin tool. now moved as a part of post installation activities.295 XI. Note: In PI 7. MANUAL PROCESS. Post Installation Activities 1.1 it is recommended to use NWA tool only (like creation of Users (SUSERS). 25-Aug-09 1. You can use NWA Tool to perform the post-installation activities automatically. POST Installation Activities 1. These can be performed manually or using NWA tool. BI maintains their own SLD. EP. generation of roles and profiles and assignment of roles to users. 2. . Note: CPIC_MAX_CON=500 (Environmental Variable) to avoid the error max connections reached.

Define a business system i. 11.It is used to set RFC destination.Use the URL: http://<hostname>:8000/sap/bc/spi_gate With user PIRWBUSER & password . 13. Configure ABAP system to SLD using transaction. Note: There will be only one integration server in the XI Domain that is used to process the messages. 12.rprof. Use SLD data supplier service to populate information of JAVA engine to SLD Note: 9 & 10 are mandatory for all systems that are going to participate in the integration.xi Note: Deploy service is also used to deploy small applications. Create RFC connection of type "H" for PMIStore (Process Monitoring Infrastructure) . Config SLD . LCRSAPUSER 14. Assign user in SZDAPICUST (PIAPPLUSER with LCR Rights with assign password) 6. .remoteprofile Com..sap.296 Com. The Program ID corresponds to the entry under for the J2EE Engine (Used to refresh the runtime cache) AI_RUNTIME_JCOSERVER (SLDAPIUSER_<SID>.sap. Application system integration server. Senders & Receivers are configured as Application System.It is used to populate the monitoring into ABAP Engine. Define RFC connections "T" from ABAP engine to JAVA Engine. Time Unit.Define RFC type "H" INTEGRATOIN_DIRECTORY_HMI to refresh the service in J2EE Engine.e. Number ranges etc. Define RFC type "A" 5. 8.We can use ABAP/WEB to display the end to end monitoring of a message. Assign application role to user group in SLD data Supplier service click on user group icon. AI_DIRECTORY_JCOSERVER: Points form integration server to the integration builder. . 9. Assign roles to PISUPER (4 Roles) 7.aii Com. Define the role of a system in SLD.lcr Com. a technical system with specific client.sap. . RZ70 with the help of RFC "SLD_UC" 10. Define a technical system in SLD & assign the product and software component. 4.Assign LCR roles to users (P1APPLUSER) 3.sap. 2. Execute transaction SWF_XI_CUSTOMISING to configure the basic settings for XI/ PI .

Unzip the content into . define technical system.cp .0 So to . Register Queues SXMB_ADM Administration . .af. 6. business system.sap to define the objects . Use RFC/ IDOCS to communicate with backend to import the IDOC/ RFC structure to use the sending/ receiving system data structure.(Infocube objects) 5. . Define URN (Uniform Resource Name) Com.Each system is registered in the SLD.297 15.Tools . software component. 1.Change Global Configuration data Select the business system roles and save it.Integrate Repository . Import the landscape information for custom development.Register Queues (Should say Registration Complete) 17.Integration Engine Configuration (Change Mode) Menu .Execute transaction SXMB_ADM (Integration Engine Administration) Each ABAP engine is a Integration Engine. Triggering the self registration of Adapter Engine Deploy comsap. Importing content to Integration repository Resides at sys\global\XI\repository server\import\. Set to integration server. . Configuring Integration Server on ABAP Engine . Message mapping .Integration server & application systems are defined in SLD itself . .So each system that needs to participate in the integration define itself with a system role.aii.In principle XI Domain is defined in SLD & associated. but ABAP engine process the messages flow between them using Integration Server. product.tpz files .Edit . 16.Import Design objects Development. If the integration engine is configured as an Integration Server then it is called as XI Engine & other are called as Application system (Senders or Receivers) Similarly as Master system in BI (RSADMINA) SXMB_ADM Configuration .XI Content contains predefined integration objects to avoid the design & development of objects.tp2 file The XI Content is available in the shipped DVD or download form the Market Place.XI content should be relevant to the backend engine version ECC6. Import the design objects provided by SAP 3. . 4.Manage Queues .cpp to trigger SAL self registration. 18. Initialize integration Repository 2.

Repository > Environment > Configuration of Integration Directory It is also JAVA webstart on all the client machines Business System . 4.SPROXY (Tcode) 8.298 7. Maintenance certificate locks SPAM & is valid for 3 Months. Import the system landscape (Products & Software components) into Integration Repository. Clear the cache if required for SLD Note: IR requires JAVA webstart which is around 30MB on each XI Consultant desktop. Export XI Content 3.. SXI_Cache (Status of XI runtime Cache) 19. Transaction SLDCHECK is used to check the SLD Connectivity 20. XI/ PI should be updated (kernel. Define the uniform resource name 5. The interface objects are cached in the table which can be monitored by transaction. Import XI Content 2. 26-Aug-09 INTEGRATION REPOSITORY 1. CIM should be updated before any other system in the landscape.Java prog (IR)) ABAP . Go To > Int. Generate proxy objects (sproxy in ABAP) (Tools. Transport Organizer User Interface INTEGRATION DIRECTORY It is used to define the configuration that will be used at runtime. SLD. Patching XI/ PI Use SPAM to patch ABAP Use JSPM to patch JAVA Maintenance certificate is mandatory for all the patches in NW04S SR3 form January 2009 onwards. Patches).

Configure delete procedure in SXMB_ADM .It is used to delete the messages (Activating the delete switch) . Business Service .new entries Select the category Specify the parameter value QM1 . Configuring Logs severity Goto T-Code : SXMB_ADM Integration Engine Configuration Click on specific configuration Click on change . Category : Parameters Monitor : PM2_Monitoring Tuning : EO_ 2. Defining Interfaces for archiving & retention period. to a technical system). Schedule delete jobs Job Name: SAP_BC_XMB_DELETE_<Client> . (In ERP we use DB15.Process Monitoring Info. Party in a company customer. File. Goto : DB15 Tables in Object : SD_VDDAT 6. It is used to define the time period before it gets archived.299 The system that is defined in SLD (assigned with client no.Each XMI Message in flagged for archiving or deletion upon processing. IX0S & DARK are third party tools for archiving. When the data is not updated in the messages during runtime. Scheduling Archiving Job It is used to schedule the archiving based on time and date.The service defined in SLD. 1. We can specify the sender & receiver whose messages can be flagged for archiving. 5. SF01 to configure & Schedule the archiving) 4. Receiver Determination to define namespaces. interface. SARA. 3. Then we will go to ID to clear SLD.

It is used to process the message from Sender to the receiver.Message Mapping Process Flow of Message The message is sent by a sender using by calling a outbound interface (Sending System). The message is received by the inbound proxy of the receiving engine & it acknowledges back to the integration server. 27-Aug-09 http://<hostname>:8000/sap/xi/engine RUNTIME WORKBENCH . Central_back. Create specify condition Username : DDIC Action: Trace level. client & condition also set for tracing. Sender_back.Technical Routing M . Error Analysis Settings It is used to trace based on users. Message processing is based on LTM L . The message is received in IE or Server by using Inbound with logical routing & the message is processed through the outbound processing using LTM.Logical Routing T .300 It is used to delete the messages that are flagged for deletion. receiver. There are 6 Pipeline (Central. receiver_back) Each pipe line internally contains pipeline elements. Sender. It uses pipeline call integration server. Argument: 3 If the message id is 235 then logging in 1 If client is 000 then logging is 0 Display pipeline definition. 7.

Component Monitoring 3. It specifies where the message is stuck in the error category. sender. On day-day basis we need to identify the messages that are not processed and escalated to the respective trans. which will be displayed in the message monitoring 3. The message is received in the inbox of the integration server.301 It is used to monitor the XML messages from one end to another end. Message Flow: 1. Messages can be filtered based on status. 2. this should be displayed in the message monitoring. 1. The message is processed with receiver determination to identify the receiver who is configured in the integration directory. It provides the following monitoring elements. receiver. Message Monitoring 2. End to End Monitoring COMPONENT MONITORING: (INTEGRATION SERVER) It is used to monitor the Integration repository. data and time. Sender sends the message to integration server. Integration directory Runtime Wrokbench SLD Integration Server Note: We need to see the icon as green Yellow means warning Red as error. The status determines whether the message can be processed or not. (Register in the SLD) . XSMB_ADM Message Monitoring: It is used to monitor the XML message use transaction SXMB_MON1/ SXI_MONITOR to monitor the message or the web option (rwb0 to monitor the message.

exactly are the message has to be transferred. ICM . There are mapping failures (in IR). PI supports it. Gateway.restart not possible. too many receivers are not allowed in BE SYNC (Synchronous) i. Technical Routing: This is where the exact business system of a sender and receiver is identified. Check and refresh the cache using SXI_CACHE or check the configuration in the Integration Directory. J2EE. 5. adapter engine is called (CAE). Mapping: The sending message data structure should map with the receiving message data structure.ASYNC .e. 7. If receiver agreement not found than this error occurs. No receiver . QUEUE MONITORING SMQ1. Interface determination Interface has to be determined so that the message will be pick by that API.Connection Exceeded (Increase the ICM Threads/ Soft shut down RZ10) ICM/ Min . Userid and Password.e. RINF. ROSSATANET). BE .Full disk or database errors. 'BE' . It is possible to define more than one receiver E010/ E0 Technical routing fails with message outbound binding not found. Mapping Errors No_Mapping_Program_find (Indicates problem in the mapping programs) RFC ERRORS Check the RFC connectivity. 6. i. if the error is like SYS_FAIL .case . If third party adapter like Tipco is used. SOAP. Call Adapter: If required central. SMQ2.Thread Adapter Problems . It consists of various adapters (File Adapter. J2SE.cannot be resent. TOO_MANY_RECEIVE_CASE_BE There should be only one receiver in a synchronous message. monitor the status of queues.302 4. HTTP.

● AS ABAP components (in the graphic on the left): ○ The dispatcher distributes the requests to the work processes. and load balancing in the SAP system.303 Check the adaptors and connection between IS. To retain clarity a few communication channels are not included in the graphic. . It can process both server and client Web requests. In addition to multiple dialog instances that execute user requests. ○ The work processes execute ABAP or Java programs. Technical Components An SAP system consists of several application server instances. If all the processes are occupied the requests are stored in the dispatcher queue. the ASCS (ABAP System Central Services). message exchange. WE21/ To check IDOCS. Receiver and sender. A dialog instance with AS ABAP and AS Java consists of the following components: ● The Internet Communication Manager (ICM) sets up the connection to the Internet. The graphic below shows the components of the SAP NetWeaver Application Server (in grey). More information: Internet Communication Manager (ICM) Work Process (BC-CST) SAP Gateway Java Cluster Architecture. IDOCS: If the messages are still processed using IDOCs use SM58. there is a special instance that contains the message server and the enqueue server .the SCS (System Central Services) for the AS Java. IIOP and Telnet protocols. WE05. It supports HTTP. It cannot process any dialog requests. ○ The SAP Gateway provides the RFC interface between the SAP instances (within an SAP system and beyond system boundaries). P4. HTTPS und SMTP protocols for the AS ABAP. ○ The instance controller controls and monitors the life cycle of the AS Java instance. We also need to refresh adapter cache in SXI_CACHE into adapter engine cache. In AS Java the ICM supports the HTTP(S). ● Central services (message server and enqueue server) are used for lock administration. ● AS Java components (in the graphic on the right): ○ The Server Processes execute Java requests. IDEX5 is used to identify the XML Messages (IDOCS) in the adapter. The SAP NW AS can act as a Web server or a Web client. as well as one or more databases.

304 Upgrading Integration Develop * Customization Basis Platform .

Supports (24/7 * 365) 6. 3. 3. Supports MCOP [OLAP/ OLTP) Supports all kinds of interfaces Will use XI to communicate with other GUI Developed in PHP or JAVA .0 c 4. MM.0. 7. Tightly integrated with rich set of modules SD. DB Independent 9. FI.1c. PI etc.0 b 4.7 ECC5 ECC6 ECC7 2. Intranet and Internet (Web based) 13.i BW Portals 4. 7.. HR.1 5. OS Independent 8. 2. Upgrades and Enhanced Patches 2. Industry Specific Solutions 10. 7.0 3. Netweaver 7.1... 7.0.0 i 4.5. ..0 a 4.0. CO.I18n 3. Oil. Insurance BI. PS.1 12. PM. 3. Continuous improvement by releasing Support Packs.0.5. 6.. High level Security 5. Non Unicode / Unicode 4.0. Unicode system (Multi language Support) .0 3. 3. Exchange information between SAP to SAP and NON SAP 11.305 Advantages of SAP 1.1a b c .

BI. 16. Chemical.Small Midsize Business BI (Netweaver) latest in BI Suite7 Notes / Packs Support Packs Solution Manager EHP Good Feedback from the customers Good service provider from service. Pharmacy. IS Textile. Supports all third party tools mobile.sap.306 14. Installation of all the above components 2. SMB (Small Customers) . XI.. High Level Security (SOX) 15. Oil.com Internet/ Intranet http://<hostname>:8000 EWA MCOD/ OLTP BASIS NETWEAVER Requirements in the Market Basis Consultant Netweaver Security Consultant Enterprise Portal Tech Solution Manager Basis: A foundation layer for all SAP systems and with out Basis there is no SAP System Role of the Basis Admin 1. Insurance.Enterprise Central Component .. Solution Manager and CRM) ECC. Post Installation Activities + Specific post installation for (CRM. Fabrication and Banking 17.

Web Application/ Portal Engineer SAP Business object Consultants People Soft tech lead-security/ Portal/ Admin SAP MM Consultant SAP SD Solution Architect SAP Basis Senior Consultant SAP FICO Consultant SAP Security Engineer SAP Development Lead SAP Security Admin Lead SAP technical architect consultant SAP Abap Principle Consultant (Exp in Life Cycle Stages) SAP XI/PI/ Enterprise portal lead developer/ programmer SAP BW Migration SAP Basis & Virtualization Consultant Basis Layer up to 4. Customize and Development.6) ECC BI B SCM A S SRM I S CRM Note: Application Server provides Internet and Intranet to BASIS SAP Web Application Server . 11. Patch Management 4. Load Balancing 9. Role Management 6. 16. 4. 12.5. .6D (3. 8.307 3. 5. 6. 3.0. 2. Performance & Fine Tuning 7. 10.1. Administration & Monitoring 8. 15. | Security | Different level of Designations in SAP 1. 14. 3.0. 4. User Administration 5. 9.Integration of BASIS and Internet/ Intranet all functionality of SAP defined in ABAP so called as SAPWEBAS ABAP SAPWEBAS JAVA to be more interactive through web. 7. 4. 4. 13.

0. Multilanguage SAPWEBAS Application platform to host all SAP Application components. CO. XI Security WEBAS Java Security. SOX HR Security/ Structural Authorizations Netweaver User Management Engine J2EE Roles Single sign on LDAP User Administrative Monitoring BI Security. FI. PI7.0 SAPWEBAS ABAP Provides Business Functionality SAPWEBAS JAVA Interactive/ Dynamic.0. 3.SAP software change registration.0 (SAP Stack) BI7. 710 PI 7. .0. WEBAS Basis Layer Netweaver 7. 7. EP ITS NETWEAVER is a PIPA Application Platform People Integration Information Integration Process Integration BASIS ERP Security SD. PS. PM.308 Enterprise portal 640.0 SOLMAN. PM. 700.10 XI 2. SD. MM.0. SSCR . MDM7.

5B.6B.. and click (not double click) on the Database server and then click on release notes. . 4.0B. /usr/sap/<SID>/SYS/exe/run—the directory that holds a local copy of all SAP instance executables.. 4.309 24/Jun/09 SAP R3 4. libraries and tools How to know the kernel version of a SAP R3 system ? Goto transaction sm51.6D and so on . There you will see the SAP R/3 kernel and patch level etc.. 4.

310 Kernel or Shell : The core that provides basic services for all other parts of the operating system. It provides set of services that can be used by programs insulating these programs from the underlying hardware. (It may be required to create SAPMnt in earlier versions but in the current versions based on Netweaver it is created automatically) SAPLoc in Windows This SAPmnt is shared because it needs to share the transports. -SAPMnt: Is a shared SAP Mount which is used to host the directories related to SAP. executables etc between systems in the landscape. support packages. To maintain file system 4. To handle interrupts 5. To handle errors 6. Major functions of kernel are: 1. To control access to the computer 3. [Dev] ---------->[Qlty]---------->[Prod] SAPmnt . or KERNEL: The kernel is the part of the Operating System(OS) that interacts directly with the hardware of computer through device drivers that are built into the kernel. To manage computer memory 2. To perform input and output services (which allows computers to interact with terminals storage devices and printers) and 7. To allocate the resources of the computer (such as CPU and input/output devices) among users. profiles.

Multilanguage Support This requires additional 40% of resources.311 Default Users <SID>ADM -. A client accesses the servers. A host has its own address on the network. It provides access to services and information. A server has its own address and sometimes multiple addresses. and is its own machine. Earlier case Individual passwords need to be set but now day's only one Master password for all the userids. Multiple Components on a Single DB repository A host is either a client or a server.SAP start ORA<SID> -. It requires its own address.For UNIX SAP SERVICE <SID> (OS Level Access Related to SAP) Sys system J2ee_ADMIN SAP* DDIC SAPSR3 SAPSR3DB Master Database Java Web SAP R/3 Unicode . Interface / Screen Exports/ System Copies Kernel [ Dependent] .

DB] Multiple components on a Single DB SID .SMN SID . GUI Presentation All the passengers Application Resrv.SAP<SID> Owner 2 . Caching/ Buffers Note: If one App server is down no need to worry we can access another application server. App server doesn't contain any data on its own.312 Install Mstr Java Comp JRE Exports [ Dependent] [ Independent] [ Dependent] [ Independent of OS. Alpha Versions) Libraries (Linux) ~ Exe (Windows) R/3 Architecture Eg: Consider the Reservation Counter.EPD EPDB SMNDB Owner 1.SAP<SID> First Shipment Customers . It process data rather than carrying data. Counter <They do not carry Any thing> Database Centralized (Native form of Database) Mobile IE Debit Card ATM * Commit occurs then only amount (Synchronous update) will be debited from the ATM. .150 Customers (Beta.

Transact SQL . DB. 32/64 bit dependent) \usr\sap\sol\sys\exe Start . Used to convert the data in to Native SQL Statements.Pl/ SQL Presentation Server: Submits the user request Application Server: Process the user request by interpreting the request and it has a queuing mechanism based on FIFO. Frequently accessed/ rarely changed (Master Data) Eg: Address.Run .313 Sql Server Oracle .sqlplus "/as sysdba" Select username from dba_users. Users always communicates in OPEN SQL which is SAP Specific format and not dependable on any database. It is intelligent to store the frequently accessed data as in Cache/ Buffer . Select BNAME from SAPSR3.USR02. Unicode. Company name. Kernel Set of Executables (OS.Rarely changed. (database users) (Sap Users) SAP K E R .

tsk file specifies the table/ index etc that needs to be created on the DB. 2.sap. DB and the OS.log Sapinst_dev.cmd Sapappl0.str .log file Eg: Sasapappl0.xml -Helps to restart installation from the point where it is failed.cmd file and during the process they writes into .xml Keydb.Structure of the DB Control.also provides similar log in case of installation is aborted . Extracts the software.tsk Sapappl0.log Sapappl0. Each task is commanded by .bck Sapappl0.Specifies the installation success / failure . Sapinst tool is used to install the software if required we need to download it from service.314 DB OS Kernel Provides communication between SAP.com/swdc .tsk. Usr\sap\sol\sys\exe\uc\NT1386 25/Jun/09 Installation Logs C:\program files\sapinst_instdir\solman\system\ora\central\as Sapinst. What happens during installation? 1.log .

Checks for user <SID>ADM (SAP System Administrator) Who owns SAP System and has all the privileges on SAP (Start/ Stop/ Environment) Domain Admin.Can create the userid Note: The user who initiates the installation should have the privileges as Local administrator to install the software. SAPSID-Instance Number 5. Windows App Server <SID>ADM UNIX App Server <SID>ADM Database ORA<SID> Database <SID>ADM Note: SAPSERVICE<SID> is a service used to start and stop the services (Password never expires) <SID>ADM expires for every 30 days Eg: SAPOSCOL. (This problems occurs in a Domain) If the user does not exists it creates now. AD Admin . It creates local groups and global groups and assigns them to users . create services etc. assign groups. ORA<SID> provides the runtime environment for Database. On Windows OS <SID>ADM is also responsible for database but on UNIX ORA<SID> is the owner to work on the database.. create users. create groups.315 3.

From Computer Management -> Local Users and Computers we can view this Users Groups Services Creating directories Executables . SAPCCMSR is an agent to collect JARM (Java Application response time Management) and pass it to ABAP CCMS (Computing Center Monitoring System) It is only used in JAVA and ABAP stack. SAPCCMSR are created and Run with user. SAPOSCOL is started first to check whether the resources are available (Operating system collector) It is used to collect the OS Utilization information and pass into SAP system. DB) .Create MMC for Windows to start/ stop sap system From cmd prompt Startsap name=SID Sets the user as nr=00 SAPDIAHOST=willsys28 SAPSR3 for ABAP SAPSR3DB for Java Engine .Extract Kernel Executables (OS.Master password is set accordingly to the company policy .316 Global groups .Domain Level Local groups . SAP<SID>_01. It creates Services SAP<SID>_00.DB Dependent Note: .Locally SAP_LocalAdmin SAP_SOL_GlobalAdmin SAP_SOL_LocalAdmin 6. SAP<SID> is used to start the SAP System. if the service is not started SAP will not start. SAPOSCOL.OS Dependent .

Installation Successful -- Installation Directories D:\usr\sap \USR directory is created with a shared folder SAP with shared SAPMNT & SAPLOC Eg: SAPMNT: SAPLOC: \\willsys\sapmnt ~ d:\usr\sap Both in Win and UNIX Only in Windows not in UNIX These are shared between systems and accessed locally and globally CCMS . The task files are created to create the tables and load the entries The task files are displayed as process on the installation screen "2 complete 3 running 4 waiting" 11.TPL Tablespaces are just like almoras in a house. --. Upon running all the tasks the SAP Database is created and DBStatistics runs. 29769 ABAP related tables. Creates the tablespaces and datafiles on DDLORA. Creates the Database and runs the scripts 8. Select count(*). 7. Query: Select count(*) from dba_tables where owner = 'SAPSR3'. these users owns the respective databases.e. DB Users are set with default password and SAP Application open RFC Connection. Now command files are created pointing to .str and data on the exports 10.317 Where the systems are installed with these schema owners i.. owner from dba_tables group by owner. 9. 12.

Installation Inputs SAPInst SID .These are also populated from JAVA Engine (Generic Request Message Generator GRMG) . . Netweaver & CRM2007) I.Used for alert logs that is populated by the service SAPCCMSR (Java Stack Only) PRFCLOG .0. ECC6.is used during upgrade .the complete SAP Application Server.e.is used to host the Developments PUT SID Hosts Trans 26/Jun/09 TASKS Installing SAP Component on SOLMAN On Windows/ SQL Server On Windows/ Oracle Windows/ DB2 Linux/ Oracle HPUnix/ Oracle AIX Solution Manager Connects all the three systems (ERP i.318 PRFCLOG PUT SID HOSTS Trans CCMS .

01) Mater Password JCE Policy Path for the CDs. .cmd.319 Instance Number (Default 00. Installation Steps Users. sapinst_dev. groups.Requisites for the Installation (JAVA. VMACHINE. SharedMnt.tpl.DXDIAG Tool on windows to check the consistency of the hardware . RDBMS (Structures)) 1. . Installation Logs Significance Sapinst_dir (Win. Services. Directories.cmd . CreateDB. Linux. Check the Hardware conflicts using OS Utilities Run . Updated Stats. Unix) Sapinst. III. Kernel (Extraction). II. . Login to the system as <SID>ADM with the specified password 2. RFC's POST INSTALLATION To Check/ Test the installation Pre. Check the disk space.tsk. LoadDB. Check the installation Logs 4. utilization and upgradability Eg: root in Unix C:\ in Windows 3. log.str. . .toc.

"\\Willsys\Usr" 9. (SAPMnt).ef | grep ora* On Windows services. Check the USR Directory (SAP Instance files..Cmd .msc 8. Check the services and ensure that they are running 1.Used to collect the OS Resources 2. and SAPLoc on windows Run . Listener . Oracle Service<SID> Which is required for the Database On UNIX ps . SAPOSCOL .Oracle Listener service should be started on the specified Port (1521-1529) 4.. App) predefined shared SAP Directory with SharedMnt.320 5.ABAP Instance Checks the DB Status 98-99 for routing .. Trans Directory .Used for transporting the Objects Note: SID Specifies the Application Server and is possible to have multiple <SIDS> differed by the instance number Queries: SQL> Select status from V$Instance. SQL> Startup followed by enter key SQL> shutdown immediate Note: Only one SAPOSCOL per system Max of 97 Systems on a single box SAPOSCOL_00 . Check the groups SAPLOCAL_ADMIN SAPGLOBAL_ADMIN ORA_SID_DBA ORA-DBA ORA_SID_OPERATOR 7. SAPSERVICE<SID> 6. Check the two Installation users on OS From Local Users and Computers <SID>ADM..Which is mandatory to start SAP 3. SAP<SID>_00 .

321 SAPOSCOL_01 ...used to specify the usage types that are installed on the system. \usr\sap\<SID>\config on a particular <SID> ERP <SID1> EP BI JAVA ABAP ERP<SID2> EP BI JAVA ABAP Note: Now-a-days its possible to install different engines as add-ons. 10. Usagetypes.JAVA Instance Note: Each SID uses different Ports Note: In the console tree of SOLMAN if all the three entries (SERVICES.... DVEBMGS <Instance Number> DVEBMGS00 ..ERP (ECC5..is a ABAP Engine JC00 .properties .PI Dealers Enterprise Portal .... <SID> Directory \usr\sap\<SID>.SAP Central Instance DVEBMGS00 contains J2ee/ SDM/ JSPM direntories then it is Integrated Engine (ABAP + JAVA) Note: Portal is only an application that is not based on ABAP Engine Eg: Consider Hero Honda Land Scape BI .Standalone JAVA Engine SCS01 .CRM .SRM Suppliers . 11. USERS and GROUPS) are available then only we can confirm there are 3 Instances in one single system.0) .. Config...

log . sapstart.cmd Note: Exe directory holds commands.hosts all the executables from netweaver exe dir contains UC/ NUC and 32/64.7 we can see only exe directory 13. i386/ ia64 In 4. Work Directory This stores the startup and error logs -------------------Starting and Stopping SAP System Open up the services file from windows\system32\etc Startup: What happens during the startup? 1. It starts database by using command strbs. Checks the DB startup User issues a command called startsap 2. scripts and executables \USR\SOL\SYS\EXE\UC\NTI386\ strbs.322 12. SYS Directory Contains executables and profile parameters to start and stop the system EXE Directory . It starts the database and writes the logs into the work directory Note: Stderr1.cmd In order to start the system it looks in to the profile START_DVEBMGS00_WILLSYS28 <Instance> <Host Name> 3.log (Standard Error Log) \USR\SAP\SOL\DVEBMGS00\WORK Eg : .

Netweaver & CRM 2007) Netweaver components (EP.323 If the folder name changed as NTi386 to NTi3867 sap wont startup 4.0. Installation Logs and then Significance . 6. Starts internet communication manager by using icman. Central 4. Database. Database Server/ Instance 2. Dialogue 3... Starts the instance i. dev_w1. XI.e.. Central Instance 3. BI. ICM SHUTDOWN Sequence 1.exe and writes Log file into dev_icm.. Installation Inputs 3. dev_w0.exe and writes the log into Dev_ms. STARTUP Sequence 1. Starts Application Server (Central Instance) It is started by using msg_server. JAVA) 1. 5. Installation Steps 4.. Dialogue Instance 4. stderr2. ICM 2. Pre-requisites 2. dialogue by using disp+work and writes into Dev_disp.ERP (ECC6. 27/Jun/09 Note: Solution Manager Connects all 3 Sys .

cmd .. CPIC_MAX_CONV = 500 CPIC Protocal (Common Programming Interface for Comm) In Linux # setem CPIC_MAX_CONV 500 and press enter Inputs: Steps: Logs: Checklist: Startup Startup Uses MMC ->Select SID -> RT Click . Installation Check/ Test 6. Starting and Stoping System 7. JRE and set the path 1.cmd We should logon as <SID>ADM/ ORA<SID> win/ UNIX to start database.4/2_12 7. Master Pwd. CRM/ SOLMAN/ XI. (Root and Administrator) .Start It reaches from the Startup Profile Start Database --.Log Directories Why the Database is not started? 1. stderr*. . SID.324 5. Pre-Requisites 1.. startdb. CD with Lable. Installation Guide Www. strbs.we cannot startup the database Database terminated or Aborted which may requires restore & recovery. SAPInst_Dev.. Servicemarketplace/instguide 3.Log.log. Startup Errors and Resolution 8. Sizing H/w (If user increases) 4. Kernels SAPInst. Hardware 2.v9start.. JAVA.Ports should not be used 6.Strdbs. Installation post steps 1.log.sql Listner control -> Lsnrctl Lsnrctl start Look for services Oracleservice <SID> and Oracle Listner.asc 8. IP Address/ Hostname .. Swap memory 20GB RAM * 3 Times 5.

com) 4. Causes: 1. Starting Dispatcher and work process It uses disp+work to start the instance and writes the logs into stderr/ dev_disp/ dev_w0..willsys..Oracle Instance started. There is no sufficient space to start database 2.. Hostname/ Ip address change 2. .log Starting Message server Started by using msg-server. Analyze Alert <SID>. Certain scripts need to run after upgrade else the db many not start Export Oracle/ HP Unix Shared Drive Import DB2 Linux Kernel takes care of Migration Exports OS/ DB Independent CreateDB 5. Changes or corrupted profile parameters.. Port number 3600 is not available 3.exe and writes log into Dev_ms.log/ stderr log file It could not be started due to the following reasons. ora-600 etc.log for Oracle errors like 0ra-1578.325 Database can be started using command startup or startup open SQL> startup Says. D:\ Oracle\ SOL\ Saptrace\ background\ alert_<SID>. Dev_ms should be logged with customer key 5... Memory could not be allocated as per the Oracle Profile Parameters 3.. 4.. File permissions on the profile/ file or Dir does not exist. Fully qualified host name FQHN dev_ms the host name should suffix with at least two dots (Eg: www. 1.

dev_rd.log ] From this we can find when the system is up or down. Dispatcher is started by using parameters from <SID>_DVEBMSGS00_hostname. Set the parameters rdisp/trace = 0. If any of the memory. 5. Default. buffer tuning parameters are not configured properly then instance could not be started. DVEBMGS00\Work [ Available.pfl 2. dev_rfc. Connection to Database failed due to authorization/ listner 4.3. System Profiles There are three profiles 1.2.1. We need to set this value to Zero immediately after debug.4 It will write enormous log file into work directory.326 Various Reasons for the Failure 1. (Work directory can be deleted and recreated) Each work process goes to the db and db will listen the workprocess OracleSOL01TNSListner .need to started on Linux Manually Refer. Start_DVEBMGS00_Hostname 2. . It provides value globally to all the instance when more than one instance is configured.connected} If the logs could not be analyzed to debug on error situations then Rt click on the process -> Select Developer Trace. Hostname/ IP Address change 2. Dev_disp {started . <SID>_DVEBMGS00_Hostname Resides in \usr\sap\<SID>\sys\profile Default Profile Startup Instance Default profile is used to provide default parameters to start the system. dev_w0. Message server/ DB down 3.

work process.327 Dialogue instance is something like extending reservation counters when users increase.. Dialogue Instance Database Central Instance Dialogue Instance Dialogue Instance Default Profile: Start_Dev : Eg: Common Dress Code applicable to all Eg: Started Individually Eg: Senior . Startup profile will be available for all the instances and it contains database. msg server.. ICM startup. Instance profile depends upon the resources and it contains only dispatcher.the profiles will be = 20 * 2 + 1 20 Instances * 2 (Startup and Instance) + Default Instance is a set of services with a dispatcher and work process. Junior depending on the resources <SID>_dev. dispatcher. Say for Eg: 20 Instances . work process. : There will be only one default profile. ICM Startup. DISP+WORK Instance profiles governs the instance such as work process/ memory/ logon parameters/ ICM parameters .

Notify all the users using email. Installation of SAPGUI Use the presentation server DVD to install SAPGUI. 28-Jun-09 Architecture of R/3 R/3 Multilayer PS AS DS PS - It is a GUI from where the user submits the request. During OS/ Database updates 3. Similarly Netweaver also include Mobile Infrastructure to provide mobile interface. 710 From Netweaver onwards to provide Web functionality <<internet communication framework>> ICF is provided so that the system can be accessed through web browsers.look for all the instances. Stop the dialogue instances 3. Power Outages 5. Shutdown: 1. Offline Backup Schedule Downtime 1. 700. HTML . 640.6c. 620. Unix) .6d.328 RZ03 . stop the database. [SM02] 2. JAVA. Maintenance Activities 4.JAVA (Non Windows. stop the central instance 4. It is also referred as an Interface Eg: SAPGUI It has various versions: 4. 4. there are three types SAPGUI for windows. Changes in SAP Parameters 6. During H/w Migration 2.

ini . SAPLogon.ini . Goto SE80 and publish system/ Internal Note: Download SAPNote to activate SICF services. Goto SAP Internet Communication Framework (SICF) Tcode: SICF Login to the system with the user DDIC with the Master password and create a super user similar to DDIC Use SU01 Tcode to create a user Note: Dont allow to perform by the DDIC SICF and press enter Under SAP ->Public ->BC (Basis connector) ->Rt click activate.ini copy on the desktop.329 We need to maintain the following initialization files. SAPRFC. ->BSP (Business server pages) ->PING Activate All the functionalities over the web.to access sap library 5.sillsys.to access servers over router 4..for RFC these files govern SAPGUI and requires on each end user desktop based on the need.ini . 1.ini .net) Ports 8000: ABAP . The system name should be FQHN (Fully qualified with atleast two dots eg: www. open it and try to add some items.Mandatory 2. Activating Webgui/ SOLMAN functionality over the web.ini . SAPROUTE. SAPLOGON. Solman\gui\press\gui\. SAPMSG.. SAPDOCCD.Used for load balancing 3.

webgui -> publish complete service Application Server: It is a physical entity used to handle the user requests. Instance is represented by its dispatcher & work processes (Disp + Work) Central Instance: There will be only one central instance in the sap system. Queue mechanism based on FIFO etc. CI .Client .Select . Select .sap.330 50000: JAVA ICM/ Hostname_full = willsys28. It is used to store the Data. Instance has its own instance number and it is possible to install multiple instances on single application server based on available resources. It provides Message server and Enque server along with other services.net.Internet service System Under object name folder "System" rt click -> publish complete service. Instance is a service that represents the sap runtime. this parameter needs to be set in RZ10. Database Layer/ Database Server/ Database Instance: There will be only one database instance in the SAP System. Interpretation of user requests. In sap terms it is an instance.. Dialogue Instance: It is required to handle additional load on the SAP System. SE80 . Instance provides memory. CPU.Client Oracle DB DI . buffers.

SE03 System settings(Modifiable and Non-Modifiable) In most cases PRD/ QAS are set to not Modifiable DEV/ SAND/ TEST are set to modifiable.331 We need to have a client to communicate with the Native SQL Each instance is monitored by its own DPMON (Dispatcher Monitor) For Net weaver JCMON ICMON [SMICM] ICM Monitor. Used to configure transport management system. SE06 Post installation Activity 2. Post-Installation Activities 1. STMS . 3.

SMLT or I18N 8. buffer parameters Define client Client copy Define Operation modes to effectively utilize resources Assign Timings . SCC4 12. 6. memory. SCCL 13. SR13 9. SM36 7.332 4. PFCG 10. RZ04 14. Define work process. SM63 Import profiles from OS Level to DB Create Super Users Schedule standard batch jobs Additional Languages configuration Library configuration Define custom roles and assign to users. RZ10 5. RZ10 11.

Apply license through transaction SLicense (Access Market Place to apply License) 20.from System-component information We need to apply patches (Kernel Info) Database Kernel R/3 Kernel Patches that are applied online without restarting the System 22.20 BI-Cont .16 SAP-BW . Install Dialogue Instances if required DB Client software 18.Component Version .35 ABAP . BRTOOLS 16. Hotpacks In UNIX # mount IP: / oracle/dump /oracle/share 29/Jun/09 23.333 15.16 PI-BASIS . Notes These are small corrections to the programs which are applied through transaction SNOTE . SPAM Applying support packages 21.13 Add-on System-status: . Upgrade Kernel and SPAM version Kernel software and SPAM . SICF/ SE80 Take offline backup Enable WebGUI 17. SMLG Configure logon loadbalancing 19.16 BASIS .

bug fixes.Key and Requests .Solmon click on mirror icon . Support Package Group of notes.SAP SOLMAN) TCODE .334 24. Basis PI Basis. Kernel.SLICENSE System .com From the tab called . program corrections.provide type of system like (SAPERP.SAP Netweaver.c. Enhancements and additional functionality.sap.Request Permanent license key . SAPM et..status . Licensing 8 Licenses for SOLMAN 8 Licenses for Netweaver Valid till 31-12-1999 service. Support Stacks It is a group of support packages that includes ABAP. 25.

is having the following system landscape SAND TEST CUST (DEV) QTST TRNG PPRD PRD MIGR/ PRL LICENSING .Connection Test (Online SAP Service) Note: ARAMCO .OSS1 or SM59 Go through: SAPOSS .335 TCODE .

3% Service Tax + Customs 22% Maintenance cost across the globe except INDIA 5 22% Eg: 1 24% Telco Bajaj ARAMCO 2 26% .4000 USD In India tag is 2000 USD for min number of users Eg: 10 + 1 is minimum Developers are charged differently 10 Users + 1 Developer 48000 * 50 = 12.till 9999(YYYY) . PI. ECC.04.270 -50000 One License . SRM.04. 000 -----. 68. BI. 000 20. 00.000 2.000 ------------------------14. MI License is user based Once the license key is received then goto SLICENSE Tcode -> INSTALL And click Install new licenses button .5000 . 04.8000 USD 10.--14.336 Standard License Maintenance License .000 4% VAT 17% Maintenance /Year 48. 000 .40000 USD . EP. 000 2.3 Months Each user license cost .SOLMAN.

EP7.doc.0.D:\USR\SAP\SOL\SYS\EXE\UC\NTI386 Note: In Linux SAPDB/ MAXDB will be the cheapest SAPDB/ MAXDB is a DB that comes along with the SAP USMM . 1.. Road map is step by step guide along with the required documents (. Hostname 3.0 like ABAP 7..System Measurement for the users SUSER .0 to ensure the consistency and bring all the components to version 7..BASIS 7.6.) /rmmain (ASAP Implementation Roadmap (V3.Its an executable) Note: All the executables resides in . . 2008 it is referred/ Renamed as Solman7.0 but from MAY.pdf.. Suport.BI7.0. PI7. Hardware Key (Installed by SAP . SID 2.0 (Enterprise Portal) 2. It is a free tool for only the customers provided by SAP.get It checks for 1.ppt.337 From cmd prompt Soladm> saplicense .) . Upgrade.0. url.Password never expires (Service Userid) SAP Solution Manager Note: Patches should be applied on Test/ Cust first after 3 .4 weeks will be applied on PRD.0 (Process Integration). It provides Road map for Implementation. . Current version is 4.

338 3.doesn't require a restart..requires a restart Dynamic parameters . Every Implementation should be started with SOLMAN 4. we need to import into database level Utilities -> Import Profiles SM21 step by step process of startup Static parameters . 30-Jun-09 SM36 Default Scheduling Totally 14 Jobs Will be OS level i. RZ10 . Required for generating upgrade/ Installation keys whereas Netweaver doesn't Requires a key.e.

work directory . 1. CTS is ran before STMS (SAP Transport Management System) 8. next enqueue and then the dispatcher (Or) Goto .dev_ms log file Network works for Message server and Message server searches for the least loaded dispatcher for load balancing SU53 Contains what all the notes.QTY -PRD . screens. ABAP Instance comes with 0 Java instance comes with 1. Client . In the post installation only STMS is configured 7.000 Master Client CLient. DEV . 4.150MB) 3.339 --- Notes -- Note: First Message Server comes up. Post Installation activities should be done on 003 or other and not on 001 5. Dialogue work processes only communicate with the user. 2. Dialogue writes the entry of the background job in the following tables TBTCP and TBTCS Each dialogue .066 Early Watch Client . programs owned by the user.5 Users Each work processes (15 .001 Production Client Wont be used in PRD 6.

340 3 system landscape DEV QTY PRD 2 system landscape SCC1 instead of STMS in case of 2 system landscape STMS QTY . Done from the Domain Controller 2.Night Dia to Bck SM63 . Dev will be the Domain Controller Some times whenever the system is always available say for eg: PRD will be considered to be DC.PRD 1.DbClk on Starting Interval and Ending Interval SMLT or I18N Language Installation Languages -> Classify Just provide the language ARABIC Then save it GOTO I18N System configuration . Used to transport Mass data @ single shot is a tcode to wake up all the programs availability for load balancing incase of two instances TP SGEN SMLG HalfPeak Hours 2 Background process Dialogue is converted to Background SR13 RZ04 Help (Before this we need to run an executable Maintain operation modes Operation mode .

car. .Select Interval and Assign .jar files (Parameter) .place the dump here 01-July-09 SM63 Select the interval Operation Mode .341 ADD And provide AR ARABIC Click on simulate RZ11 Parameter setting Display profile parameter attributes Zcsa\installed languages System Language \usr\sap\trans .

url. .. Upgrade.0 but from MAY.0. It is a free tool for only the customers provided by SAP. Maintenance Optimizer (MUPZ) 5..0.pdf.6. Every Implementation should be started with SOLMAN 4.0 like ABAP 7. 5. Required for generating upgrade/ Installation keys whereas Netweaver doesn't Requires a key.) /rmmain (ASAP Implementation Roadmap (V3. Current version is 4.. . Define a Solution and include systems for the following 1.0 to Ensure the consistency and bring all the components to version 7. It provides Road map for Implementation. PI7.BASIS 7. Early Watch Reports (EWA) 6.0..doc.ppt. 2008 it is referred/ Renamed as Solman7. Configure the satellite systems (SMSY) .) 3. and Suport. System Monitoring 2. Road map is step by step guide along with the required documents (. System Administration 3.Oraarch (SOLMAN 4. EP7. Service Level Reporting (SLR) 4.342 Note: Ports for Oracle Listener (1527 to 1521) Oracle\sol\sapbackup .BI7.0 (Enterprise Portal) 2.0 SR3) CD .0 (Process Integration).RMMAIN Solution Manager 1.

These are required to Monitor. Solution manager will be in a separate system.343 (Hanging systems in the landscape are called satellite systems) 7. Configured the service Desk to raise the issues as tickets and forward them to SAP if required. Administer the systems from a central location called Solution Manager. System Landscape Directory (SLD) (SMD) (BPMON) Eg: Logon to Solman and administrate everything on the landscape Creating Satellite systems 1. Instance Number and Installation No. Business process monitoring 11. Once the satellite system is configured there will be a trusted connection b/w the systems. Solution Manager Diagnostics 10. Documentation (Final preparation/ Go Live are not captured) 9. Client information etc. 2. These exe are required to be at OS level to startup the engine. 1. Note: Except exe's everything will be stored in DB. Hostname. sizing.interface to upload the documents without any virus. 3.. SAP Router 12. Satellite systems are the backend systems which are defined in the SAP Landscape. Support pack levels. Project Management for implementation 1. 2. Business Blue Print phase (Solar01) 3. H/w manufacturer and service Level agreements. We can also document the hardware info. . Project Preparation (Solar_proj_admin) 2. VSCAN Tcode . It is a landscape information provider and specifies the following. Realization Phase (Solar02) 4. S_SMC_47000017/ CRM_DNO_Monitor Tcodes System should be registered with Solman to get the support 8.

1.344 Goto .Goto . 02-Jul-09 Configuring SOLUTION MANAGER SMSY Goto SMSY . Instance Number). MsgServer Hostname. Hostname. Under relevant Continue --> . It is required only for Central Instance as it is tied up with the Message Server.Other Objects a pop up box is prompted to provide the inputs Provide SID. This key is called as Solution manager key and it is system specific (SID.SMSY and it is used to define the following.Under landscape components . all of those are created automatically when a satellite system is defined.It is mandatory to provide the installation key for all the Netweaver system without which the installation cannot be continued. License Keys or / Installation Keys/ or Upgrade Keys 2. Goto SMSY . databases manually but. servers.Select main Instance (RT Click) . Subsequently we can define systems. Define the logical components 1.Tcode . License Keys . Instance Number and Click on generate Installation or upgrade key. Satellite systems 3. Put a check mark under SAPECC Server.Create New System with assistance.

Trusted system RFC Connection Continue --> Note: SOLMAN will connect to the back end system either trusted/ Logon screen Outgoing RFC's RFC Connection for Read Access Option User : Generate Username and password : SOLMANSOL001 Continue -->> RFC Connection for Change Management Option User : Generate Username and password : SOLTMWSOL001 Continue -->> RFC Connection for Trusted Connection Option User : Generate Username and password : SOLMANSEWD .800 Establishes put a check mark the connections put a check mark b/w R/3 and Solman 00 wilerpdev (Satellite system host name) Continue --> Select use scenarios: Select .345 Provide System Number Message Server Continue --> Generate RFC Destinations Assign Logical components Clients .

S_RFCACL in the role to create and communicate with the back end systems.346 Additional RFC Connection Data Continue -->> System Monitoring Connection Check Mark . To create users and RFC connections in the Satellite system (it 3 times knocks the door of the back end system) and the 4th time need to provide the username and password for the solution manager.PFCG .Just save it.Assign System Monitoring Continue -->> Complete -->> It brings up the password screen 3 times . Provide the description and Click on Menu Tab . The user should have the authorization objects S_RFC.need to provide the password for the back end system. SAP* and DDIC doesn't have this authorizations Goto .Role Maintenance Provide the role name ZRFC and click on Single Role Prompts to Save this .

347 Assign the transaction by clicking Transaction Button and assign SU53 Tcode And click on assign transactions Click on Authorizations Tab and click on change Hit on manually and Include Authorization Objects Select S_RFC and S_RFCACL and save.. specific role in the back end system. Click on generate profile... back Click on User tab and assign the user the perform User comparison SMSY Continuation -Creating the Logical System Logical components are more important to communicate with specific client. ..

users are not existing Delete the user by ensuring that they are not pointed to any RFC and similarly RFC Connections as well. Administration. Create systems. refresh data. Maintenance optimizer etc. and regenerate RFC's and Delete RFC's 1. software components. Configure satellite systems Eg: DESC V$DATABASE Select DBID. Assign logical components 5. SMSY is used for the following 1.RFC Configurations Even we can delete RFC connection from SM59 Note: Ensure that RFC Connections are created earlier. Create products. databases for the satellite system 3.348 Main Instance SAP ECC Server Logical Component SAP ECC 6. servers. . 4.. NAME. Logical components specify the client number and the client role.0 Role Development Client 800 Assign Logical components to the system that is created. Installation Key/ Upgrade Key 2. Select the system --> Assign Logical Component --> Specify client --> Specify role etc SM59 . Change Management. Reporting. Created from V$DATABASE. Create solutions (Early Watch Alerts) Solutions are required for Monitoring.

Provide solution (Any name eg: ECC Solution) Lang .349 Goto T-Code DSWP/or Solution_Manager 1. Click under or on Solution 5.com It is used to communicate with SAP Market place using SAP Router. Select solution landscape/ Maintenance (Search for SAP Router) 03/Jul/09 STMS .sap.English SMSY is called as system landscape where we try to include a landscape. 3. Click on create to create a solution 2. Click on Maintain Global data Type under the url as : service. . Solution Landscape which is used to include logical components (<SID>Client) so that all the above activities are carried out based on Solution. 4.Transport Management System From Menu Help -> Create Support Message and this message will land up in Solution Manager.

Synergy with the Solution Manager.Spool bottle neck Critical Business Process Note: We can also integrate ticketing tools like Remedy. Service Level Reporting means Eg: Consider the domestic cylinder.Expensive reports bottle neck .Memory Bottle Neck . group_admin and SID Admin Note: System .e.Status (From here we need to apply patches) in Solution Manager Note: Maintenance Optimizer is used to find the next level of patches available..350 Note: Group users can only be modified by that owner of the group i..) might be running even the processor is good enough to handle. Database is filled 80% and need to send me an email. . Solman has its own Service Desk (Ticketing Tool) Continuation from 02/Jul/09 T-Code: DSWP Click on Solution Landscape Solution Landscape Maintenance .. Note: process will be slow down because of some expensive reports (select * from .

Check Mark . NOTE: Interface Scenarios is for Project Management Save the solution and we should able to see the system/ solution in EWA and the system and server information should be fetched into solution directory.351 Specify the Logical Component names and select the SID:Client Number (Put in Solution) Under logical component Select SAP ECC save it and click on Solution Settings .Successful * Note: Through SMSY we can find whether the logical systems are assigned or not.Time interval 5 Mins under Monitor graph refresh period And click on CCMS MONITORING OF EWA (Early Watch Alerts) Select the system .Confirm Sap Specified Alerts . Setting up Operations Goto: DSWP/ Solution Manager Maintenance Select the solution Click on operations setup Select solution monitoring Click on early watch alerts Create SAP Early watch alert Service Create .Solution Settings TAB CCMS MONITORING OF EWA.Check Mark .save and activate Go back and save -goback comeback .Task assigned but activities are missing Green . SM59 to verify this system is monitored by SOLMAN or not.TAB Provide .Task not assigned Red Color . If not Gowith SMSY and create the logical system Systems > Rt Click SU53 What user is having SU56 user buffers Yellow Color .

Sql Statements etc. Reports. Click on create Target SID . RFC Destinations SM_WISCLNT001_READ SM_WISCLNT001_ONLINE . Users. Provide Source| Destination If CCMS(Computing center Monitoring system) connectivity is in red or CCMS destination is blank then Goto RZ21 Monitoring Properties and Methods From Menu .Technical Infrastructure Display Topology It displays all the systems that are subjected for monitoring through this system. System Monitoring Goto: Solution Manager Select the solution Click on operation setup Select system monitoring Select setup system monitoring Select the SID and Installation number and it should be in Active. Once we save the solution under > Solution Structure > Copy Customizing | | The SAP System with all the details are displayed It is an option to copy the customizing of alerts From another solution.. SID SMD | INSTALLATION NUMBER 0020311138 | ACTIVE Check Mark Save it.352 The early watch alert service runs the transaction SDCC (Service Data Control Center) in the specified systems and brings the alerts based on SAPS threshold values Eg: Expensive transactions.

.Background jobs bottle neck .exe to the directory you have just created.). Prerequisites (Till 6th point is from SAP Website not from Willsys Notes) You have the latest version of SAProuter (available from the SAP Service Marketplace (http://service.353 This requires the satellite systems required patch up (ABAP. 04/Jul/09 SAP Router It is an executable file downloaded from service market place.6 c is a Basis | A T C H E S | P Front End Netweaver7 ADP HP ARAMCO . PI-BASIS etc. Download the latest version of the SAProuter from SAP Service Marketplace. Procedure . BASIS.Printing bottle neck ..Save It.Dialogue process bottle neck Go through other options under Setup system monitoring | .. 1. It will be in the run directory (Older versions). ST-PI. Copy the executables saprouter. For latest version we need to download from the Market place.User defined Alerts Select all the alerts and their threshold values .com/patches) The SAProuter version must not be under 23.sap.exe and niping. 2. . Read the README file in this package. This is to ensure the compatibility between Solution Manager and the Satellite systems Eg: Back end 4. Create the subdirectory saprouter in the directory <drive>:\usr\sap.

exe -p “service -r <parameter>“ Please note: The points stand for <drive>:\usr\sap <parameter> can be replaced by other parameters with which SAProuter is to be started. 5.. you have to enter the following in the registry: Under HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE  SYSTEM  CurrentControlSet  Services  Event Log  Application enter the key saprouter and define the following values for it: EventMessageFile (REG_SZ): .354 If there is no SAProuter there. 4.. It is important that the parameters are within the character string enclosed in double quotation marks. 6. Keep the files in TRANS Directory and usr\sap\trans. set the startup type to “automatic” and enter a user. Define the service with the following command: ntscmgr install SAProuter -b .. you can get a version (may be obsolete) from your directory <drive>:\usr\sap\<SID>\SYS\exe\run.. If SAProuter has already been entered as a service with srvany. We have to maintain maintenance optimizer in Solution Manager and should get an approval to download SAP Router with our host name and IP Address (This info need to send to SAP) We have to download Cryptographic file so that it will connect to SAP System by converting the password related information..\saprouter\saprouter.\saprouter\saprouter. SAP Router are meant to login to our SAP System (remote) by the SAP to resolve any issue that may occur.exe. Define standard service properties in Control Panel ® Services.exe TypesSupported (REG_DWORD): 0x7 Or In usr\sap directory create a sub folder called SAPRouter. To avoid the error message “The description for Event ID (0)” in Windows NT event log.. SAProuter should not run under the SystemAccount. Locale -a will tells us what language the system will support . remove the definition of the service from the Registry and restart the host. 3..

Maintain Optimizer Setup Provide SUSERID: without zeros With this user only the maintenance optimizer will work. if this RFC doesn't work we can't establish connectivity with SAP. Service Desk It is a tool used to create messages from the satellite systems and monitor from the solution manager. Client 001.355 Checking the Routing connectivity with SAP Trans-OSS1 is used to configure the connectivity with SAP. Note: Any changes in the route tab require the router to be restarted.com is recommended for connectivity.sap. The major advantage of this tool is It picks up the complete information of the users-screen so that the processing is simplified.service. SPRO stands for .Online SAP Service AISUSER .SAP Project Reference Object OSS . The entries in OSS1 (It is a transaction) reflected in RFC Connection SAP-OSS Copy SAP OSS RFC to SAP-OSS. SAPSNOTE and provide the logon security details that is language EN. Clarity. . Synergy ticketing tools. Earlier OSS1 is used to serve as a Market place to the customers but due to the network congestion between the customer and say systems SAP discontinued the usage of OSS1 and service market place www. This tool is similar to Remedy. S_SMC_47000017 (To Check the messages in the SOLMAN System) Or CRM_DNO_MONITOR Also refer BCOS_CUST table End user can create a message by using the T-Code: NOTIF_CREATE Note: SPRO1 is used to perform post installation activities for the Solution Manager. user is SUSERID.

But when we install the system with lower package levels {Solution Manager 4. Administration 6.IB52 ..Entry in Table 8. EWA (Early Watch Alerts) 4. Satellite Systems 2. Maintenance Optimizer. /SCPR20 is a transaction which is used to activate the business sets that are provided in the system. SLR . Goto IB52 or DSWP Select solution Goto the menu . In the current version of netweaver most of the components are activated.0} with base level 6 then we need to activate upon upgrading the patch levels. maintenance optimizer. We need to activate business sets for service desk.356 5-Jul-09 TASKS 1. Service Desk . Installation Base We can use this to identify the installation base of the satellite system. MOPZ When ever we need Read permissions for CCMS monitoring we have to define topology.Service Level reporting 7.Create Installation Base Initial data transfer for IBase . Solutions .Installation BAK .Activating EWA (Early Watch Alerts) 3. SOLMAN_DIRECTORY Goto solution manager and use above tcode to find the solution. System Monitoring 5.BCSET .Activating . change request management etc.

create That user will be a partner in our solution manager. if a service desk message is raised it uses the above RFC to land the ticket.357 Creating Business Partner Use transaction BP to create Business Partner. Goto the Satellite system Tcode: SM30 Table BC_BCOS_CUST this table maintains the RFC connections for the service desk and CHAMS i. Ensure that your solution manager is having support package ST[Solution Tools] minimum 10 level. https://websmp203-sap-ag.e.de/swdc Support packages and patches entry by application group Maintain the table AISuser In order to maintain this table SAP_MAINT_OPT_ADMIN role should present. Goto TCODE AISUSER . Goto Backend system Create an RFC pointing to Solman S_SMC_47000017 to check whether the tickets from various systems are landed in Solution manager. AIS user is used to maintain service market place userid to communicate with SAP and the RFC Connection will be SAP-OSS 06-Jul-09 Configuring Maintenance Optimizer It is a tool provided by SAP to ensure that all the support packages that are released after April 2007 related to Netweaver will be approved and downloaded through MOPZ we can add support packages to the download basket in the Market place. Goto DSWP Select the solution Goto edit Create business partner Select the users ..

(Need to use carefully in the production system) 1. Create Maintenance Transaction 2.358 User Contact Person Sapuser 5013295 The user with which we login or the user in the user master record.. SOLMAN40_MOPZ_TTYP_SLMO_000 SOLMAN40_CHARM_PROXYFACT_001 Note: BCSET should be activated only once because it over writes the existing data Tcode: /$tab /$sync deletes the buffer on the application server. applying the patches manually. 4. Goto download manager and download the files and perform the maintenance i.e.Download Manger. Assign SAP service Market place userid without "S000" SAP-OSS (RFC connection should also use the same userid to communicate with the market place) Activate BCSET or MOPZ is upgraded through Solution Manager Goto SPRO or SCPR20 activate...SAP Download manager . Allow the solution manager to choose the support packages or choose download manager to select the support packages. 1296589 (notes) Start .. 5. Project Preparation 2. Select the component and system 3. Project Management SAP Solution manager provides project implementation tools through ASAP methodology (Accelerated SAP) ASAP Methodologies : It contains 5 steps 1. 1242931. Click on continue to confirm the files in the download basket. Business Blue Print phase . Maintenance optimizer is only an authorized solution.

SAP uses tcode: SOLAR_PROJECT_ADMIN Click on create 1. Select Led by (Customer or SAP) Provide plan days say 2000 PD 5. 3. Select the solution: EWD solution for eg Hit okie 4. Business Blueprint In this phase the project is documented and the blue print gets signed off from the customer. Realization Phase 4. Scenario is nothing but a group of transactions that are related to a specific module like SD. Key process indicators. MM. etc also referred as Steering Committee (With some management skills) These committees assemble from time to time & review the progress of the project. BI etc The scenarios are provided through SAP BPR (Business Process Repository) . upgrade. Companies such as IBM may create a template project so that all the projects follows the same. The core team is defined from SAP. Type of project Implementation. Define the scope of the work under SCOPE tab Note: Include the logical component that is going to be involved in the project From system landscape tab define the logical system 2. business owners. Golive / Support 1. Final Preparation 5. implementing partner.359 3. upgrade etc. customer. Project type can be implementation. Provide project name 2.. HR. FI. template or support. Project Preparation: During this phase the business requirements are gathered and documented. Milestones are defined. persons (Responsible persons). support. Tcode: SOLAR01 is used to define the business blue print This is a phase where the required scenarios are selected.

Testing Testing takes place either in the testing client. Unit testing: Used to test the customizing in its test client within the same system.. 4.ERP .5B Basis 450 .0E Basis 300 3. The configuration takes place and change requests are generated in the target system subsequently a support message is raised to release or import the transport request before testing.1I Basis 310 4. 2. Integration testing: It is performed in a separate system QAS Non _ Modifiable Note: Netweaver 2004 Netweaver 2004s Netweaver 2007 3.360 07-Jul-09 3. . BI.Includes SOLMAN .0F Basis 300 3. Tcode: SCC1 is used to copy the requests between clients before change requests are released. 1. Realization Is a place where the actual configuration takes place SOLAR02 Note: Solution Manager is also called as frontend platform to configure all the back end systems.Includes SOLMAN. integration client and test cases are built during the configuration only. EP etc.0D Basis 300 3.1H Basis 310 3.0B Basis 400 4.

. PowerPoint's.RMMAIN . End user acceptance. firewalls.0 .00 Basis 6. GOTO .Select the ASAP Methodology . proxy.Goto Project Prep and Db click .00 Basis 7.(Solar_testplan) We can maintain the project documentation and the general documentation using the respective tabs. Data Transfer to SAP system is performed periodically fro legacy systems and the legacy systems are discontinued in due course of time upon final acceptance from the business process owners..to apply patches. External security obtained by deploying routers.e. SAP Early watch report. Service Market Place. Internal security is obtained by defining roles and assigning those to the users.20 4.Select Accelerator Note: Need to focus on these points considering Solution Manager 1.72 Basis 6.40 Test Case documents . BCSET 5. Administration 4. Post Installation Activities 3.User request a change (Say for Eg . pdfs.71 Basis 6. The integration testing signoff from the users. Installation 2. url's. internal and external security. Accelerators are nothing but predefined templates.6C Basis 460 4..RMMAIN) It provides the complete implementation steps which are discussed above along with accelerators. CHARMS ..Enterprise Core components) 6. 6. 5.0) .From Menu GOTO .actually in RampUp SAP GUI FOR WINDOWS 6.Change Request Management System . .Modify a storage location) .00 (ECC 6. word docs. both Legacy and SAP runs together for certain period of time.40 (ECC 5. Final Preparation: It is used to prepare the quality and as well as production system.. MOM's (Minutes of Meeting) Etc.361 4. MTP (Mote to Production) and readiness of production system communicating with SAP to conduct GO-Live sessions. GO-LIVE During this phase the system is subjected for parallel run i. ROAD MAP (Tcode . filters and SAP Router etc.20 5. End user training.

SOLAR01.Management approves location change .Based on the Priority approval for changing the location .Now it is also be treated as an Issue (Issue Management) . Integration test .362 -.change request submitted for unit test.Service desk message .Mssg lands in SOLMAN . a change request to change location .Issue/message closed ..Management declared that there is no change in location (Issue Closed) .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful